JP7213508B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine that performs a demonstration assuming that a customer is waiting when the customer is waiting (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2012-213564 A (paragraphs [0065] to [0067])

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is a concern that the interest in gaming will decrease.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in a player's desire to play.

Effective solutions for achieving the above objectives are shown below. In addition, the operation etc. will be explained as necessary. Also, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations and the like are shown as appropriate in the embodiments of the invention, but they are not limited in any way.

The present invention
A gaming machine that performs variable display,
an operation means operable by a player to shoot a game ball;
a display means capable of displaying a performance;
a production executing means for executing the production;
with
The production executing means is
In a situation where the variable display is not performed, when a state in which the game is not performed continues for a predetermined time and a predetermined condition is satisfied, the display means can be caused to execute a standby effect,
When the player touches the operation means with the palm or finger in the state where the standby effect is being executed, the result of the variable display from the standby effect displayed on the display means is displayed. It is possible to switch to the variable display waiting effect that is being performed, and in the situation where the state in which the waiting effect is being executed is switched to the variable display waiting effect, the player touches the operation means with the palm or finger. During the time, the variable display waiting effect is continued in a situation where the variable display is not performed without executing the standby effect,
After the state where the player touches the operation means with the palm or finger in the state where the waiting effect is being executed and the state is switched to the variable display waiting effect, the variable display is performed and again after the variable display is performed. While the player touches the operating means with the palm or fingers in a situation where the variable display is not performed and the variable display waiting effect is being executed, the waiting effect is not executed. Continue the variable display waiting effect,
Furthermore, in a situation where the standby effect is being executed and switched to the variable display waiting effect, even if the player releases the palm or fingers from the operation means, there is a state in which the game is not being performed. The variable display waiting effect is continued until it continues for a predetermined time and a predetermined condition is satisfied.
It is characterized by

In the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to suppress the decline in the player's desire to play.

It is a perspective view showing a state in which the body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko game machine, and the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko game machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is a front perspective view of a main body frame. FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the body frame; It is a perspective view of a door frame. It is a front view of a game board. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 8 as seen from the front. It is a front view showing an enlarged function display unit on the game board attached to the pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board and a peripheral control board. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 11; It is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input to and output from a game ball lending device connection terminal plate that relays electrical connections between a payout control board that constitutes the main board, a CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 11; 3 is a block diagram showing an outline of a peripheral control MPU; FIG. It is a block diagram around VDP with a built-in sound source in a liquid crystal and a sound control part. It is a block diagram showing the power supply system of the pachinko game machine. 18 is a block diagram continued from FIG. 17; FIG. FIG. 4A is a view showing the rotation range of the rotation angle in front of the rotary handle body, and FIG. 4B is a view showing the relationship between the rotation angle of the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer and the rotation angle in front of the rotary handle body. It is a figure (a) which shows an example of the output characteristic of a potentiometer, and a figure (b) which shows the table which shows the setting electric current to a discharge solenoid. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart which each drives a discharge solenoid and a ball feed solenoid. It is a circuit diagram showing a wasteful hitting prevention circuit. It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows a power failure monitoring circuit. 4 is a circuit diagram showing an inter-board communication interface circuit between a main control board and a peripheral control board; FIG. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit etc. of a payout control part. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit. FIG. 28 is a circuit diagram continued from FIG. 27; FIG. 29 is a circuit diagram continued from FIG. 28; It is a circuit diagram showing a payout motor drive circuit. 4 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input/output circuit; FIG. 4 is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals to/from a main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board; FIG. It is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board. 4 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board; 35 is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board of FIG. 34 to the peripheral control board; It is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a main-control side power-on process. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 37; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of main control side timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of payout control unit power-on. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the processing when the payout control unit power is turned on in FIG. 40. FIG. 41. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of processing at the time of a payment|payout control part power-on following FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of due-out control part timer interruption processing. 9 is a flow chart showing an example of a rotation angle switch history creation process; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of sprocket fixed position determination skip processing; 9 is a flow chart showing an example of a ball slanting determination process; It is a flow chart which shows an example of prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls. It is a flow chart which shows an example of prize ball stock number addition processing for rental balls. It is a flow chart which shows an example of stock monitoring processing. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a put-out ball grip operation determination setting process; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of payout setting processing; 10 is a flow chart showing an example of a ball-slip motion setting process; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of retry operation monitoring processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of mismatch counter reset determination processing; 9 is a flow chart showing an example of an error cancellation operation determination process; It is a timing chart showing signal processing (A) at the time of payout operation by ball lending, input signal confirmation processing (B) from the CR unit. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when powering on a peripheral control unit; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V-blank interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of an image of leaving notification displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an error notification image displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an image of rest time setting displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal; It is a figure which shows an example of the image of the attendant's call displayed on the display area of a portable terminal. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an image informing of the occurrence of a power failure displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal;

[1. Overall configuration of pachinko machine]
Hereinafter, a pachinko game machine as a game machine of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3. FIG. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which the body frame is opened from the outer frame of the pachinko game machine according to the embodiment and the door frame is opened from the body frame, and FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko game machine. There is, and FIG. 3 is a back view of the pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko game machine 1 comprises an outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, and a box pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable and open at the front side. A frame-shaped main body frame 3, a game board 4 having a game area 1100 attached and fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side and into which game balls as game media are driven, and a front face of the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 facing a player. A door frame 5 pivotally supported to be openable and closable with respect to the body frame 3 so as to be closed from the top. The door frame 5 of the pachinko game machine 1 has a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the player side, and a game window 101 arranged below the game window 101 to store game balls. a plate-shaped upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 (see FIG. 7), and a handle device 500 operated by the player to hit the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4. , is equipped with The vertical distance dimension of the game board 4 is longer than the width dimension of the pachinko game machine 1, and is configured to be large.

In the pachinko game machine 1, when viewed from the front, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are each formed in a vertically long rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction, and each width in the horizontal direction is substantially the same. The vertical width of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is slightly shorter than that of the outer frame 2 . A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2 at a position below the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. The outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged such that their upper ends are substantially aligned, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are rotatably pivoted at a position on the front side of the left end of the outer frame 2. The right ends of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are moved forward with respect to the outer frame 2 to open them.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 1, when viewed from the front, faces a game area 1100 into which game balls are hit through a substantially circular game window 101, and protrudes forward below the game window 101. As shown, two upper plates 301 and lower plates 302 are arranged one above the other. A handle device 500 for the player to operate is arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5 . When a rotating operation is performed, the game ball in the upper tray 301 is hit into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a hitting strength corresponding to the rotation angle, so that a game can be played.

The game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by a transparent glass unit 590 so that the player can see the inside of the game area 1100. The game balls, obstacle nails, various winning openings, accessories, etc. within the area 1100 cannot be touched.

[2. Overall configuration of the outer frame]
Next, the outer frame 2 installed on the island facility of the game hall will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front perspective view of the outer frame. As shown in FIG. 4, the outer frame 2 includes an upper and lower frame plate 10 and a lower frame plate 11 extending in the horizontal direction, left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 extending in the vertical (vertical) direction, and respective frame plates. Four connecting members 14 that connect the ends of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13 are provided. It is assembled in a square shape). The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 of the outer frame 2 are made of solid wood (for example, lumber, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. An upper support fitting 20, which will be described later, is attached to the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10. As shown in FIG.

On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal profile (for example, aluminum alloy) having a constant cross-sectional shape. In addition, a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when the pachinko game machine 1 is installed on the pachinko island equipment of the game hall, work is performed. The pachinko game machine 1 can be easily held by a player's finger, and the design of the appearance can be enhanced.

The outer frame 2 includes an upper support metal fitting 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10, and a lower support metal fitting 20 arranged to face the upper support metal fitting 20 and fixed to a predetermined position inside the lower portion of the left side frame plate 12. A supporting metal fitting 21, a reinforcing metal fitting 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower supporting metal fitting 21 and fixed so as to connect the left and right side frame plates 12, 13, and a decorative cover fixed to the front surface of the reinforcing metal fitting 22. 23 and. The upper support metal fitting 20 and the lower support metal fitting 21 are for pivotally supporting the body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so that they can be opened and closed. A pivot pin 633 (see FIG. 5) of an upper pivot bracket 630 of the body frame 3, which will be described later, is detachably engaged with the support hook hole 20c of the upper support bracket 20. As shown in FIG. A body frame shaft support formed on a body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 of the body frame 3 described later is inserted into the support projection 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21, and the support projection 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21 is inserted. After inserting the main body frame pivot metal fitting 644 in the main body frame 3 into the support hole, the main body frame 3 can be easily mounted by locking the pivot pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 to the support hook hole 20c. It can be pivotally supported so that it can be freely opened and closed.

Further, the outer frame 2 has two closing plates 24 and 25 (see FIG. 1) arranged vertically apart from each other by a predetermined distance inside the right side frame plate 13 and fixed. These closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in plan view. The closing plates 24 and 25 are attached to the hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 1) of the lock device 1000 along the open sides of the body frame 3 when the body frame 3 is closed to the outer frame 2. Although the details will be described later, when the key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and turned to one side, the engagement between the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 is released. The body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by pressing.

[3. Overall configuration of main body frame]
Next, the body frame 3 provided openably and closably on the front side of the outer frame 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the body frame, and FIG. 6 is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the body frame. As shown in FIG. 5, the body frame 3 includes a body frame base 600 which forms the skeleton of the body frame 3 and has a rectangular game board holding opening 601 which penetrates in the front-rear direction and holds the game board 4 . , an upper pivot bracket 630 and a lower pivot bracket 640 that are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left end portion of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front and are pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and pivotally support the door frame 5; A hitting ball launching device 650 attached to the lower front surface of the main body frame base 600 for hitting game balls into the game area 1100 of the game board 4, and a game to the upper tray 301 of the tray unit 300 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. A prize ball unit 700 for putting out balls, and a game ball attached to the front surface of a main body frame base 600 and from the prize ball unit 700 to a plate unit 300 of the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3. and a sphere outlet opening/closing unit 790 that cuts off the flow of

In addition, the body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the body frame base 600, and various control boards and a power supply board 851 for controlling the electrical parts provided in the door frame 5 and the body frame 3 except for the game board 4, and the like. A board unit 800 that is integrated into a unit, a back cover 900 that covers the rear opening of the game board holding opening 601 in the main body frame base 600, and a side security plate 950 that covers the left end of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. and a locking device 1000 attached to the right end of the main body frame base in front view for opening and closing and locking the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and opening and closing and locking the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 .

[3-1. Body frame base]
Next, the body frame base 600 will be described. The main body frame base 600 is integrally molded of synthetic resin, and has a vertically long rectangular shape that matches the outer shape of the door frame 5 when viewed from the front. It is The body frame base 600 has a game board holding opening 601 which penetrates in the front-rear direction in a rectangular shape within a range of about 3/4 of the whole from the top to the bottom and can fit and hold the outer periphery of the game board 4, and a body frame. A U-shaped front end frame portion 602 forming the front end outer circumference of the base 600 excluding the left side in front view, and a front end frame portion 602 recessed rearward from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602 and extending rearward from the lower end of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame 5 . The projecting door frame projecting piece 110c (see FIG. 1), the rearward projecting upper curved projecting piece 167 (see FIG. 1) of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. and an engaging groove 603 into which the rearwardly projecting opening-side outer bent projecting piece 164 (see FIG. 1) is inserted and engaged.

In addition, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding opening 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600, is recessed rearward by a predetermined amount from the front end of the front end frame portion 602, and spreads in the left-right direction into a plate-like lower rear wall portion. 604 and a peripheral wall portion 605 that protrudes rearward inside the front end frame portion 602 and forms the inner peripheral wall of the game board holding opening 601 . The peripheral wall 605 connects the free ends (upper and lower left ends in a front view) of the U-shaped front end frame 602 so that the body frame base 600 has a frame shape. It has become.

In addition, the main body frame base 600 forms the lower side of the game board holding opening 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall part 604, and the game board placing part 606 on which the game board 4 is placed, and the game board placing part 606. A positioning projection 607 that protrudes upward from the center in the left-right direction and engages with the out-ball discharge groove of the game panel 1150 of the game board 4, and a game board stop of the game board 4 that is formed at a predetermined position on the right inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 when viewed from the front. A game board latching portion to which the tool 1120 is fixed, and a plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609 arranged in the left-right direction in a plate shape that hangs downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and whose lower end can contact the upper end of the game board 4. and have. The positioning protrusion 607 of the main body frame base 600 is engaged with the out-ball discharge groove of the game board 4, so that the lower end of the game board 4 can be restricted from moving in the left-right direction and the rearward direction. there is In addition, the game board locking part can regulate the front-view right side of the game board 4 from moving forward and backward by locking the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4 . . The front-view left side of the game board 4 is restricted from moving forward and backward by the positioning member 956 of the side crime prevention plate 950, although the details will be described later.

Further, the body frame base 600 is formed at a position where the lower rear wall portion 604 is recessed one step rearward from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and a ball shooting device is provided on the right front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view. A batted ball launcher 650 is mounted from the front such that a small firing solenoid 654 of 650 is housed in the solenoid housing recess. When the ball launching device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, a foul space 626 that spreads leftward and downward is formed to the left of the upper end of the launching rail 660 of the ball launching device 650 in front view. It's like In this embodiment, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e (see FIG. 1) of the foul cover unit 540 is positioned below the foul space 626. , the game ball descending through the foul space 626 is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower tray 302 (see FIG. 7) of the tray unit 300. FIG.

The main body frame base 600 has a rectangular opening penetrating in the front-rear direction to the left of the left-right center of the lower rear wall portion 604 when viewed from the front, and a plurality of openings formed above the opening and on the left and right sides when viewed from the front. and a through hole 615 penetrating through. The opening of the body frame base 600 is closed from the front side by a relay terminal board cover 692, and the board unit attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall part 604 through the opening 692a of the relay terminal board cover 692. A main door relay terminal plate 880 and a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 of 800 face forward.

Further, the body frame base 600 detects the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the body frame 3 on the lower front surface of a substantially circular cylinder lock through hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction in the upper right end of the lower rear wall portion 604 when viewed from the front. A door frame open switch 618 is attached for opening the door frame 5, and when the door frame 5 is opened (released) with respect to the body frame 3, the pressure is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. It's like Further, the body frame base 600 has a body frame open switch 619 for detecting opening of the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the lower rear surface than the position where the door frame open switch 618 is attached. When the body frame 3 is opened (released) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressure is released and the opening of the body frame 3 can be detected.

[3-2. Upper shaft support bracket and lower shaft support bracket]
Next, the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 will be described. The upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are attached to the metal fitting mounting portions on the upper and lower rear surfaces of the left end of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front using predetermined screws, respectively, so that the door frame 5 is attached to the main body frame 3. The body frame 3 can be pivotally supported to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

The upper shaft support metal fitting 630 includes a plate-shaped mounting portion 631 that is attached to the metal fitting mounting portion on the upper side of the main body frame base 600 and spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-shaped forward extension that extends forward from the upper end of the mounting portion 631. a portion 632, a pivot pin 633 protruding upward from near the front end of the forward extending portion 632, and a pivot pin 155 of the door frame 5 disposed on the left side of the pivot pin 633 in front view (FIG. ) is inserted vertically through the door frame shaft support hole 634, and the front extending portion 632 hangs down from the left end of the front view to regulate the rotation end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. and a stopper. In the upper shaft support metal fitting 630, the mounting portion 631, the forward extending portion 632, and the stopper are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

The lower shaft support metal fitting 640 includes a door frame support metal fitting 642 for supporting the door frame 5 and a lower side of the door frame support metal fitting 642 for supporting the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 . and a main body frame pivot bracket 644. The door frame pivot bracket 642 of the lower pivot bracket 640 has a plate-shaped mounting portion that is attached to the metal fitting mounting portion on the lower side of the main body frame base 600 and spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and extends forward from the lower end of the mounting portion. A plate-shaped forward extending portion 642b, a door frame shaft support hole 642c penetrating vertically near the front end of the forward extending portion 642b and into which a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 7) of the door frame 5 is inserted, A stopper 642d is provided to stand upward from the left end portion of the extension portion 642b in a front view and to restrict the rotation end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. In the door frame pivot bracket 642, the mounting portion, the forward extending portion 642b, and the stopper 642d are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

The main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 of the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 includes a plate-shaped mounting portion that is attached to the metal fitting mounting portion on the lower side of the main body frame base 600 and spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-like mounting portion that extends forward from the lower end of the mounting portion. and a body frame shaft support hole penetrating vertically near the front end of the forward extending portion 644b. The main body frame pivot bracket 644 is also integrally formed by bending a single metal plate so that the mounting portion and the forward extending portion 644b are formed.

The lower shaft support metal fitting 640 has a state in which the mounting portion of the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 and the mounting portion of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 overlap (contact) in the front-rear direction. The front extending portion 642b and the front extending portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 are attached to the metal fitting mounting portion on the lower side of the main body frame base 600 with a predetermined distance in the vertical direction.

When the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are attached to the body frame base 600, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the body frame shaft support hole of the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are coaxially aligned. The body frame shaft support hole of the body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 of the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is fitted to the support projection 21d (see FIG. 4) of the lower support metal fitting 21 of the outer frame 2. After placing the front extending portion 644b of the main body frame pivot bracket 644 on the support projecting piece 21c (see FIG. 4) of the lower support bracket 21 so as to be inserted, the shaft of the upper pivot bracket 630 is placed. By inserting the support pin 633 into the support hook hole 20c (see FIG. 4) of the upper support bracket 20 of the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. It's like

Further, the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600 so that the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the door frame shaft support hole of the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are mounted. 642c are positioned coaxially with each other, and the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642c of the door frame shaft support 642 of the lower shaft support 640 so that the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted. 5 (see FIG. 7) is placed on the front extending portion 642b of the door frame pivot fitting 642, and then the pivot pin 155 of the door frame 5 is attached to the door frame of the upper pivot fitting 630. By inserting the door frame 5 into the shaft support hole 634, the door frame 5 can be supported to the body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. In this embodiment, the shaft pin 155 on the upper side of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction. is once slid downward so that the upper shaft support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the forward extension portion 632 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 overlap vertically, and then the shaft pin 155 is slid upward. It can be inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 .

[3-3. Ball launcher]
Next, the batted ball launcher 650 will be described. The ball shooting device 650 has a metal plate shooting base 652 attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the body frame base 600, and a rotation drive shaft 654a attached to the lower rear surface of the shooting base 652 so as to protrude forward. A small firing solenoid 654 mounted on the ground, a ball-hitting mallet 656 fixed to a rotation drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654 so as to be able to rotate integrally, a tip 658 fixed to the tip of the ball-hitting mallet 656, and the movement trajectory of the tip 658 A shooting rail 660 extending obliquely to the upper left in a front view and attached to the front surface of a shooting base 652 with a predetermined position in and a ball stop piece 662 that forms a gap through which the game ball cannot pass and holds the game ball at the base end of the launch rail 660, and the ball stop piece 662 holds the game ball at the base end of the launch rail 660. and a stopper 664 for restricting the ball hitting mallet 656 (hammer tip 658) from rotating toward the shooting rail 660 from the ball hitting position where the game ball can be hit. In this embodiment, the vertical distance dimension of the game board 4 is longer than the width dimension of the pachinko game machine 1, and is configured to be large. Since the pachinko game machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the vertical dimension of the pachinko game machine 1 is specified in advance. Therefore, the game board 4 is configured to be large, and the vertical dimension of the pachinko game machine 1 is restricted, so that the vertical distance dimension of the ball shooting device 650 is reduced, and the ball shooting device 650 is miniaturized. Along with this, a small firing solenoid 654 is employed.

The shooting solenoid 654 in the ball shooting device 650 has a rotary drive shaft 654a which rotates reciprocally at a strength (speed) corresponding to the rotation operation angle (rotation amount) of the handle device 500, although detailed illustration is omitted. It is designed to The ball hitting mallet 656 of the ball shooting device 650 has a fixed portion 656a fixed to the rotary drive shaft 654a of the shooting solenoid 654, and a distal end extending in a gentle arc from the fixed portion 656a at the axis of the rotary drive shaft 654a. A rod portion 656b to which a mallet tip 658 is fixed at the tip facing the normal direction, a stopper portion 656c that extends to the opposite side of the rod portion 656b across the fixing portion 656a and is capable of coming into contact with the stopper 664, It has When the stopper portion 656c of the ball hitting mallet 656 comes into contact with the stopper 664, the tip 658 of the mallet tip 658 rotates toward the launch rail 660 from the ball hitting position (rotating end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). It is supposed to be regulated.

When the hitting ball shooting device 650 is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, the upper end of the shooting rail 660 is substantially in the center in the left-right direction and the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604, that is, the game board placing portion. 606 (the lower side of the game board holding opening 601), and a predetermined width in the left-right direction between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 held in the game board holding opening 601. , a furl space 626 that spreads downward is formed. The hitting ball launching device 650 shoots the game ball so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side of the launch rail 660 in the front view, so that the game ball can be hit into the game area 1100 of the game board 4. It has become. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the door frame 5 is positioned below the foul space 626. A game ball that becomes a foul ball without being hit into the area 1100 falls through the foul space 626, is received by the foul ball inlet 542e, and is discharged to the lower tray 302. - 特許庁

[3-4. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 will be described. In a pachinko island facility in a hall where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed, game balls supplied from the pachinko island facility side to the pachinko game machine 1 are stored, and then a top plate 301 of the pachinko game machine 1 based on a predetermined payout instruction. to be paid out. This prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the body frame base 600, and a prize ball tank attached to the upper rear surface of the prize ball base 710 to receive and store game balls supplied from the pachinko island facility side. 720, a tank rail unit 730 arranged under the prize ball tank 720 and stored in the prize ball tank 720 and sent to the downstream side; A prize ball device 740 that pays out based on a payout instruction, the game balls paid out by the prize ball device 740 can be guided to the upper tray 301 of the plate unit, and are paid out when the upper tray 301 is filled with game balls. It is mainly provided with a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching and guiding the game ball to the lower tray 302 side.

The prize ball unit 700 also includes an external terminal plate 784 attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base 710 and an external terminal plate cover 786 covering the rear side of the external terminal plate 784 .
[3-4-1. Prize ball tank]

The prize ball tank 720 has a bottom wall portion 721 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall portion 722 so that a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721 . In addition, the prize ball tank 720 is inclined such that the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 is lowered toward the discharge port 723 so that the game balls on the bottom wall portion 721 roll toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

The prize ball tank 720 also includes two ball leveling members 727 rotatably supported by the shaft portion 725 . One end of the sphere leveling member 727 is pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 and holds a weight inside so that the other end hangs down due to its own weight. The ball leveling member 727 is suspended in a tank rail unit 730, which will be described later, and can level and align game balls circulating in the tank rail unit 730. As shown in FIG.

[3-4-2. tank rail unit]
The tank rail unit 730 includes a tank rail 731 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and elongated in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a gutter shape with an open top and a predetermined depth, and has a width (depth) that allows game balls to be aligned in two rows in the front-rear direction. The bottom is slanted so that the

In addition, the tank rail unit 730 includes an alignment gear 732 rotatably supported above the discharge port of the tank rail 731, a gear cover 733 covering the top of the alignment gear 732, and a right end of the gear cover 733 in front view. A ball retainer plate 734 that closes the upper part of the rail 731, and a ball stop piece 735 that can move forward and backward in the tank rail 731 and stop the game ball in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the outlet side. , is equipped with Two aligning gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of game balls partitioned into two rows by the partition wall of the tank rail 731 .

[3-4-3. Prize ball device]
The prize ball device 740 is for paying out the game balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. The prize ball device 740 has a supply passage that opens at the upper end and extends to a position slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction with a width slightly wider than the outer shape of the game ball, and a predetermined width that communicates with the lower end of the supply passage. A distribution space having a space, a prize ball passage that communicates with the lower end of the distribution space on the left side (open side) when viewed from the back and bends in a roughly V shape and opens on the left side when viewed from the back, and the right side of the distribution space when viewed from the back. (Rotary support side) A ball extraction passage communicating with the lower end and extending downward to open at the lower end is provided. The supply passage, the distribution space, the winning ball passage, and the ball extraction passage are formed in a rearwardly open state.

The prize ball device 740 includes a first gear fixed to the rotating shaft of the payout motor 744 so as to be integrally rotatable and arranged on the rear side of the motor support plate, a second gear meshing with the first gear, and a second gear meshing. a third gear, a payout rotator integrally rotated with the 3rd gear and arranged in the sorting space, and the payout rotator is fixed to the opposite side of the third gear so as to be integrally rotatable in the circumferential direction, etc. A rotation detection board in which a plurality of (three in this embodiment) detection slits are formed at intervals, and a ball cutoff switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of game balls in the supply passage, and a prize ball passage. A count switch 751 for detecting game balls flowing down inside, a rotation angle switch 752 for detecting a detection slit formed in a rotation detection board that rotates integrally with the payout rotor, and a rotation angle switch 752 are held. It has a rotation angle switch board 753, a payout motor 744, a ball cutoff switch 750, a counting switch 751, and a prize ball case board 754 that relays connection between the rotation angle switch 752 and a payout control board described later.

The payout rotator has three recesses each having a size capable of accommodating one game ball at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The balls are housed in the concave portion one by one and can be dispensed to the winning ball passage or the ball removal passage side. Also, the three detection slits formed in the rotation detection board that rotates integrally with the payout rotor are formed at equal intervals (every 120 degrees) on the outer periphery of the rotation detection board, and correspond to the concave portions of the payout rotor. By detecting the detection slits with the rotation angle switch 752, the rotational position of the payout rotating body can be detected. In this embodiment, the rotation between detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection plate (dispensing rotator) is designed to correspond to 18 steps of rotation of the dispensing motor 744 .

In the prize ball device 740, when the payout rotating body is rotated counterclockwise in a rear view by a payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage are paid out to the prize ball passage. The game balls delivered to the prize ball passage by the rotation of the player's body are counted one by one by a counting switch 751 and then transferred to the prize ball passage. On the other hand, when the ball removal operation member is operated by a hall clerk or the like, the game balls in the supply passage are dispensed to the ball removal passage. From the lower end of the passage, it is possible to discharge to the rear side outside of the pachinko game machine 1 via a full tank branch unit 770 which will be described later.

[3-4-4. Full tank branch unit]
The full-tank branch unit 770 is formed in the shape of a box whose entirety is lowered from the rear end to the front end. A prize ball receiving port for receiving game balls flowing down the ball passage, a branch space arranged below the prize ball receiving port and spreading in the left and right direction, and a game from directly below the prize ball receiving port in the branch space toward the front side. A normal passage for guiding the ball, a normal ball outlet 774 that discharges the game balls circulating through the normal passage forward and opens at the right end of the front end when viewed from the front, and is separated to the right side of the branch space from directly below the prize ball receiving port when viewed from the rear. A full-tank passage for guiding game balls forward from a position where the ball is filled, and a full-tank ball outlet 776 that discharges forward the game balls circulating in the full-tank passage and opens on the left side of the normal ball outlet 774 when viewed from the front. ing.

In addition, the full tank branch unit 770 has a ball removal receiving port that opens upward at the left end of the front view of the upper rear end and receives the game ball that has flowed down the ball removal passage of the prize ball device 740, and a ball removal receiving port. A ball extraction passage that guides the game ball received in the mouth to the front side, and a game ball that has circulated through the ball extraction passage is released forward, and at the left end in the front view, at a position behind the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776. and an open ball outlet.

In the full-tank branch unit 770, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full-tank ball outlet 776 are connected to the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5, respectively. , and the second ball inlet 542c (see FIG. 1), and the game ball released from the normal ball outlet 774 passes through the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 and reaches the tray. The game ball supplied to the upper plate 301 of the unit 300 and released from the full ball outlet 776 passes through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540 and is supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. ing. In addition, the ball extraction opening is formed to communicate with the upper right end of the main body frame base ball extraction passage in the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the rear. It is designed to be delivered to the base ball extraction passage.

When game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (prize ball device 740) while the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is filled with game balls, the first ball outlet of the foul cover unit 540 is opened. The game balls that cannot exit to the plate 301 side stay in the first ball passage of the foul cover unit 540, and soon the upstream normal passage is filled up through the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branch unit 770.例文帳に追加In this state, the game balls that have entered the branch space from the winning ball receiving port cannot enter the normal passage and start moving laterally in the branch space until the game balls that have moved laterally are full. It enters into the tongue passage and is supplied from the full tank ball outlet to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 via the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540, the second ball passage, and the second ball outlet. It's becoming

[3-5. Substrate unit]
Next, the board unit 800 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, the board unit 800 includes a board unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall of the body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the left rear surface of the board unit base 810 in front view, and a board. A power supply board box holder 840 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 810, and a power supply board box attached to the rear surface of the power supply board box holder 840 and formed so that the rear end of the power supply board box is substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820. 850, a payout control board box 860 attached to the rear of the power board box 850 and the speaker box 820, and a terminal board box 870 attached to the rear of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the payout control board box 860 in front view. , and a main door relay terminal plate 880 and a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 attached to the front surface of the board unit base 810 .

The power supply board box holder 840 has a discharged ball receiving portion 841 which is opened upward on the front left side of the left and right center in front view and receives a game ball discharged downward discharged from the out ball discharging portion of the game board 4, A discharge passage 842 that guides and discharges the game ball received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 downward, and a front side (right side in front view) of the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841 are opened forward and upward. The entire rear surface of the power supply board box holder 840 is formed to be recessed forward, and is provided with a box accommodating portion capable of accommodating the front end of the power supply board box 850 .

In addition, the power board box holder 840 is arranged such that the open front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the board unit base 810 , and the opening of the board unit base 810 faces the discharge passage 842 . The ball flows through the main body frame base ball extraction passage formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion of the main body frame base 600 and flows down to the rear side of the board unit base 810 through the opening of the board unit base 810 . The game balls and the game balls discharged from the out-ball discharging part of the game board 4 and received by the discharged ball receiving part 841 can be discharged to the lower rear side of the pachinko game machine 1 through the discharging passage 842. It's becoming

The power supply board box 850 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open front, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening. The power supply board box 850 accommodates various electronic components attached to the power supply board 851, and allows heat from the electronic components to escape to the outside through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper and lower surfaces. can be released to A power switch 852 attached to a power board 851 faces the rear surface of the power board box 850 .

The payout control board box 860 includes a thin box-shaped box base 861 that is horizontally long and open at the rear, a thin box-shaped cover 862 that fits into the box base 861 from the rear side and is open at the front, and the box base 861. and a payout control board 4110 attached to the rear surface of and covered with a cover 862 . In addition, the payout control board box 860 is provided with a plurality of separation cut portions 863 formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862 projecting outward from the left end in rear view. A box base 861 and a cover 862 are caulked and fixed. Thus, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, they cannot be separated unless the separation cutting portion 863 is cut, and when the payout control board box 860 is opened, the trace remains. . Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the payout control board box 860 has been illegally opened or closed. In this embodiment, the payout control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection and the like.

In addition, the payout control board box 860 is configured such that an operation switch 860a attached to the payout control board 4110, an inspection output terminal 860c, and the like face rearward through a cover 862. As shown in FIG. In the payout control board box 860, various connection terminals for connecting with the main control board 4100 or the like face rearward through the cover 862. As shown in FIG. In addition, the operation switch 860a is operated when clearing the RAM built in the microprocessor of the payout control board 4110 and the RAM built in the microprocessor of the main control board 4100 when the power is turned on. When an error is reported, it is operated to cancel the error, and the function to clear the RAM when the power is turned on and the function to clear the RAM after the power is turned on after). A detailed description of this point will be given later.

The terminal board box 870 includes a board base 871 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820, a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 attached to the rear surface of the board base 871 and to which the peripheral panel relay terminals 872 are fixed toward the rear, and the board base. A terminal board 869 attached to the rear surface of the 871 and facing backward to which the CR unit relay terminal 873 is fixed, and a circuit board so that the peripheral panel relay terminal 872 and the CR unit relay terminal 873 face the rear side. and a substrate cover 874 that covers the rear side of the base 871 . The peripheral panel relay terminal 872 is for connecting to a frequency indicator for displaying the operating state of the pachinko game machine 1 provided on the side of the pachinko island facility where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed. The terminal 873 is for connecting with a CR unit installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 .

The main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are provided in the door frame 5, the peripheral control board 4140 provided in the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, the payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, and the like. It is for relaying connection with the handle device 500, each decorative substrate, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are attached to the board mounting portion formed on the front surface of the board unit base 810 so as to face forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 600. Wiring extending from the door frame 5 can be connected.

The front side of the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is covered by a relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. Only the connection terminals face forward through the opening 692a, so that the front surface of the body frame 3 has a neat appearance.

In addition, the main door relay terminal plate 880 includes the ball rental button 361, the return button 362, the remaining rental display portion 363, the potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500, the touch It is for relaying the connection between the switch 516, the firing stop switch 518, the full tank switch 550 of the foul cover unit 540, and the payout control board 4110 arranged on the body frame 3 side. The ball rental button 361, the return button 362, the remaining rental display portion 363 of the ball rental unit 360, the potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500, the touch switch 516, the firing stop switch 518, and the full tank switch 550 of the foul cover unit 540 A description will be given later.

In addition, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is provided in each of the decoration units 200, 240, and 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, each decoration substrate provided in the plate unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. , the dial drive motor 414, various switches for detecting the operation of the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405, and the peripheral control board 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. be. The decoration units 200, 240, 280 arranged on the side of the door frame 5, the decoration substrates provided in the plate unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the dial drive motor 414 and the dial operation provided in the operation unit 400 Various switches for detecting the operation of the unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 will be described later.

[4. Overall configuration of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided openable and closable on the front side of the body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the door frame. As shown in FIG. 7, the door frame 5 includes a door frame base unit 100 having a game window 101 having a vertically long rectangular outer shape and a slightly vertically long circular (elliptical) inner peripheral shape, and a door. A right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer circumference of the game window 101 on the front surface of the frame base unit 100, and a left side facing the right side decoration unit 200 and attached to the left outer circumference of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. A decoration unit 240, an upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper periphery of the game window 101 in front of the door frame base unit 100, and a door frame base unit arranged below the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. and a pair of side speaker covers 290 attached to the front face of the speaker 100.

In addition, the door frame 5 includes a plate unit 300 attached to the lower part of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, an operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the plate unit 300, and a door penetrating the plate unit 300. A handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for driving a game ball, and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 disposed behind the plate unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 interposed therebetween. a foul cover unit 540 attached to the foul cover unit 540, a ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540, and a game window 101 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the game window 101 and a glass unit 590 that is

[4-1. door frame base unit]
Next, the door frame base unit 100 will be explained. The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base main body 110 having a vertically long rectangular outer shape and a game window 101 which penetrates in the front-rear direction and has an inner periphery formed in a substantially vertically long elliptical shape, and a door frame. An upper bracket 120 for fixing the upper decoration unit attached to the upper center of the game window 101 on the front surface of the base body 110, and a pair of sides attached to the left and right sides of the lower end of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base body 110. A speaker 130 and a handle bracket for supporting the handle device 500 attached to the front face of the door frame base body 110 at the lower right corner in the front view are provided.

In addition, the door frame base unit 100 includes a metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 (see FIG. 1) fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110, and a game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110. A security cover 180 (see FIG. 1) attached so as to cover the lower part, and a glass unit locking member 190 (see FIG. 1), and a launch cover 191 (see FIG. 1) that is arranged on the left side (open side) of the center in the left-right direction in rear view and is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the game window 101. , A handle relay terminal plate attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 below the launch cover 191 and relaying the connection between the potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500 described later and the main control board 4100 provided on the game board 4 described later. 192 (see FIG. 1), a handle relay terminal board cover 193 (see FIG. 1) covering the rear side of the handle relay terminal board 192, and a launch cover 191 and the handle relay terminal board 192 sandwiching the center in the left-right direction. etc. (see FIG. 1) arranged on the opposite side (right side (rotary support side) of the center in the left-right direction in rear view) and attached to the rear surface of the door frame base main body, and a frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 A frame-decorated drive amplifier board cover 195 (see FIG. 1) that covers the rear side of the amplifier board 194 is provided.

The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is electrically connected to the side speaker 130 and the upper speakers of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and is also electrically connected to a peripheral control board 4140 provided on the game board 4, which will be described later. It is equipped with an amplifier circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control board 4140 and outputs it to each speaker 130 . Although not shown in detail, in the present embodiment, the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the plate unit 300 and the operation unit 400 are provided with decoration substrates, and the operation unit 400 is provided with a dial drive motor. Wiring that electrically connects the switch, the handle relay terminal plate 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the plate unit 300, etc., the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control board 4140, etc. They are collectively bundled at the right side (axial support side) and extended rearward to be connected to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 of the body frame 3 .

[4-1-1. Door frame base body]
The door frame base body 110 is formed of a synthetic resin in the shape of a vertically long picture frame. It is In the game window 101, the left, right, and upper inner peripheral edges are formed in continuous smooth curved lines, while the lower inner peripheral edge is formed in a straight line extending left and right. In addition, on the inner peripheral edge of the lower side of the game window 101 in the door frame base body 110, a rectangular notch is formed on the pivot side (left side in front view) through which the first ball outlet of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted. A speaker mounting portion for mounting and fixing the side speaker 130 disposed on both the left and right outer sides of the lower side of the game window 101, and the right (open side) end of the front surface that is disposed in the lower right corner when viewed from the front and bulges forward A handle mounting portion for mounting a handle bracket obliquely so as to recede, a wire passage hole that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the handle mounting portion and allows wiring from the handle device 500 to pass, and an upper side of the handle mounting portion , a lock hole 116 is formed which is formed in a cylindrical shape extending short forward and into which a cylinder lock 1010, which will be described later, can be inserted. The width of the upper side formed by the game window 101 and the left and right side sides of the door frame base body 110 are equal to the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151, the pivot side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and the opening side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150, which will be described later. , and the game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base main body when viewed from the front.

[4-1-2. reinforcement unit]
The reinforcement unit 150 consists of an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 (see FIG. 1) attached along the back surface of the upper side of the door frame base body 110 and a pivot support attached along the back surface of the pivot side of the door frame base body 110 . A side reinforcing sheet metal 152 (see FIG. 1), an open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 (see FIG. 1) attached along the back side of the open side of the door frame base body 110, and the game window 101 of the door frame base body 110. and a lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 (see FIG. 1) attached along the rear surface of the lower side of the housing, which are fastened together with screws, rivets, or the like to form a rectangular shape.

An upper shaft support portion 156 having a shaft pin 155 provided on its upper surface so as to be slidable in the vertical direction and a lower shaft support portion 158 having a shaft pin 157 on its lower surface are provided at the upper and lower ends of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152. integrally prepared. The upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper and lower shaft support fittings 630 and 640 formed on the upper and lower sides of the body frame 3 on the shaft support side, so that the door frame 5 is attached to the body frame 3. It is pivotally supported so that it can be freely opened and closed.

A hook cover 165 that abuts on the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 is provided on the rear lower portion of the open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153 . The hook cover 165 engages with the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 attached along the open side of the body frame 3 when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the body frame 3. By inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and rotating it in one direction (rotating in the direction opposite to the direction in which the body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2), the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover are connected. 165 is disengaged and the door frame 5 can be opened with respect to the body frame 3 .

[4-2. plate unit]
Next, the plate unit 300 will be described. The plate unit 300 includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740, and shoots the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 through the ball feeding unit. It can be supplied to device 650 .

The shape of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 is formed in a curved shape so as to protrude forward from the left toward the center when viewed from the front, and straight forward from the center toward the right. formed to protrude. An operation unit mounting portion to which the operation unit 400 is attached is formed in the upper center of the plate unit 300, and a rectangular shape larger than the outer shape of the mobile terminal 470 for placing the mobile terminal 470 on the right side of the operation unit attachment portion is formed. A recess 314d is formed. The shape of the upper plate upper panel 314 in which this concave portion 314d is formed is formed in a plate shape, and when the player presses this portion downward by hand, for example, it bends downward. If the pressing force exceeds a predetermined force, the top plate 314 will break. This is because the mobile terminal 470 is expensive, and when the player presses the screen of the mobile terminal 470 with his or her hand, the upper plate upper panel 314 receives the force, and the upper plate upper panel 314 bends. This prevents the mobile terminal 470 from being damaged. In other words, a structure is adopted in which the top plate upper panel 314 is damaged before the portable terminal 470 is damaged. If the upper plate upper panel 314 is damaged, the plate unit 300 will be replaced.

The tray unit 300 also includes an upper tray ball removal mechanism 340 for removing game balls stored in the upper tray 301 to the lower tray 302 in response to operation of an upper tray ball removal button 341, and a lower tray ball removal button 354. A lower tray ball extracting mechanism 350 for extracting game balls stored in the lower tray 302 downward through the lower tray ball extracting hole 324b in response to the operation of , and a pachinko game machine 1 installed adjacent to the not shown and a ball rental unit 360 that operates the CR unit.

[4-2-1. operation unit]
The operation unit 400 is arranged on the front surface of the upper tray 301 at the approximate center in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front, and includes a dial operation section 401 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation section 405 that can be pressed by the player. It is possible to accept the player's operation according to the game state, to move the dial operation unit 401, and to participate not only in the player's hitting operation of the game ball but also in the production during the game. to be able to do so. Rotation (direction of rotation) of the dial operation unit 401 is detected by a rotation detection switch provided in the operation unit 400 , and operation of the press operation unit 405 is detected by a press detection switch provided in the operation unit 400 .

Further, the operation unit 400 can rotate the dial operation section 401 clockwise or counterclockwise by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 . In addition, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation section 401 step by step by the driving force of a dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, and rotates the dial operation section 401 when the player rotates it. It is possible to assist the rotation, prevent it from rotating on purpose, and give a click feeling to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation section 401 by alternately repeating forward rotation and reverse rotation of the dial driving motor 414 in small steps.

[4-2-2. Rental ball unit]
The ball rental unit 360 has a ball rental button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pushed backward, and a rental balance display section 363 between the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362 . When the ball rental button 361 is operated, it is detected by a ball rental switch 365a, and when the return button 362 is operated, it is detected by a return switch 365b. The display content of the remaining credit display 365c can be visually recognized through the remaining loan display section 363. FIG. A CR unit lamp 365d is arranged adjacent to the remaining credit indicator 365c so that the light emitting mode of the CR unit lamp 365d can be visually recognized through the remaining loan indicator 363. FIG. A ball rental switch 365a, a return switch 365b, a remaining number indicator 365c, and a CR unit lamp 365d are mounted on a number display board 365, and this number display board 365 is attached inside the ball rental unit 360. . This ball lending unit 360 puts cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1, and presses a ball lending button 361 to deposit a predetermined number of game balls into a plate unit. 300 can be lent (paid out) into the upper tray 301, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the balance of the lent cash or prepaid card will be returned after subtracting the balance of the lent amount. ing. In addition, the remaining balance display portion 363 displays the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards thrown into the ball lending machine.

[4-2-3. mobile terminal]
The portable terminal 470 placed in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 is managed by the hall. A unique number (ID number) is prerecorded in each portable terminal managed by the hall. The portable terminal 470 in this embodiment has No. as an ID number. 123 are stored in advance. The player goes to the hall reception, receives the mobile terminal 470, sits on the front surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in which the game is played, and places the mobile terminal 470 on the concave portion 314d formed on the right side of the plate unit 300. When the mobile terminal 470 is placed in the recess 314d, the peripheral control board 4140 performs initial communication settings for exchanging information (various data, various commands) wirelessly with the mobile terminal 470 in both directions. ing. In this communication initial setting, an individual information acquisition process for acquiring an ID number from the mobile terminal 470 is performed, and the ID number acquired by this individual information acquisition process and the machine number of the pachinko game machine 1 (the machine number installed in the hall, In this embodiment, a matching process for matching No. 8) is performed. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 and the mobile terminal 470 are in a one-to-one correspondence relationship, and the mobile terminal 470' other than the mobile terminal MST possessed by the attendant such as a hall clerk who patrols the hall is used as the plate unit. Even if it is placed on the recess 314d formed on the right side of the mobile terminal 300, even if information from another mobile terminal 470' is input by radio, the peripheral control board 4140 determines that the information is not from the mobile terminal 470 and determines that the information is not from the mobile terminal 470'. While rejecting information from 470', even if information from another pachinko game machine 1' adjacent to the pachinko game machine 1 is input by radio, the mobile terminal 470 determines that it is not the information from the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁Information from the pachinko game machine 1' is rejected. That is, in the communication initial setting, when the mobile terminal 470 associated with the association process is placed (set) in the concave portion 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300, the game board 4 can maintain a state in which the operation of various game machines can be started. On the other hand, another mobile terminal 470' different from the mobile terminal 470 associated in the communication initial setting is placed in the concave portion 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300. In the (set) state, it is possible to maintain a state in which the operation of various game devices provided on the game board 4 cannot be started. In other words, the portable terminal is a key for starting the operation of the gaming machine.

In this way, the player goes to the reception of the hall, receives the portable terminal 470, and places (sets) the portable terminal 470 in his/her possession in the concave portion 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300. As a result, a unique number (ID number) stored in advance in the mobile terminal 470 is associated with this pachinko gaming machine 1 (machine number installed in the hall, No. 8 in this embodiment). Therefore, when the player has to leave the seat of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, to take a restroom break, he/she can leave the seat of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the portable terminal 470, thereby , the player goes to the hall reception, receives the mobile terminal 470', and sets the mobile terminal 470' in the pachinko gaming machine 1 while sitting on the seat of the pachinko gaming machine 1, that is, the mobile terminal Even if 470' is placed (set) in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300, the game is restarted by maintaining a state in which the operation of the gaming machine cannot be started. I can't do it. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being restarted by another player while the player is away from the seat.

When the mobile terminal 470 is taken out (lifted) from the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300, the mobile terminal 470 and the pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control board 4140) communicate with each other. Triggered by this, the peripheral control board 4140 determines the elapsed time when communication with the mobile terminal 470 is disabled, that is, the time after the player takes out (lifts) the mobile terminal 470 from the concave portion 314d. Elapsed time is started. When the portable terminal 470 is not placed in the recess 314d, the peripheral control board 4140 determines that the player is not ready to start the game by sitting in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A screen for notifying that the player is leaving the seat is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device provided on the game board 4 (also referred to as the "game board side liquid crystal display device").

When the player leaves the seat of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, to take a restroom break or buy a drink, the player leaves the seat of the pachinko game machine 1 by holding the mobile terminal 470, thereby exiting the pachinko game machine. 1 is maintained in such a state that the screen for leaving the seat is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device on the game board side. At this time, when the attendant mobile terminal MST possessed by an attendant such as a hall clerk who patrols the hall is placed on the concave portion 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300, the peripheral control board 4140 Initial communication settings are made for exchanging each information (various data, various commands) bi-directionally with the attendant portable terminal MST. The elapsed time when the mobile terminal 470 and the peripheral control board 4140 cannot communicate with each other, that is, the elapsed time after the player takes out (lifts) the mobile terminal 470 from the recess 314d is displayed in the display area of the staff mobile terminal MST to be displayed. When the elapsed time displayed on the screen has passed a predetermined time (15 minutes in the present embodiment), the hall clerk or other attendant will confirm that the portable terminal 470 possessed by the player who left the seat and the In order to cancel the correspondence with the pachinko game machine 1, a correspondence cancellation command is transmitted from the attendant mobile terminal MST to the peripheral control board 4140 by touching a cancellation button displayed on the screen. (Before canceling the correspondence relationship between the mobile terminal 470 and the pachinko machine 1, the staff such as the hall clerk who patrols the hall should inform the manager of the management room of the hall or the person in charge of the reception counter of the hall. Then, the player holding the mobile terminal 470 is told to play a call announcement in the hall to the effect that the player will return to the pachinko gaming machine 1. A hall clerk or other attendant is placed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300. The attendant portable terminal MST is taken out (lifted) from the formed recess 314d, and is patrolled around the hall until a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses after the call announcement is heard. The attendant placed the attendant mobile terminal MST again in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300, and communication between the mobile terminal 470 and the peripheral control board 4140 became impossible. When the elapsed time, that is, the elapsed time after the player takes out (lifts) the mobile terminal 470 from the recess 314d, is displayed in the display area of the staff mobile terminal MST, the hall staff or other staff can Since the displayed elapsed time has already passed a predetermined time (15 minutes in this embodiment), the correspondence relationship between the portable terminal 470 possessed by the player who left the seat and the pachinko game machine 1 is canceled. becomes). The peripheral control board 4140 cancels the correspondence between the mobile terminal 470 possessed by the player who has left the seat and the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the received correspondence cancellation command, and also cancels the correspondence between the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the customer waiting state from the seat leaving notification screen. It is designed to switch to a demonstration that becomes a screen. When an attendant such as a hall clerk takes out (lifts) the attendant mobile terminal MST from the recess 314d, the mobile terminal 470' possessed by another player can be accepted. In other words, another player can sit on the front surface of the pachinko game machine 1 and place the portable terminal 470' on the concave portion 314d formed on the right side of the plate unit 300 to start the game. there is When an attendant such as a hall clerk takes out (lifts up) the attendant portable terminal MST from the concave portion 314d, the screen of the away notification screen is switched to the screen of the customer waiting state. is being performed, if the portable terminal is placed (set) in the concave portion 314d and the game is not started, the demonstration is performed and then the power saving mode is entered.

Also, the player who was sitting in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and playing the game last time, for example, the player who left the seat of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the portable terminal 470 to take a restroom break or purchase a drink. When the mobile terminal 470 is taken out (lifted) from the recess 314d formed on the right side of the plate unit 300 when leaving the seat, the mobile terminal 470 measures the remaining time until the game restart time (that is, , The mobile terminal 470 also has a clocking function.), and in its display area, the machine number of the pachinko game machine 1 (the machine number installed in the hall, No. 8 in this embodiment) and " Please return within 15 minutes and set again." and are displayed respectively. When this message is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), it is switched to a message telling the remaining time until the game restart time. When 3 minutes remain, the display area of the mobile terminal 470 displays the machine number of the pachinko machine 1 and the message "3 minutes remaining until game restart time", and the remaining time of 3 minutes. The number "3" for the minute is displayed blinking, and the background color changes from white to bright red. At this time, the portable terminal 470 continues to vibrate, and the alarm sound "Boo, Boo, Boo" continues to sound. In this state, when the mobile terminal 470 is again placed on the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300, the communication between the mobile terminal 470 and the peripheral control board 4140 is restored. Vibration and alarm sound will stop. On the other hand, if the mobile terminal 470 is not placed again on the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 by the game restart time, the mobile terminal 470 is placed on the platform of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Along with canceling the correspondence with the number, a message to that effect is displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal 470 . In this way, the portable terminal 470 also has a support function for returning the player to the pachinko gaming machine 1 on which the game was played.

In addition, for example, when you leave the seat of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the mobile terminal 470 for a restroom break or the purchase of a drink, the mobile terminal 470 counts the remaining time until the game restart time, and displays the displays the machine number of the pachinko machine 1 (the machine number installed in the hall, No. 8 in this embodiment) and the message "Please return within 15 minutes and set again." Therefore, even if the player who leaves the seat of the pachinko gaming machine 1 carelessly forgets the machine number of the pachinko gaming machine 1 on which he/she was playing, the portable terminal 470 The machine number of the pachinko game machine 1 displayed in the display area (the machine number installed in the hall, No. 8 in the present embodiment) can be confirmed (seen), and other machines different from the pachinko game machine 1 can be checked. It is possible to prevent the portable terminal 470 from being set by mistakenly sitting in front of the pachinko game machine. Therefore, even if the player leaves the seat, the player can return to the original seat and restart the game. When the player sets the portable terminal 470 to a pachinko machine different from the pachinko machine 1 on which he/she is playing, the display area of the portable terminal 470 displays a different number of the pachinko machine. A message will be displayed to inform you that

By the way, since the mobile terminal 470 is owned by the hall, when the player takes the mobile terminal 470 out of the hall, it is detected by a detection device installed at the entrance of the hall, and the notification sound is emitted from the entrance of the hall. It is designed to resound in the reception of the hall and the hall management room. However, when the player leaves the seat of the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as when the player takes a meal break or takes a break to refresh himself, a break time is set, and as will be described later, the display area of the mobile terminal 470 is set. If the remaining time until the game restart time is displayed, even if the mobile terminal 470 is detected by the detection device installed at the hall entrance, the notification sound will be emitted at the hall entrance, the hall reception, and the hall management room. It is designed not to ring. Also, even if the player were to take the portable terminal 470 out of the hall, the current position of the portable terminal 470 can be grasped by the tracking system on the hall side.

During the game, the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the mobile terminal 470 exchange various information (various data, various commands) by radio in both directions. A portable terminal charging device 460 for wirelessly charging a portable terminal 470 is attached to the back side of the upper plate upper panel 314 corresponding to the bottom surface of a recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the unit 300. . A brief description of the charging method by this portable terminal charging device 460 is as follows. Electricity is transmitted by "electromagnetic induction" in which current is applied to change the magnetic flux, and the change in magnetic flux from the transmitting coil causes current to flow to the receiving coil. In this way, when the player places the portable terminal 470 received at the hall reception on the concave portion 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300, the player can charge the portable terminal 470. Since charging is automatically started without the work of connecting wiring, the power consumption of the mobile terminal 470 prevents communication between the mobile terminal 470 and the pachinko game machine 1. is not interrupted. As a result, the player can play games for a long time without worrying about the remaining battery level due to power consumption of the portable terminal 470 .

[4-3. Ball forwarding unit]
Next, the ball feeding unit 580 will be described. The ball feeding unit 580 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper tray 301 in the tray unit 300 one by one to the hitting ball launching device 650, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 301 can be transferred to the upper tray ball. By operating the upper tray ball extracting button 341 of the extracting mechanism 340, the lower tray 302 can be extracted.

The ball feeding unit 580 is an entry port through which the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port of the upper plate 301 and the ball feeding opening of the door frame base body 110 in the front-rear direction. , and a box-shaped front cover with a ball outlet that opens below the entrance and an open rear, and a box-shaped front cover that closes the rear end of the front cover and opens in the front, penetrating in the front-back direction. A rear cover having a batted ball supply port 582a for supplying a game ball entering from the entrance port of the front cover to the batted ball launching device 650, and the rear cover and the front cover rotate about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A ball extracting member having a partition part which is pivotably supported and partitions an entry port and a ball extraction port on the rear side of the front cover, and a game ball on the partition part of the ball extracting member is hit one by one on the rear cover. A ball feeding member rotatably supported around an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover and the rear cover for feeding to the supply port 582a, and a ball feeding solenoid 585 for rotating the ball feeding member. there is

When the ball-feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball-feeding member receives one game ball. A game ball is sent (supplied) to the hitting ball launching device 650 side.

[4-4. handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 will be described. The handle device 500 includes a handle base that is fixed to a handle bracket attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 and that has a cylindrical shape with a round front end that protrudes in the direction perpendicular to the axis, and a handle base that is rotatable relative to the handle base. A front rotary handle main body 506 fixed to the rear of the rotary handle main body and integrally rotatable with the rear rotary handle main body, and a front rotary handle main body 506 are arranged on the front side. and a front end cover 508 that is fixed to the handle base and cooperates with the handle base to rotatably support the front rotatable handle body 506 and the rear rotatable handle body.

In addition, the handle device 500 includes a shaft member that is attached and fixed to the rotation center in front of the rotary handle body so as to protrude from the front side to the rear side and that has a non-circular bearing portion at the rear end thereof, and a shaft member that is fitted with the bearing portion. Detection of a potentiometer 512 having a rotatable detection shaft and non-rotatably fitted to the front surface of the handle base, and a potentiometer 512 fixed to the front surface of the handle base so as to sandwich the potentiometer 512 with the handle base. A switch support member having a through hole through which the shaft can pass, a touch switch 516 attached to the rear surface of the switch support member, and a firing stop switch 518 attached to a position different from the touch switch 516 on the rear surface of the switch support member. , a single-shot button that is rotatably supported on the switch support member to operate the firing stop switch 518, and a front 506 of the rotating handle body that is arranged so as to cover the outer circumference of the shaft member and a back of the rotating handle body at the original rotation position (front The handle return spring biases the rotating end of the rotating handle main body 506 so as to return to the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed, and the rotation of the rotary handle main body front 506 is expanded to the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 by a predetermined factor (in this embodiment, , magnifying 1.5 times) and a gear mechanism 519 . Incidentally, the potentiometer 512 is for electrically adjusting the intensity of hitting the game ball toward the game area 1100 according to the rotational position of the rotary handle main body front 506 . Also, the front 506 of the rotary handle body and the rear of the rotary handle body rotate from the original rotation position to the limit rotation position (clockwise rotation end when viewed from the front), which is the maximum rotation position in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. do.

Also, in the handle device 500, the potentiometer 512 is a variable resistor, and when the front 506 of the rotary handle main body and the rear rotary handle main body are rotated, the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 rotates via the shaft member. . The internal resistance of the potentiometer 512 changes according to the rotational position (rotational angle) of the detection shaft, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the ball shooting device 650 changes according to the internal resistance of the potentiometer 512, resulting in a rotation handle. The game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a shooting intensity corresponding to the rotation angle before the main body 506 and the rear rotation handle main body, that is, the rotational position before the rotation handle main body 506 and the rear rotation handle main body. there is

[4-5. foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 will be described. The foul cover unit 540 is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 below the game window 101, and the game ball paid out from the prize ball unit 700 and the ball fired by the batted ball launching device 650 are not played. A game ball (foul ball) that has not reached the area 1100 is guided to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 . The foul cover unit 540 is provided with a cover base having an open front side and having flow paths for a plurality of game balls inside, and a front cover closing the front end of the cover base.

The cover base of the foul cover unit 540 includes a first sphere entrance 542a arranged in the upper right corner in rear view and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a first ball entrance 542a communicating with the first sphere entrance 542a and extending to the right side in front view toward the front end of the cover base 542. One ball passage, a second ball inlet 542c arranged outside the first ball inlet 542a (on the right side in rear view) and having a larger opening than the first ball inlet 542a, communicated with the second ball passage and inside the cover base , and a second sphere entrance 542c extending downward and sloping downward toward the lower right corner in front view. The first ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c are the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. are formed at positions facing each other. The second ball passage in the cover base has a portion extending in the left-right direction along the lower end and has a height approximately three times the outer diameter of the game ball, allowing a predetermined amount of game balls to pass through. An accommodating space is formed.

In addition, the cover base 542 includes a foul ball inlet 542e that is arranged at an upper part in the left-right direction and that opens upward, and a foul ball inlet 542e that communicates with the foul ball inlet 542e and can guide a game ball to the upper part near the downstream of the second ball passage. and a ball passage. The cover base also has an opening/closing operation piece for operating the opening/closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 on the rear surface of the lower side of the second ball inlet. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the body frame 3, the opening/closing operation piece abuts against the spherical contact portion of the opening/closing crank in the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790, thereby rotating the opening/closing crank and opening the opening/closing shutter 792. It can be opened.

The front cover of the foul cover unit 540 has a substantially plate-like shape that closes the front surface of the cover base. and a second sphere outlet disposed at the lower right corner in front view and communicating with the downstream end of the second sphere passage of the cover base 542 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet of the front cover is connected to the upper plate ball supply port of the plate unit 300 through the notch of the door frame base unit 100 . The second ball outlet is connected to the rear end of the lower tray ball supply gutter in the tray unit 300 through the ball passage opening of the door frame base body 110 .

The foul cover unit 540 passes the game balls supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a through the first ball passage to the plate unit 300 from the first ball outlet. The ball can be supplied to the upper tray 301 through the upper tray ball supply port. In addition, the foul cover unit 540 passes the game ball supplied from the full tank ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c to the second ball outlet through the second ball passage. The ball can be supplied to the lower tray 302 through the lower tray ball supply gutter and the lower tray ball supply port of the tray unit 300 .

In addition, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul cover unit 540 has a foul ball entrance 542e located below the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3, and the hitting ball launcher 540 has a foul ball inlet 542e. If the game ball shot by 650 does not reach the game area 1100 and becomes a foul ball and falls down the foul space 626, it is received by the foul ball entrance 542e. The foul cover unit 540 can discharge (supply) the game ball received in the foul ball inlet 542e from the second ball outlet to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the foul ball passage and the second ball passage. It is possible.

Further, the foul cover unit 540 forms an upstream side (left side in a front view) of the storage space in the second ball passage and is pivotally supported by the cover base so as to be able to swing by the game balls stored in the storage space. a member, a full-tank switch 550 for detecting the rocking movement of the rocking member, and a spring for urging the rocking member in a non-detected state by the full-tank switch 550 . The lower end of the swing member is rotatably supported on the cover base, and the upper end of the swing member rotates leftward when viewed from the front. It is designed to form. Further, the swing member is biased by a spring to a substantially vertical position. In addition, the rocking member has a detection piece protruding outward on the side surface opposite to the accommodation space side, and the detection piece is detected by the full-tank switch 550 . In other words, based on the detection signal from the full tank switch 550, it is possible to determine whether or not the storage space is full of stored game balls.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. 8 is a front view of the game board, and FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the game board shown in FIG. 8 as seen from the front. In this embodiment, as described above, by adopting a small-sized shooting solenoid 654, the size of the batted ball shooting device 650 can be made compact, and by increasing the vertical dimension of the game board 4, a large-sized game can be played. It is board 4. The large game board 4 has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, as shown in FIGS. A frame-shaped front structural member 1110 that divides and forms the outer periphery of 1100, and when the front structural member 1110 is attached to the pachinko game machine 1 at the lower right corner of the front view, it can be visually recognized from the game window 101 of the door frame 5 to the player side. A function display unit 1180 arranged at a position corresponding to the function display unit 1180, and a plurality of openings which are attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1110 so as to close the game area 1100 and penetrate in the front-rear direction in a predetermined shape at positions corresponding to the game area 1100. A plate-like game panel 1150 having 1158 , a front unit 2000 attached to the opening 1158 of the game panel 1150 from the front side, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150 .

Also, the game board 4 is arranged between the game panel 1150 and the back unit 3000, and is inserted from the rear side of the game panel 1150 into a plurality of luminous decorative holes drilled through the game panel 1150. Panel lens member 2500 and a liquid crystal display device that is detachably attached to the rear side of back unit 3000 and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image that can be visually recognized from the player side according to the game state ("game board side liquid crystal display"). ), a substrate holder 1160 attached to the lower rear surface of the game panel 1150 so as to cover the lower portion of the back unit 3000 from the rear side, and a main control substrate box 1170 attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1160. I have.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front component member 1110 will be described. The front component member 1110 has a substantially rectangular outer shape that can be inserted into the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3, and has a substantially circular inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction. The perimeter of the region 1100 is partitioned. The front component member 1110 includes an outer rail 1111 extending in an arc shape clockwise from the lower end on the left side of the center in the front view, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extending obliquely to the upper right. An inner rail 1112 that is arranged inside the outer rail 1111 substantially along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc from the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front to the diagonally upper left when viewed from the front, and the inner rail 1112 smoothly continues from the lower end of the inner rail 1112. An inner peripheral rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position lower than the terminal end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along the circumferential direction counterclockwise in front view, the terminal end (upper end) of the inner peripheral rail 1113 and the outer rail 1111 The end (upper end) of the game area 1100 is connected at the boundary between the impinging portion 1114, which can be contacted by the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1111, and the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113. Out port guide surface 1115 arranged at the lowest end and lowered toward the rear, and the upper end of the inner rail 1112 are rotatably pivotally supported, and from the upper end of the inner rail 1112 so as to close the space between the outer rail 1111 and the outer rail 1111 . It is rotatable only between the closed position extending upward and the open position where it rotates clockwise in front view to open the space between the outer rail 1111 and returns to the closed position side. and a backflow prevention member 1116 biased by a spring.

In the front component member 1110, when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 is the shooting rail 660 (FIG. 1) of the ball shooting device 650 of the main body frame 3. (see ). Between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the shooting rail 660, a space is formed that expands in the left-right direction and downward, and a game ball shot out along the shooting rail 660 of the hitting ball shooting device 650 is released. , jumps over the space and is driven into between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 . A game ball struck between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to its momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1112 , and by rotating to the open position side against the urging force, it is possible to enter the game area 1100 .

Also, when a game ball is hit hard by the hitting ball launching device 650, the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1111 within the game area 1100 is made to abut against the impact portion 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. When the game ball comes into contact with the impinging portion 1114, the rolling direction of the game ball can be forcibly changed, and the game ball rolls continuously from the outer rail 1111 to the inner peripheral rail 1113. It is designed to prevent it from moving. In addition, even if the game ball that entered (strike) into the game area 1100 tries to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, it returns to the closed position by the biasing force of the backflow prevention member 1116 before that. Thus, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents the backflow of the game ball.

In addition, if the game ball hit into the game area 1100 is not received by the start openings 2101, 2102 or the winning openings 2103, 2104, 2201, etc. of the front unit 2000, it flows down to the lower end of the game area 1100, It is guided to the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150 by the out port guiding surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, and is discharged from the out port 1151 to the lower rear side of the game board 4. .

On the other hand, when the game ball shot from the hitting ball shooting device 650 cannot cross the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112 and enter the game area 1100, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 A foul space 626 ( 1) is received in the foul ball inlet 542e (see FIG. 1) of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the door frame 5 located at the bottom of the foul space 626, and is received in the dish unit 300. It is designed to be discharged to a lower tray 302 (see FIG. 7).

A metal plate is attached to the surface of the outer rail 1111 of the front structural member 1110, which enhances wear resistance due to the rolling of the game ball and allows the game ball to roll smoothly. ing. In addition, the impact part 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin arranged on the surface thereof, so that even if the game ball rolls vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and collides, the impact can be alleviated. and the game ball can be rebounded inward.

In addition, the front structural member 1110 has a pair of positioning recesses 1119 which are vertically spaced apart at the left end in front view, are recessed from the front to the rear and are open at the left end, and vertically spaced apart at the right end in front view. A pair of game board stoppers 1120 arranged, a fixed recess 1121 which is arranged on the left side of the lower end of the outer rail 1111 in front view, opens downward, has an upper arc shape and is recessed from the front side, and a lower end in front view. A notch 1122 for ball passage is provided in the vicinity of the left end of the ball passage and is cut out in a rectangular shape extending upward from the lower end in the left-right direction. The positioning recess 1119 of the front component member 1110 is fitted with a positioning member 956 (see FIG. 5) attached to the inner side of the side crime prevention plate 950 of the main body frame 3, thereby forming a game board holding opening 601 (see FIG. 5). ), the front-view left end of the game board 4 can be restricted from moving forward and backward. The game board stopper 1120 can be detachably locked to the game board locking portion of the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 can be engaged with the game board. By being engaged with the stopping portion, the front-view right end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3 can be restricted from moving forward and backward.

In addition, the fixing concave portion 1121 of the front component member 1110 includes a game board fixture 690 (see FIG. ) is rotated clockwise in a front view, the fixing piece 690a (see FIG. 5) of the game board fixture 690 is inserted, and the game board 4 is held by the game board fixture 690. The forward movement of the lower end of the is restricted. In addition, a ball passage notch 1152 is formed at the same position on the game panel 1150 as the ball passage notch 1122 of the front structural member 1110 , and the game board 4 is held by the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3 . The front end of the full-tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 5) is inserted into the cutouts 1122 and 1152 for the ball passage when it is inserted into the ball passage.

A function display unit 1180, which will be described later, is arranged on the lower right side of the front structural member 1110 when viewed from the front.

[5-2. front unit]
Next, the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 will be explained. The front unit 200 includes an attacker unit 2100 which is arranged above the out port 1151 at the lower center in the left-right direction within the game area 1100 and supported on the front surface of the game panel 1150, and an attacker unit 2100 which is located on the left side of the attacker unit 2100 and which is located on the outer periphery of the game area 1100. A side prize winning opening member 2200 arranged along and supported on the front surface of the game panel 1150, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2300 arranged substantially in the center of the game area 1100 and supported by the game panel 1150. there is

This front unit 2000 is inserted from the front side into an opening 1158 formed at a position corresponding to the game area 1100 in the game panel 1150, and attached to the front of the game panel 1150. A portion projecting forward from the game panel 1150 is positioned within the game area 1100 . As a result, the front unit 2000 comes into contact with the game ball driven into the game area 1100 at an appropriate position, and together with the obstacle nail planted on the front surface of the game panel 1150, the front unit 2000 can prevent the movement of the game ball. It is designed so that it can be changed by Also, the front unit 2000 can decorate the inside of the game area 1100 .

A game ball shot toward the game area 1100 flowing down the left side of the center role 2300 is called "left hitting", whereas the right side of the center role 2300 is called "left hitting". The method of hitting a game ball that flows down is called "right hitting".

[5-2-1. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described. The attacker unit 2100 has a plurality of receiving openings (winning openings) capable of receiving game balls hit into the game area 1100. A starting port 2101 , a lower starting port 2102 arranged below the upper starting port 2101 , and a rectangular shape arranged below the lower starting port 2102 and extending farther in the horizontal direction than the upper starting port 2101 and the lower starting port 2102 . A large prize winning opening 2103 having a shape and general winning openings 2104 arranged slightly above both left and right sides of the large winning opening 2103 are provided. A game ball received in these upper starting opening 2101, lower starting opening 2102, big winning opening 2103, and general winning opening 2104 is guided from the front side of the game panel 1150 to the rear side.

The upper starting port 2101 of this attacker unit 2100 is open at the upper side, and game balls can always be received (winning). On the other hand, a pair of movable pieces 2106 that can be opened by a starting port solenoid 2105 (see FIG. 99) are arranged between the lower starting port 2102 arranged below the upper starting port 2101 and the upper starting port 2101 . In the state in which the pair of movable pieces 2106 are erected substantially vertically, the game ball cannot be received into the lower start opening 2102 by the upper start opening 2101 and the pair of movable pieces 2106. In a state in which the piece 2106 is expanded in the left-right direction, the game ball can be received into the lower start opening 2102. - 特許庁In other words, the pair of movable pieces 2106 make the lower starting opening 2102 a variable winning opening. The pair of movable pieces 2106 are opened and closed by driving the starting solenoid 2105 based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the gate switch 2352 of the gate portion 2350 of the center accessory 2300, which will be described later.

Also, the large winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 can be opened and closed by a horizontally long rectangular opening and closing member 2107 capable of closing the opening. The opening/closing member 2107 is rotatably supported at its lower side, and when it is in a substantially vertical state, it is possible to close the large winning opening 2103 and make it impossible to receive a game ball, while its upper side moves forward. 2103 is opened to accept game balls. This opening/closing member 2107 is in a state in which the large winning opening 2103 is closed in a normal game state, and a special lottery is drawn by receiving a game ball into the upper starting opening 2101 or the lower starting opening 2102 (starting winning). Depending on the result of the lottery (when the result of the special lottery is "big win" or "minor win"), the attacker solenoid 2108 (see FIG. 99) is driven to open and close.

Furthermore, the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 is open upward, and game balls can always be received (winning a prize).

In addition, the attacker unit 2100 includes a lower starting port switch 2109 for detecting game balls received in the lower starting port 2102 and a count switch for detecting game balls received in the big winning port 2103, although detailed illustration is omitted. 2110 are further provided, and game balls detected by the lower starting port switch 2109 and the count switch 2110 are discharged onto the bottom wall portion of the substrate holder 1160 . The back unit 3000 is provided with an upper starter switch 3022 for detecting a game ball received into the upper starter gate 2101 and a general prize winning port switch 3020 for detecting a game ball received into the general prize winning port 2104. .

[5-2-2. Side prize opening member]
Next, the side winning opening member 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described. The side winning opening member 2200 is inserted from the front side into an opening 1158 formed on the left side of the opening 1158 into which the attacker unit 2100 is inserted and fixed, in the lower part of the game panel 1150 to the left from the center in the left-right direction. Above, it is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1150, and is arranged to face each other along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 so as to be aligned with the general winning opening 2104 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100 when viewed from the front. A general prize winning opening 2201 is provided. These two general prize-winning ports 2201 are open upward and are always capable of receiving (winning) game balls, and the game balls received in the general prize-winning ports 2201 are guided from the front side to the rear side of the game panel 1150. After that, it is detected by a general prize winning port switch 3020 provided in the back unit 3000 which will be described later.

In addition, in the side winning opening member 2200, the left end is arranged at the upper left end at a position where the left end is substantially in contact with the outer periphery of the game area 1100. The shelf portion 2202 and the first shelf portion 2202 are arranged on the opposite side and the lower side of the two general winning openings 2201, and are arranged on the left-right center side of the game area 1100 (the lower starting opening 2102 of the attacker unit 2100 and the big winning opening). 2103 side), and the first shelf 2202 allows the game ball that has flowed down along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 to be brought to the center side of the game area 1100. It is possible.

In addition, the two general winning openings 2201 are arranged on the right side of the right end of the first shelf portion 2202. It is designed so that there is a possibility of winning a prize in the general prize winning opening 2201 . Further, a third shelf portion 2204 is also provided on the upper side between the two general prize winning openings 2201 so as to be lowered toward the central side of the game area 1100 .

The side winning hole member 2200 is formed to have translucency as a whole, and although detailed illustration is omitted, a side winning hole decorative substrate is provided on the rear side of the second shelf part 2203. At the same time, a side lamp decoration substrate 3014 in a back unit 3000, which will be described later, is arranged behind the side winning opening member 2200, and the side winning opening decoration substrate and the side lamp decoration substrate 3014 make the side winning opening member 2200. can be luminous decoration.

[5-2-3. Center role]
Next, the center accessory 2300 of the table unit 2000 will be explained. The center accessory 2300 is inserted from the front side into a large opening 1158 that penetrates substantially the center of the game panel 1150, and is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1150. It is formed in a frame shape with a size that occupies most of the area 1100, and the outer peripheral surface on the right side in front view is arcuate so that a gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball is formed between the outer peripheral surface of the game area 1100 and the outer peripheral surface of the game area 1100. Along with being formed, the outer peripheral surface on the left side is formed on a substantially straight line that hangs down so that a region with a predetermined width is formed between the outer periphery of the game area 1100 .

This center accessory 2300 is an upper shelf 2301 that is inclined from a position slightly rightward of the center in the left-right direction on the outer peripheral surface of the upper side of the front wall portion located in front of the game panel 1150 so as to become lower as it goes leftward. , and when the game ball hit to the upper part in the game area 1100 flows down to the upper shelf part 2301, it flows down through the left side of the center accessory 2300, and the right side of the upper shelf part 2301 The game ball that has flowed down (entered) into the game area 1100 passes through the right side of the center accessory 2300 and flows down to the bottom of the game area 1100 at once. In other words, if a game ball is hit so that it enters the right side of the upper shelf 2301 of the center accessory 2300, the opportunity to enjoy the downfall of the game ball is reduced. The tension can be adjusted as appropriate, and tension can be maintained to prevent the game from becoming careless.

In addition, the center accessory 2300 enters the warp entrance 2302 through which the game balls flowing down the game area 1100 can enter the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion located on the front side of the game panel 1150, and the warp entrance 2302. A warp exit (not shown) that releases the game ball into the frame, and a center function that releases the game ball released from the warp exit into the game area 1100 above the attacker unit 2100 after rolling in the left and right direction. and a stage 2310 formed on the upper surface of the lower side within the frame in 2300 .

Although not shown in detail, the stage 2310 in the center function 2300 includes a first stage where game balls released from the warp exit are supplied, and a stage in front of the first stage where game balls are delivered from the first stage. and a second stage that is supplied and capable of releasing game balls into the game area 1100 . The stage 2310 is formed in a curved surface so that the center in the left-right direction is lowered. A chance entrance 2313 into which a game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the center in the left-right direction of the first stage. It is designed to be released into the game area 1100 from the exit 2314 . This chance exit 2314 is arranged directly above the upper starting opening 2101 in the attacker unit 2100, and the game ball released from the chance exit 2314 is accepted (winning) to the upper starting opening 2101 with a high probability. ing.

The stage 2310 in the center accessory 2300 is made of a transparent member, and through this stage 2310, decorations placed below the stage 2310 in the back unit 3000 can be seen from the player side. It's becoming

In addition, the center accessory 2300 has a transparent transparent wall extending leftward so as to substantially contact the inner rail 1112 above the warp entrance 2302 on the outer peripheral surface of the left side of the front wall portion located on the front side of the game panel 1150 . An arch portion 2315 is further provided. The arch portion 2315 extends like a thin plate from the front end of the front wall portion, and forms a space between the arch portion 2315 and the front surface of the game panel 1150 through which game balls can pass. As a result, the game ball hit to the upper part of the game area 1100 and guided to the left of the center accessory 2300 by the upper shelf part 2301 flows downstream through the rear side of the arch part 2315. .

Further, the center accessory 2300 is provided with a gate portion 2350 for detecting passage of a game ball in the vicinity of the arch portion 2315 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion located on the front side of the game panel 1150 . This gate portion 2350 is arranged above the arch portion 2315 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion, and detects a gate entrance through which a game ball flowing down the game area 1100 can enter, and a game ball that has entered the gate entrance. A gate switch 2352 that detects the gate switch 2352 and a gate exit that discharges the game ball detected by the gate switch 2352 from the outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion to the game area 1100 . In this embodiment, although detailed illustration is omitted, the gate outlet of the gate portion 2350 is formed at the same height position as the arch portion 2315, and the game ball detected by the gate switch 2352 is The part 2315 is made to look as if it has dived.

[5-3. Panel lens member]
Next, the panel lens member 2500 of the game board 4 will be explained. The panel lens member 2500 has a plurality of light emitting elements formed in a circular or X shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position outside the opening 1158 into which the center accessory 2300 is inserted in the game area 1100 of the game panel 1150 . The decorative holes are decorated with light. This panel lens member 2500 includes a transparent upper panel lens 2510 corresponding to a plurality of light emitting decorative holes formed on the upper left side of the outer periphery of the center accessory 2300, and a plurality of transparent upper panel lenses 2510 arranged behind the upper panel lens 2510 on the surface. An upper panel lens substrate on which LEDs are mounted, a transparent lower panel lens 2520 corresponding to a plurality of light emitting decorative holes formed on the lower left side of the outer periphery of the center accessory 2300, and a transparent lower panel lens 2520 arranged behind the lower panel lens 2520. and a lower panel lens substrate having a plurality of LEDs mounted on its surface.

The upper panel lens 2510 and the lower panel lens 2520 in the panel lens member 2500 project forward from a plate-like lens base portion, and are a plurality of rod-shaped inserted light guides having substantially the same shape as the shape of the decorative light emission hole to be inserted. has a department. When this insertion light guide part is inserted into the light emission decoration hole of the game panel 1150 from the rear side, the tip thereof is formed to substantially match the front surface of the game panel 1150, and the game panel 1150 flows down the front surface of the game panel 1150. It is designed to have as little impact as possible on the ball.

The panel lens member 2500 allows the LEDs of the upper panel lens substrate and the lower panel lens substrate to emit light as appropriate, so that even if an opaque game panel 1150 such as veneer plywood is used, the region where the game balls flow down can be decorated with light. In addition, the game panel 1150 can be displayed to the player, and the pachinko game machine 1 can be distinguished from other pachinko game machines by making it stand out.

[5-4. back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 will be explained. The back unit 3000 is attached and fixed to the rear surface of the game panel 1150, and the back box 3001 supports the liquid crystal display device 1900 at a position separated from the game panel 1150 rearward by a predetermined distance. An upper unit 3100 arranged on the upper side of the device 1900, a character unit 3400 arranged on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the back box 3001, and a gear decoration arranged on the left side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the back box 3001. A body unit 3500 is mainly provided. Each unit 3100, 3400, 3500 is provided with various movable bodies.

In addition, the back unit 3000 is arranged at a position corresponding to the side winning opening member 2200 in the front unit 2000 attached to the front of the game panel 1150 near the lower left front end of the back box 3001, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the surface. A side lamp decoration board 3014, a game ball attached to the lower front end of the back box 3001 and received in the general winning opening 2201 of the side winning opening member 2200, and a game received in the left general winning opening 2104 in the attacker unit 2100. A left guide member 3016 that guides the ball downward, and a right guide member 3016 that is arranged on the right side of the left guide member 3016 and guides down the game ball received in the upper starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 and the general winning port 2104 on the right side. and a guide member 3018 .

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the back unit 3000 includes a horizontally elongated rectangular lamp drive board box 3423 that is arranged at the lower rear side of the back box 3001 and accommodates the lamp drive board 4170, and a A horizontally long rectangular motor drive board box 3430 that is arranged on the side and houses the motor drive board 4180, and a lamp drive board box 3423 fixed to the rear side of the back box 3001 and the motor drive board box 3430 are arranged on the left side of the rear view. a panel relay terminal plate 4161, a laterally elongated rectangular upper resistor board arranged on the upper rear side of the back box 3001, and a lock member attached to the rear side of the back box 3001 and holding the liquid crystal display device 1900 detachably. , is further provided.

In this embodiment, the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2300 in the front unit 2000, and each unit 3100, 3400 formed in a predetermined shape. , 3500, etc. can characterize the concept of the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. In the back unit 3000, various movable bodies of the units 3100, 3400, and 3500 can move independently or in cooperation with each other according to the game state. A change in the game state, the arrival of a chance, etc. can be suggested, and the player can be entertained.

[5-4-1. back box]
Next, the back case 3001 of the back unit 3000 will be described. The back box 3001 is formed in a box-like shape with an open front side, and has a plurality of flange-shaped fixing portions 3001a protruding outward at the front end. It is designed to be fixed. In addition, the back box 3001 has a rectangular opening formed substantially in the center of the rear wall, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 supported on the rear side can be visually recognized from the player side through this opening. Further, the back box 3001 has mounting portions for mounting and fixing the units 3100, 3400, 3500 and the substrates 3014 and the like at appropriate positions.

Also, although illustration is omitted, the back box 3001 has one fixing piece 1902 (right side in rear view) that protrudes outward from both left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and is inserted and locked to the right side of the opening in rear view. A liquid crystal supporting portion is provided, and a lock member is attached to the left side of the opening when viewed from the back. A display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear side of the back box 3001 .

[5-4-2. Induction member]
Next, the left guiding member 3016 and the right guiding member 3018 are described. The left guiding member 3016 guides and discharges the game balls received in the general winning opening 2201 of the side winning opening member 2200 and the general winning opening 2104 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100 downward through different channels, respectively. Each channel is provided with a general winning port switch 3020 for detecting the passage of a game ball. On the other hand, the right guide member 3018 guides and discharges the game balls received in the upper starting port 2101 and the right-side general winning port 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 downward through different channels up to the vicinity of the lower end. An upper starting port switch 3022 is provided in the channel corresponding to the upper starting port 2101, and a general winning port switch 3020 is provided in the channel corresponding to the general winning port 2104 on the right side. Further, the right guide member 3018 is provided with a magnetism detection switch 3024 capable of detecting magnetism.

The game ball guided downward by the left guide member 3016 and the right guide member 3018 is discharged onto the bottom wall portion of the board holder 1160, and is discharged below the game board 4 from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the board holder 1160. It has become so.

[5-4-3. upper unit]
Next, the upper unit 3100 will be explained. The upper unit 3100 is formed horizontally as a whole, and is attached and fixed to the upper side of the opening facing the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the back box 3001 . The upper unit 3100 includes a rotary decoration unit 3200 which is arranged on the front in the approximate center in the left-right direction and has a circular shape when viewed from the front, and an elevating mechanism which is arranged on the rear side of the rotary decoration unit 3200 and moves the rotary decoration unit 3200 up and down. 3250, a swinging decoration unit 3300 arranged substantially in the center in the horizontal direction on the rear side of the lifting mechanism 3250, and movable ceiling units 3350 arranged on both left and right sides of the swinging decoration unit 3300. ing.

The rotating decorative body unit 3200 can be vertically moved by an elevating mechanism 3250 between a raised position located above the liquid crystal display device 1900 and a lowered position located substantially in the center of the liquid crystal display device 1900. It has become. In this rotary decoration unit 3200, the rotary decoration formed in the shape of a shuriken arranged on the front side is designed to rotate, and the centrifugal force of the rotation expands the radius of rotation of the rotary decoration. It's like

In addition, the rotary decoration unit 3200 not only rotates the rotary decoration at the end, but also protrudes radially outward. It can give a strong impact to the player, entertain the player, prevent the player from losing interest in the game, and strongly attract the player's interest. Thus, the pachinko game machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko game machine that is played with a large difference from other pachinko game machines.

The swinging decoration unit 3300 includes swinging decorations arranged to the left and right on the rear side so as to be adjacent to the rotating decoration unit 3200 positioned at the raised position, and swinging decorations to the left and right depending on the game state. It is designed so that the body can be swung in the left and right direction all at once.

The movable ceiling unit 3350 has plate-like ceiling decorations extending horizontally at both left and right ends of the upper unit 3100 . The ceiling decoration is formed to be rotatable about an axis extending in the left-right direction with the front end side as the center, so that the rear end side of the ceiling decoration rotates in a descending direction according to the game state. It's becoming

[5-4-4. character unit]
Next, the character unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be explained. The character unit 3400 is provided with a three-dimensionally modeled ninja character, and the character moves in the left-right direction from the rightmost position to the central position according to the game state. can be done. In addition, when the character body of the character unit 3400 moves in the horizontal direction, it rotates about an axis extending in the vertical direction by a predetermined angle along with the movement.

The character body of the character unit 3400 has a head that can reciprocate about an axis extending in the horizontal direction, and a right arm that can reciprocate about an axis extending in the vertical direction. can be done. As a result, by reciprocally rotating the head, it is possible to make the character behave as if the character is nodding. In addition, by reciprocating the right arm in the horizontal direction, the character can be made to act as if it were throwing a shuriken.

[5-4-5. Gear decoration unit]
Next, the gear decoration unit 3500 of the rear unit 3000 will be described. The gear decoration unit 3500 includes a plurality of gear-shaped gear decorations that are rotatable around an axis extending in the left-right direction and are arranged in the vertical direction. It is designed to rotate.

[5-4-6. Liquid crystal display device]
Next, the liquid crystal display device 1900 of the game board 4 will be described. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 of the back unit 3000, and can display a predetermined effect image according to the game state. The liquid crystal display device 1900 has fixing pieces 1902 projecting outward from both left and right sides, and is attached to the back case 3001 via the fixing pieces 1902 .

Although not shown in detail, the liquid crystal display device 1900 has a peripheral board box 1905 housing the peripheral control board 4140 on its rear side.

[6. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 on the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIG. This function display unit 1180 is attached to a predetermined position of the front structural member 1110 and arranged. FIG. 10 is an enlarged front view showing the function display unit on the game board attached to the pachinko game machine.

The function display unit 1180, as shown enlarged in FIG. 10, is a game state display consisting of one LED for displaying the game state that changes according to the game ball hit into the game area 1100 at the left end in front view. 1183, and an upper special symbol memory display 1184 for displaying the pending number of reception of game balls to the upper start port 2101, which consists of two LEDs arranged in the vertical direction on the right side of the game state display 1183, An upper special pattern consisting of one 7-segment LED arranged on the right side of the special pattern storage display 1184 and for displaying the first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball into the upper starting port 2101 as the first special pattern. A display device 1185 and one 7 for displaying a second special lottery result drawn by accepting a game ball into a lower starting port 2102 and arranged diagonally to the upper right of the upper special symbol display device 1185 as a second special symbol. A lower special symbol indicator 1186 consisting of a segment LED and two LEDs arranged in the vertical direction on the right side of the lower special symbol indicator 1186 Lower for displaying the number of reservations related to acceptance of game balls to the lower starting port 2102 A special symbol memory display 1187 is provided.

The display section 1181 of the function display unit 1180 is arranged in an arc substantially along the inner peripheral rail 1113 from directly above the lower special symbol display unit 1186 to display the number of pending game balls passing through the gate section 2350. A normal symbol storage display 1188 consisting of four LEDs, and a normal symbol storage display arranged below the normal symbol storage display for displaying the result of a normal lottery drawn by passing a game ball through a gate part 2350 as a normal symbol. A normal pattern display device 1189 consisting of one LED and a normal pattern storage display device 1188 are arranged diagonally on the upper right side, and when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is "big win", the big prize opening 2103 is opened and closed. and a round indicator 1190 consisting of two LEDs for indicating the number of repetitions (round number) of the pattern.

The gaming state indicator 1183 is a full-color LED that can change its emission color between red, green, and orange. Various game states ( For example, probability fluctuation state, time reduction state, probability variable time reduction state, big hit game state, small hit game state, etc.) can be displayed.

The upper special symbol memory display device 1184 suspends the start of the variation display when the game ball is received into the upper starting port 2101 when the first special symbol cannot be variably displayed on the upper special symbol display device 1185 ( It displays the reserved number (stored number) of the first special symbol stored). The special symbol memory display device 1184 has a first special symbol memory lamp 1184a and a first special symbol memory lamp 1184b made up of predetermined LEDs. A blinking pattern allows the pending number to be displayed. Specifically, for example, when the number of reservations is one, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a is lit and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is extinguished, and when the number of reservations is two, the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b. are lit together, and when the number of reservations is 3, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a blinks and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is lit, and when the number of reservations is 4, both the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are lit. Flashing. In addition, in this embodiment, up to four are reserved.

The lower special symbol memory display 1187 suspends the start of variable display when a game ball is received into the lower starting port 2102 when the second special symbol cannot be variably displayed on the lower special symbol display 1186 ( It displays the pending number (memory number) of the second special symbol that has been stored. This lower special symbol memory display 1187 has a second special symbol memory lamp 1187a and a second special symbol memory lamp 1187b consisting of predetermined LEDs, and the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are lit and A blinking pattern allows the pending number to be displayed. Specifically, for example, when the number of reservations is one, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a is lit and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is extinguished, and when the number of reservations is two, the second special symbol memory display lamp 1187a, 1187b both light up, when the number of reservations is 3, the second special design memory lamp 1187a blinks and the second special design memory lamp 1187b lights up, and when the number of reservations is 4, the second special design memory lamps 1187a and 1187b light up. Both flash. In addition, in this embodiment, up to four are reserved.

The upper special symbol display device 1185 and the lower special symbol display device 1186 display the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102. The 7-segment LED stops after fluctuating for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, and the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are played by the light emission pattern (special pattern) of the stopped 7-segment LED. It is designed so that the person can be made to recognize it.

The normal symbol display device 1189 is a full-color LED capable of changing its emission color between red, green, and orange. It is possible to display the ordinary lottery result that is drawn by passing the ball. It should be noted that the display of the normal symbols by the normal symbol display 1189, like the special symbols, is changed and displayed for a predetermined period of time, and then stopped and displayed in a light emission pattern corresponding to the result of the normal lottery.

The normal symbol storage display 1188 is a normal symbol in which the start of variable display is suspended (stored) when the game ball passes through the gate part 2350 when the normal symbol cannot be variably displayed on the normal symbol display 1189. It displays the number of pending (number of memories). This normal design memory display device 1188 has four normal design memory lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from the bottom, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the normal design memory lamp 1188a from the bottom according to the number of reservations. By sequentially lighting up to 1188d, it is possible to display the reserved number of normal symbols. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, up to four variable displays of normal symbols are reserved (stored).

The round indicator 1190 includes a 2-round display lamp 1190a and a 15-round display lamp 1190b, each of which is made up of a predetermined LED, and can display the number of rounds in the "jackpot" game by turning on each lamp. It's like

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the function display unit 1180 can be viewed from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 with the game board 4 attached to the pachinko game machine 1. there is game state indicator 1183, upper special symbol memory display 1184, upper special symbol display 1185, lower special symbol display 1186, lower special symbol memory display 1187, normal symbol memory display 1188, normal symbol display 1189, and A round indicator 1190 is attached to the front surface of the function display board 1191 . A connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear projection of the function display unit 1180 .

In this embodiment, since the function display unit 1180 is provided on the front component 1110 of the game board 4, compared to the case where it is provided on the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the game panel 1150, The function display unit 1180 can be diverted as the basic configuration of the game board 4, the configuration related to the pachinko game machine 1 can be simplified, the cost can be prevented from increasing, and the model of the pachinko game machine 1 (table Even if the detailed configuration of the game board 4 that is embodied by the unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 and that can characterize the model of the pachinko game machine 1 is different, the position of the function display unit 1180 does not change, so that the player and the game can It is possible to make hall clerks and the like recognize the position of the function display unit 1180 without confusion.

[7. Main control board, payout control board, power supply board and peripheral control board]
Next, the control board for performing various controls of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. FIG. FIG. 11 is a block diagram of the main control board, the payout control board and the peripheral control board, FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 11, and FIG. 14A and 14B are schematic diagrams of various detection signals input to and output from a game ball rental device connection terminal board that relays electrical connection with the display board; FIG. 14 is a block diagram continued from FIG. 11; FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing an outline of a peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 16 is a block diagram around a VDP with built-in sound source in a liquid crystal and sound control unit.

As shown in FIG. 11, the control configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 is mainly composed of a main control board 4100, a payout control board 4110 and a peripheral control board 4140, and various controls are shared. First, the main control board will be described, followed by the payout control board, the power supply board, and the peripheral control board.

[7-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 11, the main control board 4100, which controls the progress of the game, has a main control MPU 4100a, which is a microprocessor containing a ROM for storing various control programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. , a main control input circuit 4100b for inputting detection signals from various detection switches, a main control output circuit 4100c for outputting various signals to an external substrate, etc., and a main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids. It mainly includes a circuit 4100d and a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e that monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of a predetermined voltage.

The main control MPU 4100a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"). It also has a built-in watchdog timer that monitors its operation (system) and a function to prevent fraud.

In addition, the main control MPU 4100a has a built-in non-volatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM pre-stores a unique ID code assigned by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 4100a to identify the individual (a unique code that exists only in the world). Since the ID code assigned once is stored in a non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 4100a can retrieve the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

The main control input circuit 4100b is not provided with reset terminals for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various detection switches are input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 4100b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. In other words, in the main control input circuit 4100b, information based on detection signals from various detection switches input to various input terminals thereof is not reset by a main control system reset, which will be described later. It is configured as a circuit output from an output terminal.

The main control output circuit 4100c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND). A main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function having a reset terminal provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information, and a main control output circuit without a reset function 4100cb having no reset terminal and not having a reset function. and consists of The main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset, which will be described later, is input. That is, the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function resets the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by resetting the main control system described later. is configured as a circuit in which no signals based on are output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit without reset function 4100cb is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. In other words, the main control output circuit without reset function 4100cb does not reset the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit that outputs signals based on it from its various output terminals.

Shown in FIG. 8, the upper starter switch 3022 for detecting the game ball that entered the upper starter opening 2101, the lower starter switch 2109 for detecting the game ball that entered the lower starter opening 2102, and the general winning opening 2104 A detection signal from the general prize winning port switch 3020 that detects a game ball that has entered and a signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e are input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b. there is Also, shown in FIG. Detection signals from the count switch 2110 for detecting game balls and the magnetism detection switch 3024 attached to the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the terminal plate 4161 and the main control input circuit 4100b.

The main control MPU 4100a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca based on the detection signal from each of these switches. A control signal is output from 4100ca to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, and a drive signal is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d to the starter solenoid 2105 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay terminal plate 4161, or the predetermined output By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function, the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function passes through the panel relay terminal board 4161 and the function display board 1191 to the upper special symbol display. 1185, lower special symbol display 1186, upper special symbol memory display 1184, lower special symbol memory display 1187, normal symbol display 1189, normal symbol memory display 1188, game state display 1183, and round display 1190 It outputs drive signals.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function, thereby controlling payout from the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. By outputting various information (game information) to the substrate 4110 or outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with the reset function, the main control output with the reset function A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the circuit 4100ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e.

In this embodiment, the upper start switch 3022, the lower start switch 2109, the gate switch 2352, and the count switch 2110 are non-contact electromagnetic proximity switches. For the winning opening switches 3020, 3020, contact-type ON/OFF mechanical switches are used. This is because the game ball frequently enters the upper starting port 2101 and the lower starting port 2102 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2350, so the upper starting port switch 3022, the lower starting port switch 2109 and the gate switch 2352 Game ball detection also occurs frequently. For this reason, long-life proximity switches are used for the upper starter switch 3022, the lower starter switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352. FIG. Also, when a big win game state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2103 is opened and game balls enter frequently, so the game balls are frequently detected by the count switch 2110 . For this reason, the count switch 2110 also uses a long-life proximity switch. On the other hand, in general winning openings 2104 and 2201 into which game balls do not enter frequently, detection by general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 does not occur frequently. For this reason, the general prize winning port switches 3020, 3020 are mechanical switches having a shorter life than proximity switches.

In addition, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function, thereby controlling payout from the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function. Various commands are transmitted to the substrate 4110 as serial data. The payout control board 4110 outputs to the main control board 4100 a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect upon completion of normal reception of various commands from the main control board 4100 as serial data. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b.

In addition, the main control MPU 4100a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the payout control board 4110 as serial data at the main control input circuit 4100b, and the main control input circuit 4100b sends the command to the predetermined serial input port. Various commands are received as serial data at the input terminal. When the main control MPU 4100a completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 4110 as serial data, it sends a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output with reset function. A signal (primary payment ACK signal) is output to the payout control board 4110 from the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function.

In addition, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands relating to the control of the game effect and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko game machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 4100cb without the reset function. As a result, various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit without reset function 4100cb to the peripheral control board 4140 .

Here, the main peripheral serial transmission port for transmitting various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 4140 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 4100a is composed mainly of a main control CPU core 4100aa, and in addition to the main control built-in RAM, the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae, which is one of the main control serial I/O ports, etc., are connected to the bus 4100ah. 25 (see FIG. 25). The main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae transmits various commands as main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 4140, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 4100aea, a transmission buffer register 4100aeb, a serial management unit 4100aec, etc. (Fig. 25). The main control CPU core 4100aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec. It is transferred to the transmission shift register 4100aea to start transmission to the peripheral control board 4140 as main peripheral serial data. In this embodiment, the transmission buffer register 4100aeb has a storage capacity of 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 4100aa continuously transmits multiple commands to the peripheral control board 4140 by outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec after setting multiple commands in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb.

The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 4100 has an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a "capacitor") as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. ) and BC0 (see FIG. 17). This capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 4100a to store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM even when the power is cut off during the power cut-off process. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM, when an operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 described later is operated within a predetermined period from the time of power-on, an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 860a Is output from the payout control board 4110, through the main control input circuit 4100b, is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU4100a, and is completely erased from the main control built-in RAM by the main control MPU4100a (cleared).

[7-2. Payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 12, the payout control board 4110 for controlling the payout of game balls includes a payout control unit 4120 for performing various controls related to payout, an operation switch 860a for performing various functions, and the state of the pachinko game machine 1. and an error LED indicator 860b for displaying.

[7-2-1. Payout control unit]
As shown in FIG. 12, the payout control unit 4120, which performs various controls related to payout, has a payout control MPU 4120a, which is a microprocessor in which a ROM for storing various control programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, etc. are incorporated. , a payout control input circuit 4120b to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input, a payout control output circuit 4120c for outputting various signals to an external board or the like, and a prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. and a CR unit input/output circuit 4120e for exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6. The payout control MPU 4120a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”). It also has a built-in watchdog timer that monitors its operation (system) and a function to prevent fraud.

The payout control input circuit 4120b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information that the detection signals from the various detection switches are input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 4120b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. That is, the payout control input circuit 4120b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals by the payout control system reset described later, so that the various signals based on the information It is configured as a circuit output from an output terminal.

The payout control output circuit 4120c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and various signals are input to its various input terminals for outputting various signals to an external substrate etc. A payout control output circuit with reset function 4120ca having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information, and a payout control output circuit without reset function 4120cb having no reset terminal and having no reset function. and consists of The payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset, which will be described later, is input. That is, the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function resets the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by the payout control system reset described later. is configured as a circuit in which no signals based on are output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit without reset function 4120cb is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from payout control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. In other words, the payout control output circuit without reset function 4120cb does not reset the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by the payout control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit that outputs a signal based on it from its various output terminals.

Detection signals from a ball cutoff switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of game balls in the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 and a counting switch 751 for detecting game balls flowing down the prize ball passage of the prize ball device 740 are It is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a through the board 754 in the prize ball case of the ball device 740 and the payout control input circuit 4120b. The detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 for detecting the detection slit formed in the rotation detection board of the prize ball device 740 is first sent to the rotation angle switch board 753 of the prize ball device 740, then to the prize ball case inner board 754, and then to the prize ball case inner board 754. It is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a through the payout control input circuit 4120b.

Detection signals from the door frame open switch 618 for detecting opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 and the main body frame open switch 619 for detecting opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 are applied to the payout control input circuit 4120b. input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 for detecting whether or not the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. 851, and is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control input circuit 4120b.

The payout control MPU 4120a receives various commands relating to payout from the main control board 4100 via the payout control input circuit 4120b at the input terminal of its serial input port. When the payout control MPU 4120a completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 4100 as serial data, the payout control MPU 4120a outputs a payout control signal with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting to the circuit 4120ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output to the main control board 4100 from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function.

In addition, the payout control MPU 4120a transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko game machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port to the payout control output circuit without reset function 4120cb. Various commands are transmitted from the control output circuit 4120cb to the main control board 4100 as serial data. When the main control board 4100 completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 4110 as serial data, it outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to the payout control board 4110 to that effect. This signal (primary payment ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a through the payout control input circuit 4120b.

In addition, the payout control MPU 4120a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function. Outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4120d to the payout motor drive circuit 4120d, outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4120d to the payout motor 744 via the board 754 in the prize ball case, or outputs a pachinko from the output terminal of the predetermined output port By outputting a drive signal for displaying the state of the game machine 1 on the error LED indicator 860b to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, the drive signal from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function is output to the error LED indicator 860b. output to

The error LED indicator 860b is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, graphics, and the like. Contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator 860b are as follows. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is notified that it is "abnormal connection" (specifically, the main control board 4100 and An error has occurred in the electrical connection between the payout control board 4110), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out) Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, it is notified that there is no game ball in the supply passage of the prize ball device 740), and when the number "2" is displayed, it is "ball caught" (specifically Based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752, at the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the prize ball device 740, the payout rotor and the game ball are engaged near the entrance, and the payout rotor is difficult to rotate. ), and when the number "3" is displayed, it indicates that it is a "counting switch error" (specifically, a problem has occurred in the counting switch 751 based on the detection signal from the counting switch 751). ), and when the number "5" is displayed, it informs that it is a "retry error" (specifically, that the number of retries for the dispensing operation has reached a preset upper limit value). However, when the number "6" is displayed, it indicates that the tank is "full" (specifically, the game ball in which the storage space of the foul cover unit 540 is reserved based on the detection signal from the full tank switch 550). is full), and when the number "7" is displayed, it is "CR disconnected" (electrical connection is cut off anywhere from the payout control board 4110 to the CR unit 6 ), and when the number "9" is displayed, the fact that it is "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number) to that effect).

The content displayed on the error LED indicator 860b is also displayed in the display area of the portable terminal 470 placed in the concave portion 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. Before the main frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2, the hall clerk or the like can read the content displayed on the error LED indicator 860b on the screen displayed in the display area of the portable terminal 470. It is possible to know by A specific screen on which the content displayed on the error LED indicator 860b is displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal 470 will be described later.

In addition, the payout control MPU 4120a outputs the number of game balls actually paid out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function. , the number of game balls actually put out is output to the external terminal plate 784 via a resistor (not shown).

In addition, the payout control board 4110 outputs various information (game information) regarding the game from the main control board 4100 to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal plate 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (infrared LED and photo IC built-in). ), the number of game balls, etc. and various information (game information) are transmitted to the hall computers installed therein. The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are in a state of being electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers. A main control board 4100 that advances the game from the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko game machine 1 and a payout control board that controls payout etc. An abnormal voltage is applied to the 4110, causing it to malfunction or break down. The hall computer monitors the game played by the player by grasping the number of game balls put out by the pachinko game machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加

A game ball lending request signal from the ball lending switch 365a of the ball lending unit 360 shown in FIG. , and is input to the CR unit 6 via a terminal board 869 for connecting a game ball lending device. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 in a serial manner, and this signal is transmitted to the CR unit. It is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a through the input/output circuit 4120e. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining degree of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls, and sends a signal for displaying the remaining degree on the remaining degree indicator 365c. The signal is output to the rental device connection terminal board 869, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display plate 365, and this signal is input to the remaining frequency display 365c. In addition, the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 is input to the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the remaining number indicator 365c through the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. there is

In addition, the power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 4110 has a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 17) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. there is Due to this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 4120a can store various kinds of information in the payout control built-in RAM even when the power is cut off in the process at the time of power cutoff. Various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, when the operation switch 860a is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, the operation signal is transmitted through the payout control input circuit 4120b to the payout control MPU 4120a. It is input to the input terminal of the input port, and the payout control MPU 4120a judges it as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. It is designed to be completely erased (cleared). This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit without reset function 4120cb, and is also output to the main control board 4100 from the payout control output circuit without reset function 4120cb.

[7-2-2. Exchanging various signals with the connection terminal board for rental equipment such as game balls]
Here, exchange of various signals between the payout control section 4120 and the CR unit 6 and exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display plate 365 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 13, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 not only relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 4110, but also connects the CR unit 6 and the frequency display plate 365. (To be exact, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 is electrically connected to the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880. , the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay The terminal plate 880 and the degree display plate 365 are electrically connected). Between the board between the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, between the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the payout control board 4110, between the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay The terminal plate 880 is electrically connected to the substrate, and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the frequency display plate 365 are electrically connected by wiring (harness). AC 24 V, which will be described later, is supplied from the power supply board 851 to the CR unit 6 via a terminal board 869 for renting equipment such as game balls. The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, DC +12V (DC+12V, hereinafter referred to as "+12V")) from the supplied AC 24V by a built-in voltage generating circuit (not shown), and generates the voltage together with the ground LG. , to the payout control board 4110 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 , and to the frequency display plate 365 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 . .

A ball rental switch 365a, which is a push button switch, is mounted on the component surface of the frequency display plate 365 at a position corresponding to the ball rental button 361 of the ball rental unit 360 shown in FIG. A return switch 365b, which is a push button switch, is mounted at a position corresponding to the button 362, and a remaining number indicator 365c, which is a segment display, is mounted at a position corresponding to the remaining rental display section 363 of the ball rental unit 360.

The ball rental switch 365a and the return switch 365b are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. When the ball lending button 361 is pressed, the ball lending switch 365a is switched on (ON), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending switch 365a is transmitted to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via a ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 . When the return button 362 is pressed, the return switch 365b is turned on (ON), and the return operation signal RES from the return switch 365b is connected to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball rental device. Input is made to the CR unit 6 via the terminal board 869 .

The remaining power indicator 365c is composed of three segment indicators arranged in a row. Of these three-digit segment indicators, the segment indicators are sequentially driven one by one. The lighting of the segment display is controlled. With such lighting control, the remaining credits indicator 365c displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6 or an error of the CR unit 6. FIG. The remaining number indicator 365c includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (three signals in total) for designating a 1-digit segment display out of 3-digit segment displays, and the designated 1-digit segment display. Segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (7 signals in total) for designating the contents to be lit and displayed, are connected from the CR unit 6 to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, and the main door relay terminal plate 880, the one-digit segment displays are sequentially illuminated in accordance with the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and these three-digit segment displays can be visually recognized through the remaining loan display portion 363.

A CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the power display plate 365 adjacent to the remaining power display 365c. A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input to the CR unit lamp 365 d via a game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and a main door relay terminal plate 880 . A predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lendable signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via a CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from AC 24 V supplied from the power supply board 851 with a built-in voltage creation circuit, and when the ball lending switch 365a and the return switch 365b are in a valid ball lending state controls the logic of the ball lendable signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light. Further, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the remaining number indicator 365c through the current limiting resistor mounted on the terminal board 869 for connecting the game ball lending device.

In the CR unit 6, when the ball rental button 361 is pressed, the ball rental operation signal TDS from the ball rental switch 365a is sent from the frequency display plate 365 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. When input, the ball rental request signal BRDY is output to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 . Then, the CR unit 6 issues a single payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of rental balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, which is equivalent to 100 yen as an amount) in one payout operation. BRQ is output to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input sends EXS, which is a signal for notifying the start or end of one payout operation, to the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. to output to the CR unit 6 via the terminal board for connecting the game ball lending device PRDY, which is a signal to notify that the payout operation for paying out the rental balls is possible or not possible. 869 to the CR unit 6. For example, if the hall clerk or the like has set the CR unit 6 in advance so that game balls worth 200 yen are paid out when the ball rental button 361 is pressed, one payout operation is performed. is performed twice in a row, and when 25 balls worth 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls worth 100 yen will be paid out, and a total of 50 balls worth 200 yen will be paid out. Become.

In the CR unit 6, when the return button 362 is pressed, the return operation signal RES from the return switch 365b is input from the frequency display plate 365 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. Then, the prepaid card is ejected from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of game balls paid out as a result of pressing the ball rental button 361 .

[7-3. Power board]
Next, the power supply board 851 will be briefly described. The power board 851 includes a power switch 852 that can electrically connect or disconnect the 24 volt AC (24V AC) supplied from the pachinko island facility, and a power control unit 855 that generates various power sources. and a shooting control section 857 that controls shooting by the shooting solenoid 654 of the ball shooting device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and ball sending control by the ball sending solenoid 585 of the ball sending unit 580 shown in FIG. 24 volts AC (24V AC) supplied from the pachinko island facility is first supplied to the power switch 852 via a fuse (FUSE) 851a when it is supplied to the power supply board 851 .

[7-3-1. Power control section]
The power control unit 855 operates a synchronous rectification circuit 855a that rectifies 24 volts AC (24V AC) supplied from the pachinko island facility by operating the power switch 852, and improves the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectification circuit 855a. A power factor correction circuit 855b, a smoothing circuit 855c for smoothing the power whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 855b, and various direct currents to be supplied to various substrates from the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 855c. A power generation circuit 855d that generates power, and when the voltage supplied to the power generation circuit 855d exceeds a predetermined voltage, a large current flows through the fuse 851a, and the 24 volt AC (24V AC) supplied from the pachinko island facility is electrically connected. and a power supply destruction circuit 855e for disconnecting.

[7-3-2. Launch control unit]
A shooting control section 857, which performs shooting control by the shooting solenoid 654 and ball forwarding control by the ball forwarding solenoid 585, is mainly composed of a firing control circuit 857a, an electrolytic capacitor 857b, and a wasteful hitting prevention circuit 857c. The shooting control circuit 857a receives an operation signal from a potentiometer 512 that electrically adjusts the intensity (shooting intensity) with which the game ball is shot toward the game area 1100 according to the rotational position of the rotary handle main body front 506 shown in FIG. , and a detection signal from a firing stop switch 518 for detecting whether or not the launching (shooting) of the game ball is to be forcibly stopped by the player's will, and are inputted via the handle relay terminal plate 192, When a detection signal from the touch switch 516 for detecting whether or not the palm or fingers are in contact with the front 506 of the rotating handle body is input to the power supply board 851 via the handle relay terminal plate 192, a wasteful hitting prevention circuit 857c is activated. is entered via In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected to the launch control circuit 857a, a CR connection signal is input via the payout control board 4110 to notify that effect. .

The firing control circuit 857a steps down a predetermined DC power supply (+37V DC power supply described later) among the various DC power supplies supplied from the power generation circuit 855d to produce a DC power supply for driving the firing solenoid (+35V DC (+35V DC, hereinafter referred to as " +35V”))), and the drive current for launching (shooting) the game ball toward the game area 1100 based on the operation signal from the potentiometer 512 is adjusted and shot. A firing solenoid drive circuit 857ab for controlling output to the solenoid 654 and a constant current output to the ball feeding solenoid 585 via the handle relay terminal plate 192 cause the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 580 to operate as shown in FIG. It is mainly composed of a ball feed solenoid drive circuit 857ac that receives one game ball stored in the upper tray 301 of the unit 300 and performs control to feed the game ball received by the ball feed member to the batted ball launcher 650 side. .

The firing control circuit 857a is electrically connected to the positive terminal of an electrolytic capacitor 857b whose negative terminal is grounded (GND). When applied, the electrolytic capacitor 857b is charged. A current from the DC/DC converter 857aa and a current resulting from the discharge of the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor 857b are merged to flow through the firing solenoid drive circuit 857ab. Firing solenoid drive circuit 857ab adjusts the drive current for launching (shooting) the game ball toward the game area 1100 based on the operation signal from the potentiometer 512, and controls the output to the launch solenoid 654 by adjusting the combined current. Is going. On the other hand, the ball-feeding solenoid drive circuit 857ac performs control to output a constant current to the ball-feeding solenoid 585 by a DC +24 V, which will be described later, among the various DC power sources supplied from the power generation circuit 855d.

When the firing control circuit 857a determines, based on the operation signal from the potentiometer 512, that the rotation position of the front rotary handle main body 506 is rotated beyond the right-handed set position described later, the game is played by right-handed. A right-handed hitting signal that tells that there is a right-handed hitting signal is output to the payout control board 4110 as a payout right-handing signal. This output is output via a right-handed signal output circuit (not shown), and is an open collector output. The launch control circuit 857a is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via wiring (harness). When it is determined that the rotational position of the front rotary handle main body 506 is rotated beyond the right-handed setting position described later, the collector terminal of the transistor of the right-handed signal output circuit (not shown) is connected to the payout control board 4110 via wiring (harness). is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the logic of the payout right hitting signal becomes LOW. In the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110, the collector terminal of the transistor of the striking signal output circuit is a pull-up resistor whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power line. It is electrically connected to the other end and pulled up to the +12V side, and the logic of the payout right-handed signal becomes HI.

When the power is cut off, the wasteful hitting prevention circuit 857c prevents the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor 857b from flowing to the firing solenoid drive circuit 857ab, thereby preventing the drive current from flowing to the firing solenoid 654. It is a circuit that can prevent the shooting of useless game balls in the. A detailed description thereof will be given later.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
The peripheral control board 4140, as shown in FIG. A liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 for controlling sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 shown in FIG. 470 and a communication control unit 4162 for bi-directionally exchanging various information (various data, various commands) wirelessly, and a real-time device that holds calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second. A clock (hereinafter referred to as “RTC”) control unit 4165 controls the volume of music, sound effects, and the like flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5. A volume adjustment volume 4140a is provided, which is adjusted by rotating the knob.

[7-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
Peripheral control unit 4150, which performs performance control, includes, as shown in FIG. Various information (for example, drawing on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 Peripheral control RAM 4150c that stores information for managing schedule data that defines the screen and schedule data that defines the light emission mode of various LEDs, etc.), and various information that continues over the course of the day (for example, the jackpot game state Peripheral control SRAM 4150d that stores information for managing the history of occurrence of , information for managing special effect flags, etc.), and peripheral control MPU 4150a for monitoring whether it is operating normally and an external watchdog timer 4150e (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external WDT 4150e”).

The peripheral control RAM 4150c can retain the stored contents only for a period of time during which the power is immediately restored after an instantaneous power failure occurs. ), the peripheral control SRAM 4150d loses its contents, whereas the peripheral control SRAM 4150d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) provided on the power supply board 851 (hereinafter referred to as "SRAM electrolytic capacitor"). As a result, the stored contents can be held for about 50 hours. By providing an SRAM electrolytic capacitor on the power supply board 851, when the game board 4 is removed from the pachinko game machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. can no longer hold and lose its contents.

The peripheral control external WDT 4150e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is running out of control. When this timer expires, it is reset by hardware. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset when it does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period (until the timer expires). When the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs the clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a fixed period, the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e can be restarted, so the reset is not applied.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a incorporates a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and when various commands from the main control board 4100 are received, based on these various commands, each decoration board The game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to multiple LEDs etc. The game board side motor drive data for transmitting to the drive board 4170 and for outputting drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 are sent to the motor drive board serial Door-side motor drive for transmitting from the I/O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, or for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5 Data is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Peripheral control output of door-side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to the plurality of LEDs etc. provided on each decoration board of 5 from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration driving amplifier board LED It is transmitted to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 via the circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 .

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4150a exchanges various signals with the game information display device DCNT arranged above the pachinko game machine 1 via the game information display device parallel I/O port. This game information display device DCNT has a data display part DCNTa for displaying game-related information, and a plurality of lamps (decorative lamps) provided on both sides of the data display part DCNTa. A call button DCNTb is arranged for calling a staff such as a hall clerk, and an operation button DCNTc is arranged below the decoration lamp on the right side for switching game-related information displayed on the data display section DCNTa. Information related to the game includes, for example, the number of times the player has left the seat (the game information display device DCNT displays the number of It also has a function to measure time). Information about these games is transmitted to the management terminal of the hall via the pachinko island facility.

Various commands from the main control board 4100 are input to the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Further, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation section 401 and a pressure detection switch for detecting the operation of the pressure operation section 405 provided in the operation unit 400. The detection signal is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, the frame It is input to the operation unit detection serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via the peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral control input circuit.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photosensors, etc.) for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 are sent to the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180 . Serialized by the serial transmission circuit, this serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit through the peripheral control input circuit to the serial I/O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. there is The peripheral control MPU 4150a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 4140 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input/output of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"). It is diagnosed whether or not

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 15, the peripheral control MPU 4150a includes a peripheral control CPU core 4150aa, a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 4150ac, a peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and various peripheral control serial I/O controllers. /O port 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 4150ag, peripheral control analog/digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A/D converter) 4150ak, and the like.

The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads and writes various data from/to the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac via the internal bus 4150ah. Various data are read from and written to the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 4150ag and the peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 4150b via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h. Various data are read and written via an internal bus 4150ah, a peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and an external bus 4150h.

The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, a peripheral control ROM 4150b, a peripheral control RAM 4150c, and a peripheral control SRAM 4150d. /O port 4150ag, peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak, and other input/output devices, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. to DMA3.

Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes a storage device of a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab built into the peripheral control MPU 4150a, a peripheral control various serial I/O port 4150ae built into the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and a peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af. , peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 4150ag, peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak, and other input/output devices, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa, to transfer data independently. In addition, while reading and writing the storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab via the internal bus 4150ah, peripheral control various serial I/O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 4150ag, and It reads and writes from/to an input/output device such as a peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak via a peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and a peripheral bus 4150ai.

The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control ROM 4150b, a peripheral control RAM 4150c, and a peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and various peripheral control serial I/O devices built into the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Between input/output devices such as O port 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 4150ag, and peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa, In order to perform data transfer independently, the peripheral control ROM 4150b, the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d are read and written via the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and the external bus 4150h. I/O devices such as serial I/O port 4150ae, WDT 4150af with built-in peripheral control, parallel I/O port 4150ag for peripheral control, and peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak are connected via peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and peripheral bus 4150ai. read and write.

The peripheral control bus controller 4150ad controls the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral bus 4150ai, and the external bus 4150h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa, the peripheral control internal RAM 4150ab, the peripheral control ROM 4150b, the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Storage devices such as SRAM 4150d, input/output devices such as peripheral control serial I/O port 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control parallel I/O port 4150ag, and peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

Peripheral control various serial I/O ports 4150ae are serial I/O port for lamp drive board, serial I/O port for motor drive board, serial I/O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, frame decoration drive amplifier board LED , a serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, a serial I/O port for the main control board, and a serial I/O port for acquiring operation unit information.

A peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 4150af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is running out of control. It has become. In other words, when the watchdog timer is started, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer to the WDT 4150af with built-in peripheral control within a certain period of time (until the timer expires). will be required. When the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the WDT 4150af with built-in peripheral control within a certain period, it can restart the timer count, so the reset is not applied.

The peripheral control parallel I/O port 4150ag outputs various latch signals such as the game board side motor drive latch signal and the door side motor drive light emission latch signal. Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the board 4 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. output a movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the serial I/O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and the upper decoration on the door frame 5 It outputs a lighting signal for an LED mounted on the upper decoration board of the unit 280 . This LED is a high-intensity white LED, and serves as a decision notice lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the big win game state has been decided. In this embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control parallel I/O port 4150ag are directly connected electrically, the path between the LED and the peripheral control parallel I/O port 4150ag can be shortened. Therefore, noise countermeasures can be taken for the lighting control of the LED, which has a significant meaning in the game. The lighting control of the LED is executed in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing described later, and the other LEDs except for this LED are executed in the peripheral control unit regular processing described later. It has become.

Peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak is electrically connected to volume control volume 4140a, and its resistance value is varied by rotating the knob of volume control volume 4140a. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value and converted to a value of 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, the values of 1024 steps are divided into 7 and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum sound volume. The speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the body frame 3 and the door frame 5 by controlling the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (VDP 4160a with built-in sound source to be described later) so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6 Music and sound effects are played from the speaker 130 provided. In this way, music and sound effects are played from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided on the body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob. .

In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying pachinko game machine 1 clerk or the like of the occurrence of malfunctions of the pachinko game machine 1 or fraudulent acts on the pachinko game machine 1, content related to game performance, etc. (For example, the screen unfolding on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is produced as a more powerful one, or the player is notified that there is a high possibility of shifting to an advantageous game state, etc.). ) also flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5, but the volume of the notification sound and the notification sound is adjusted based on the turning operation of the knob. It is a mechanism that flows without depending on the , and the volume from mute to maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (VDP 4160a with built-in sound source described later) by program. . The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from mute to maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into 7 steps described above. As a result, for example, even if a hall clerk or the like turns the knob portion of the volume control volume 4140a to set the volume to a low level, the speaker and the door accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the body frame 3 can be adjusted. Although the production sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 130 provided in the frame 5 is reduced, the volume is increased when there is a problem with the pachinko game machine 1 or when the player is cheating. In the form, a notification sound set to the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk from noticing the occurrence of a problem or the player's fraudulent behavior due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to the music and sound effects, the screen displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 can be made more powerful by increasing the volume of the sound, or the game state can shift to an advantageous game state for the player. You can also notify them of high prices.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 4150b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the portable terminal 470, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, music, sound effects, and the like. , and electric drive source schedule data for generating the drive mode of an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the structure of the screen in time series, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the portable terminal 470 . The schedule data for generating the light emission mode is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects are played. This sound command data includes an output channel number for indicating which output channel is to be used among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, which will be described later, and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. and a track number for indicating in which track sound data such as music and sound effects are to be incorporated among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines operations of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Some of the various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b are directly read out from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and executed. Some are read and executed. Various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b are also read directly from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and are stored in various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, which will be described later. In some cases, what is copied in is read out.

In addition, in the peripheral control ROM 4150b, as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165, a program for correcting the brightness of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the usage time of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is stored. A brightness correction program is included. This luminance correction program corrects the decrease in luminance due to aging of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is of the LED type. , the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on, the current date and time, brightness setting information, etc. are acquired from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165, which will be described later, and the acquired brightness setting information is used based on the correction information. to correct. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b. As will be described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, and the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 that has been set. Therefore, if six months have already passed since the first power-on of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the luminance When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on, the brightness of 80% obtained by adding 5%, which is the acquired correction information, to this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the backlight is turned on. If December has already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, and the liquid crystal display device on the game board side is displayed. When lighting the backlight of 1900, the game board is based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 85%, which is obtained by adding 10%, which is the acquired correction information, to this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted and turned on.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 15, the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a is a backup that exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A managed work area 4150ca, a backup first area 4150cb and a backup second area 4150cc for exclusive storage of copies of various information stored in this backup managed work area 4150ca, and a peripheral control ROM 4150b. Various control program copy area 4150cd for exclusively storing copies of various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and copies of various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b. Various control data copy areas 4150ce for dedicated storage, a backup unmanaged work area 4150cf for dedicated storage of various types of information updated by execution of various control programs that are not backed up, is provided.

When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure), a value of 0 is forcibly written into the backup unmanaged work area 4150cf to clear it to zero. For the backup management target work area 4150ca, the first backup area 4150cb, and the second backup area 4150cc, when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, a power-on command (see FIG. 34) from the main control board 4100 starts the RAM clear effect. and to instruct the start of each state effect (for example, to instruct the start of the effect when the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 11 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on). ) is cleared to zero.

The backup management target work area 4150ca is performance information (which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit regular processing executed each time a V blank signal is input from the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, which will be described later). 1fr) for exclusive use as a backup target, and effect information (1ms), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing executed each time a 1ms timer interrupt described later occurs. and Bank0 (1ms) which is exclusively stored as a backup target. Here, to briefly explain the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), "Bank" is the minimum management unit representing the size of the storage area for storing various information. The following "0" means a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. In other words, "Bank0" means that the size of the normally used storage area is the minimum management unit. "Bank 1", "Bank 2", "Bank 3", and "Bank 4" provided in an area extending from a backup first area 4150cb to a backup second area 4150 cc, which will be described later, are of the same storage area as "Bank 0". It means that it has a size. “(1fr)” means that the VDP 4160a with built-in tone generator outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and the portable terminal 470 via the communication control unit 4162. , a V blank signal is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a to notify that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be accepted. Then, since the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed for each frame (1 frame), "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" are added (effect information (1fr) and effect backup information (1fr), which will be described later, are also used in the same sense.) "(1ms)" means that the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, as described later. Since it is executed, "Bank 0", "Bank 1", "Bank 2", "Bank 3", and "Bank 4" are respectively appended (effect information (1 ms) and effect backup information (1 ms), which will be described later, used interchangeably).

Bank 0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, a reception command storage area 4150cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, and a schedule data storage area 4150cae. etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 4. is set, and in the transmission data storage area 4150cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED, lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting to the plurality of LEDs, etc. provided on each decoration board of the door frame 5 are stored. This is a storage area in which the door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting the signal is set. In the received command storage area 4150cac, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 are received and the received various commands are stored. The RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad stores the RTC control unit 4165 (of RTC 41654a, which will be described later). The schedule data storage area 4150cae is a storage area in which various information acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa) is set. This is a storage area in which various schedule data are set. In the schedule data storage area 4150cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 4150b to the various control data copy area 4150ce are read and set, and various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b. Some are set Bank0 (1fr) is also provided with a mobile terminal transmission command storage area and a game information display device output data storage area (not shown). In the mobile terminal transmission command storage area, in addition to various commands for starting applications pre-installed in the mobile terminal 470 and displaying various screens, various information from the game information display device DCNT shown in FIG. The output data storage area for the game information display device is a storage area in which various data for outputting various signals to the game information display device DCNT is set. .

Bank 0 (1 ms) is provided with frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah, operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai, and the like. It is Door-side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5 is stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. This is a storage area to be set, and in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, for outputting drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 This is a storage area in which the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set. This is a storage area in which various types of information obtained by acquiring the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies are set. Various information (for example, the dial operation unit 401 created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400) obtained by acquiring the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 (rotation direction) history information, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) is set. Bank0 (1 ms) also includes a game information display device information acquisition storage area (not shown). This game information display device information acquisition storage area is a storage area in which various information of the game information display device DCNT is set based on various signals from the game information display device DCNT.

The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa in Bank 0 (1fr), the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf in Bank 0 (1ms). and the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag are each divided into two areas, a first area and a second area.

In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa when the peripheral controller steady-state processing described later is executed. , When the next peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, and the peripheral control unit steady-state Each time the process is executed, the game board side emission data SL-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when game board side emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa in the current peripheral control unit steady process, the previous peripheral When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 4150caa.

In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, when the peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL is stored in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. -When DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration driving amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. Each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door-side light emission data STL-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame-decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. be. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab in this peripheral control unit steady process, When the previous peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration driving amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. It's becoming

In the frame-decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, when the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later is executed, the door is added to the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. -DAT is set, and every time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side is stored in the first area and the second area of the transmission data storage area 4150caf for the frame decoration driving amplifier board side motor. Motor drive data STM-DAT are alternately set. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. When set, the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing was executed. Based on this, the process proceeds.

In the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag when the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. Then, when the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag in this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. Occasionally, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. It's like

Next, a backup first area 4150cb and a backup second area 4150cc dedicated to storing copies of performance information, which are various types of information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca, will be described. In the first backup area 4150cb and the second backup area 4150cc, two pairs of two banks are managed as one page. Effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as effect backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Effect information (1 ms), which is copied to the first backup area 4150cb and the second backup area 4150cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is the normally used storage area. , as effect backup information (1 ms), is sent to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac each time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. Copied quickly. Consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks that constitute the page match.

Specifically, in the backup first area 4150cb, Bank1 (1 fr) and Bank2 (1 fr) are set as one pair, and Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) are set as one pair, and a total of two pairs are managed as one page. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are transferred to Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) each time peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed for each frame (1frame). Memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is changed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. This page is copied to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. This is done depending on whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) match.

In the second backup area 4150cc, one pair of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) and one pair of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) are managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are transferred to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) each time peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed for each frame (1frame). Memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is changed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. It is copied to Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and consistency of this page is performed by checking whether the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. This is done depending on whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) match.

Thus, in this embodiment, in the first backup area 4150cb, one pair is Bank1 (1 fr) and Bank2 (1 fr), and one pair is Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms). This is an area for managing pages, and the backup second area 4150cc has a total of 2 pairs, with Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) as one pair, and Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) as one pair. This is an area for managing as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the first backup area 4150cb and the second backup area 4150cc.

Further, in the present embodiment, the performance information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored as performance backup information (1fr) by the peripheral control unit every 1 frame. Each time a routine process is executed, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies at high speed to the first backup area 4150cb and the second backup area 4150cc, and the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is the normally used storage area. is backup first area 4150cb and backup second area 4150cc each time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and a peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed as backup backup information (1ms). The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac executes high-speed copying by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac in common. That is, in this embodiment, the performance information (1fr) and the performance information (1ms) are managed by a common management method (common program execution).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
A peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a includes a backup management target work area 4150da for exclusively storing information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs; A backup first area 4150db and a backup second area 4150dc are provided for exclusively storing copies of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da. It should be noted that the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d are such that when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (including when the power is restored due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure), the power-on command (see FIG. 34) from the main control board 4100 is It instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, when the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 11 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on) ), it is not cleared to zero. This point is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 4150ca, backup first area 4150cb, and backup second area 4150cc of the peripheral control RAM 4150c are cleared to zero. Further, when the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined period of time after turning on the power of the pachinko game machine 1, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. It is designed to be By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d (for example, the history of occurrence of the jackpot game state, etc.) ) can be cleared, but the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 4150c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. This point is also completely different between the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d.

The backup management target work area 4150da includes performance information (SRAM), which is various information that continues over the course of the day (for example, information for managing the history of the occurrence of a jackpot game state, and for managing a special performance flag). information, etc.) to be backed up. Here, the name of Bank0 (SRAM) will be briefly explained. As described above, "Bank" is the minimum management unit representing the size of the storage area for storing various information. The following "0" means a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. In other words, "Bank0" means that the size of the normally used storage area is the minimum management unit. "Bank 1", "Bank 2", "Bank 3", and "Bank 4" provided in an area extending from a first backup area 4150db to a second backup area 4150dc, which will be described later, are of the same storage area as "Bank 0". It means that it has a size. "(SRAM)" is backed up with various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a. , and “Bank 4” (effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM) described later are also used in the same sense).

Next, a backup first area 4150db and a backup second area 4150dc dedicated to storing a copy of performance information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da, will be described. The first backup area 4150db and the second backup area 4150dc are managed as one page, with two banks forming one pair. Effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored as effect backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Then, it is copied at high speed to the first backup area 4150db and the second backup area 4150dc by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. Consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks that constitute the page match.

Specifically, in the first backup area 4150db, a pair of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are transferred to Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) by peripheral control DMA each time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame. This page is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

In the backup second area 4150dc, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are paired, and this pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are transferred to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) by peripheral control DMA each time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame. This page is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

As described above, in this embodiment, the first backup area 4150db is an area for managing a pair of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one page. 4150dc is an area for managing a pair of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the first backup area 4150db and the second backup area 4150dc.

[7-4-2. Liquid crystal and sound control part]
Drawing control of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the mobile terminal 470, and sound control of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5 are controlled. As shown in FIG. 14, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 has a built-in sound source (hereinafter referred to as "internal sound source") for controlling sounds such as music and sound effects, and the liquid crystal on the game board side. A VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 4160a with built-in sound source that controls drawing of the display device 1900 and the mobile terminal 470; A liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b that stores various sound data such as sound effects, and an audio data transmission IC 4160c that transmits serialized music, sound effects, etc. as audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. there is

The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to commands from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. 4150cae is set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the top screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the peripheral control RAM 4150c. After extracting from the control data copy area 4150ce and outputting to the VDP 4160a with built-in tone generator, when a V blank signal to be described later is input as a trigger, the first screen data is extracted according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae. The following screen data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy area 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and is output to the tone generator built-in VDP 4160a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 4150a, in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, stores the screen data arranged in time series in the screen generation schedule data each time the V blank signal is input. Then, the screen data is output one by one from the first screen data to the VDP 4160a with built-in tone generator.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4150a copies the head sound command data of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy area 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. 4150cae is extracted and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is transferred to the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the peripheral control RAM 4150b. After extracting from the various control data copy area 4150ce of the control RAM 4150c and outputting it to the VDP 4160a with built-in tone generator, when the V blank signal is input, the leading data is extracted according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae. Next sound command data following the sound command data is extracted from peripheral control ROM 4150b of peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy area 4150ce of peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to VDP 4160a with built-in tone generator. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, and receives the V blank signal. Each time, the sound command data is output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a one by one from the top sound command data.

[7-4-2a. Sound source built-in VDP]
When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a in addition to the built-in tone generator described above, the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source 4160b, based on the input screen data, outputs the game board from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b as shown in FIG. A VRAM for extracting the side character data and the top plate side character data, creating sprite data, and generating drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the portable terminal 470. is also incorporated (hereinafter referred to as "internal VRAM"). The VDP 4160a with built-in sound source outputs the image data for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 among the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM, and outputs the image data for the mobile terminal 470 to the channel CH1. Synchronization between the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the mobile terminal 470 is achieved by outputting from CH2 to the mobile terminal 470 via the communication control unit 4162 . In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs screen data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the mobile terminal 470 to the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source 4160a, the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source receives the input data. Character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on screen data, sprite data is created, and drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and the portable terminal 470 is built in. Image data for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 out of the generated drawing data is output from channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and image data for the portable terminal 470 is communicated from channel CH2. Output to the mobile terminal 470 via the control unit 4162 . In other words, "screen data for one screen (one frame)" means that drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and the portable terminal 470 is generated on the built-in VRAM. It is data for

In addition, the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and transmits image data for the portable terminal 470 from channel CH2 to the communication control unit 4162. When outputting to the portable terminal 470 via the peripheral control MPU 4150a, a V blank signal is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a to notify that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be accepted. In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the mobile terminal 470 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, the interval at which the V blank signal is output is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 4150a executes peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, in response to the input of this V blank signal. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the portable terminal 470 . In addition, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may vary slightly in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 4140 on which the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the tone generator built-in VDP 4160a are mounted.

Note that the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source adopts a frame buffer system. This "frame buffer system" is a system in which drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and the portable terminal 470 is held in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM). In this method, drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in (built-in VRAM) is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and to the portable terminal 470 via the communication control section 4162 .

In addition, when the above-described sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a based on the command from the main control board 4100, the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source displays the music stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b as shown in FIG. By extracting sound data such as sound and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and used according to the output channel number. The output channel is set, and the music, sound effects, and the like flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. .

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, the sound data and the volume of the notification sound for notifying the hall clerk of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko game machine 1 or the fraudulent act on the pachinko game machine 1 A subvolume value is incorporated that adjusts the . Specifically, for the effect sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume is adjusted. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 4140a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by operating the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the operation unit 400 and shifting to a later-described setting mode.

The sound specification data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the channel to be output. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is Actually, the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 are amplified to a master volume value, which is the sound volume, and the amplified production sound is serialized as audio data. It is designed to output to the audio data transmission IC 4160c.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 is amplified to the master volume value. The volume of the sound emitted from the speaker housed in the door frame 5 and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5 is set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the sound effect, among the multiple tracks, the sound data of the sound effect incorporated in the track to be used and the sub volume value for adjusting the volume of the sound effect incorporated in the track to be used The board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the set volume adjustment volume 4140a is synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is actually output to the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3. Amplifies to the master volume value that is the volume of sound flowing from the housed speaker and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5, serializes this amplified effect sound, outputs it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c, and outputs it to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. is based on the sound data of the informative sound incorporated in the track to be used and the turning operation of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the informative sound incorporated in the track to be used. The maximum volume is synthesized without depending on the volume adjustment at all, and the volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually used as the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5. 130, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c.

Here, when the performance sound is flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, a problem occurs in the pachinko game machine 1 and the pachinko game machine 1 To briefly explain the control of playing the notification sound in order to notify the hall clerk of the fraudulent act, first, the sub-volume value of the track in which the sound effect is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and the sound effect is incorporated. The sound data of the track that was recorded, the sub-volume value set to mute, the sound data of the track in which the informational sound was incorporated, and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the informational sound was set to the maximum volume are synthesized, and this The volume of the synthesized effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are amplified to a master volume value which is the volume actually flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5. Then, the amplified effect sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c.

In other words, the sound actually emitted from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5 is only the notification sound with the maximum volume. At this time, since the production sound is muted, the production sound does not flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, but the production sound is used for the above-described sound generation. Progressing according to schedule data. In this embodiment, the notification sound flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). After the period has elapsed, the volume of the effect sound progressing according to the sound generation schedule data that has been forcibly set to mute until now is reduced to the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a. The volume value is set again (at this time, if the adjustment is made by shifting to the setting mode by operating the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the operation unit 400, the adjusted effect sound sub The sound is set to a volume value), and flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5 .

In this way, when the performance sound is flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, the pachinko game machine 1 malfunctions and the pachinko game machine 1 When a notification sound is played to notify the hall clerk of the fraudulent act against the hall, the volume of the effect sound is muted and the notification sound is output to the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5. Although it flows from the speaker 130, the muted effect sound progresses according to the schedule data for sound generation. And when the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5 stops flowing, the effect sound does not start playing again from the point where the information sound started to flow, but continues according to the sound generation schedule data until a predetermined period has passed since the information sound started to flow. It starts to flow again from where it progressed.

[7-4-2b. Liquid crystal and sound control ROM]
The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b stores, as shown in FIG. Character data are stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, effect sound, notification sound, notification sound, etc. are also stored in advance.

[7-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
Audio data transmission IC 4160c receives serialized audio data from VDP 4160a with a built-in tone generator, and transmits the right audio data to frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data with positive and negative signals. At the same time, the left audio data is transmitted to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 as differential serial data in which the left audio data is a plus signal and a minus signal. As a result, music, sound effects, and the like are reproduced in stereo from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5 .

The audio data transmission IC 4160c outputs audio data as differential serial data between the boards extending from the peripheral control board 4140 to the frame-decorating drive amplifier board 194, for example, the plus signal of the left audio data, Even if the negative signal is affected by noise, when the noise component on the positive signal and the noise component on the negative signal are synthesized by the frame-decorating drive amplifier board 194 to form one left-side audio data, Since noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[7-4-3. Communication control unit]
As shown in FIG. 14, the communication control unit 4162 for bi-directionally exchanging various information (various data, various commands) with the portable terminal 470 is mainly composed of a communication control circuit 4162a. This communication control circuit 4162a is controlled by a peripheral control MPU 4150a, as shown in FIG. The peripheral control MPU 4150a and the communication control circuit 4162a exchange control signals with each other so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a manages the operating state of the communication control circuit 4162a. When the player places the mobile terminal 470 received at the hall reception on the concave portion 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. 7, the mobile terminal 470 is placed on the concave portion 314d. This information is input as a control signal from the communication control circuit 4162a to the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 4150ag of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. The peripheral control MPU 4150a to which this control signal is input controls the communication control circuit 4162a by outputting the control signal from the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 4150ag to the communication control circuit 4162a. Communication initial setting for exchanging each information (various data, various commands) by radio in both directions. By this communication initial setting, the tone generator built-in VDP 4160a carries the image data for the portable terminal 470 out of the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM from the channel CH2 via the communication control circuit 4162a of the communication control unit 4162, as described above. When output to the terminal 470 , the image data from the channel CH2 is rendered in the display area of the mobile terminal 470 . In other words, in the display area of the portable terminal 470, image data generated by the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is drawn, so that various effects can be performed.

[7-4-4. RTC control section]
As shown in FIG. 14, the RTC control unit 4165, which holds calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second, is mainly composed of the RTC 4165a. The RTC 4165a incorporates a RAM 4165aa (hereinafter referred to as "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa") that holds calendar information and time information. The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is used in this embodiment) as a drive power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. In other words, the RTC 4165a is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko game machine 1) without being supplied with power at all from the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko game machine 1). As a result, even if power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and hold calendar information and time information by power supply from the battery 4165b.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets them in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described above, and stores the acquired calendar information and time information. Based on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the mobile terminal 470 can be developed. For example, if it is December 25th, a screen of a Christmas tree or reindeer will be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the mobile terminal 470, and if it is New Year's Eve, a screen of a New Year's countdown will be displayed. For example, it can be played out on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the portable terminal 470 . Calendar information and time information are set at the time of shipment from the factory.

In addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds LED brightness setting information when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is equipped with an LED type backlight. there is The peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the brightness of the backlight by PWM control when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is of the LED type. . The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, and brightness adjustment information for the currently set game. and the brightness of the LEDs that are the backlights of the board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the mobile terminal 470 .

In addition to the calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa also stores calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information as information on the date and hour, minute, and second first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date and time information is also stored.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a controls ON/OFF of the backlight or only turns it ON when the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and the portable terminal 470 is of the cold cathode tube type. ing.

Various types of information such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date and time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa are set on the production line of the game machine manufacturer. In order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 on the production line, the year when the input date and time information was input on the production line as the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on. It is set to the date and time of manufacture, which is the month, day, hour, minute, and second.

Thus, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa contains, in addition to calendar information and time information, brightness setting information and input date and time information when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is of an LED type. , the information that needs to be maintained independently of the model information of the pachinko game machine 1 (eg, the probability of occurrence of a jackpot game state with a low probability or a high probability) can be stored.

In addition, the luminance setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed. or too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the operation unit 400, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. When the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined period of time after turning on the power of the pachinko game machine 1, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. In addition, when the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the operation unit 400 are operated during the period in which the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is in the customer waiting state and the demonstration is being performed, the setting mode is performed. A screen is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 . By operating the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the calendar information and time information can be reset, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 can be adjusted to the desired level. You can adjust the brightness. The adjusted desired brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is overwritten (updated) as the brightness of the LEDs stored in the brightness setting information.

In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the above-described brightness correction program, so that if the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is equipped with an LED type backlight, the game board side liquid crystal This corrects the decrease in brightness due to aging of the display device 1900 . Peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires input date and time information from RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on, and receives calendar information and time specifying date and time. Acquire time information that specifies minutes and seconds to specify the current date and time, and adjust the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 in a range of 100% to 70% in increments of 5% Brightness setting information including brightness adjustment information for playing and the currently set brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, is acquired. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on the correction information pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b.

For example, based on the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on and the current date and time, if six months have already passed since the time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on, Acquire the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on, this 75% Adjust the brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness of 80% is obtained by adding 5%, which is the correction information acquired for If 12 months have passed since the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 4150b. When the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on, 85% is obtained by adding 10% which is the acquired correction information to this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the backlight is turned on.

The current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c in the current time information acquisition processing of step S1002 in the control unit power-on processing. and the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 to specify the current date and time.

[7-4-5. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume control volume 4140a adjusts the volume of music, sound effects, and the like flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5 by rotating the knob. By doing so, it can be adjusted. As described above, the volume control volume 4140a is adapted to vary its resistance value by rotating the knob portion thereof, and the electrically connected peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak is connected to the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into values in 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, as described above, the values of 1024 steps are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum sound volume. The liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (VDP 4160a with built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are provided. Music and sound effects are played from the speaker 130 .

In this way, music and sound effects are played from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided on the body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob. . Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying the hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a problem with the pachinko game machine 1 or a fraudulent act on the pachinko game machine 1, Notify the contents of the game effect (for example, make the screen displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 more powerful, or notify that there is a high possibility that the game state will shift to an advantageous game state for the player) etc.) also flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5. It is a mechanism that flows without depending on volume adjustment based on , and the volume from mute to maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (VDP 4160a with built-in sound source) by program. ing.

The volume adjusted by this program can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into 7 levels described above. As a result, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume control volume 4140a to set the volume to a low level, the speaker and the door accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the body frame 3 can be adjusted. Although the performance sounds such as music and sound effects that flow from the speaker 130 provided in the frame 5 are reduced, the volume is increased when there is a problem with the pachinko game machine 1 or when the player is cheating. In the form, a notification sound set to the maximum volume can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk from noticing the occurrence of a problem or the player's cheating due to the notification sound.

In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and the portable terminal 470 is made more powerful by increasing the volume of the sound, or the game state is shifted to an advantageous game state for the player. You can also notify them that there is a high possibility of doing so.

In this embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 4140a, the dial operation part 401 of the operation unit 400 and the pressing By operating the operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to a setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. When the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined period of time after turning on the power of the pachinko game machine 1, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. In addition, when the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the operation unit 400 are operated during the period in which the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is in the customer waiting state and the demonstration is being performed, the setting mode is performed. The screen is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 . By operating the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob of the volume control volume 4140a from an analog value to a digital value, and the converted value is By adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the operation unit 400, the value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased. . This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track in which sound data such as music, sound effects, etc. is incorporated among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 4160a. However, it is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the notification sound and notification sound described above.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of music or sound effects is adjusted by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the dial operation portion 401 or the pressing operation portion 405 of the operation unit 400 is adjusted. There are two methods of adjusting the volume of music or sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation. Since the volume control volume 4140 a is mounted on the peripheral control board 4140 , the body frame 3 must always be left open from the outer frame 2 . Then, the person who can turn the knob of the volume control volume 4140a is the store clerk in the hall. However, with the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, the player may find the music and sound effects to be too soft and difficult to hear, and the player may feel loud and the music and sound effects loud. Therefore, within a predetermined period of time after the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the operation unit 400 are operated, or the customer waits for a customer, and a demonstration by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is performed. If the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during this period, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. As a result, the player can adjust the volume of the music and sound effects to a desired volume. The dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be operated to increase the volume to a desired level. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405, the volume can be reduced to a desired volume.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a non-playing state for a predetermined period of time and becomes a customer waiting state, the demonstration by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times ), the volume adjusted by the player sitting in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 last time is cancelled, and the volume is initialized. In this volume initialization, the volume is set to the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob of the volume control volume 4140a. As a result, if the player who was sitting in front of the pachinko game machine 1 last time felt that the adjusted sound volume was too low to hear the music and sound effects, the player could sit in front of the pachinko game machine 1 this time. A player who sits down and plays a game can operate the dial operation part 401 and the pressing operation part 405 of the operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired volume, and the player can play a game while sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time. If the player who has been playing Pachinko feels that the adjusted volume is loud and the music and sound effects are loud, this time, the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game can press the dial operation section of the operation unit 400. 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired volume.

[8. power supply system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing the power supply system of the pachinko game machine, and FIG. 18 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. First, the power supply board will be described, and then the power supplied to each control board and the like will be described. The grounds (GND) of various substrates and the grounds (GND) of various terminal plates are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power substrate 851 and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power board]
The power supply board 851 is electrically connected to a power cord, and when the plug of this power cord is inserted into a power outlet of 24 volts AC (24V AC), which is the power supply voltage for the game machines of the pachinko island facility, the pachinko island facility operates. 24 volts AC (24 V AC), which is the power supply voltage for gaming machines from the fuse 851a, is applied to the power switch 852 shown in FIG. When the power switch 852 is operated, 24 volts AC (24 VAC) supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the power board 851 through the power switch 852, and the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on. can.

The power board 851 includes a power control section 855 and a firing control section 857, as shown in FIG. The power supply control unit 855 creates various DC voltages from the 24 volts AC (24 V AC) supplied from the pachinko island facilities, and generates 100 volts AC (100 V AC), which is higher than the 24 volts AC (24 V AC) power supply voltage for game machines. When the power supply voltage is supplied, the fuse 851a is electrically disconnected to disable the power supply board 851, or the main control board 4100 or the payout control board 4110. A section 857 is a circuit for driving and controlling the shooting solenoid 654 of the ball shooting device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball sending solenoid 585 of the ball sending unit 580 shown in FIG.

The power control unit 855 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 855a, a power factor improvement circuit 855b, a smoothing circuit 855c, a power generation circuit 855d, a power breakdown circuit 855e, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. 24V AC, which is the game machine power supply voltage supplied from the pachinko island facility, is supplied to the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 through the power supply board 851, and is also supplied to the synchronous rectification circuit 855a. This synchronous rectifier circuit 855a rectifies 24 volts AC (24V AC) supplied from the pachinko island facility and supplies it to the power factor correction circuit 855b via the power breaker circuit 855e.

This power supply destruction circuit 855e is mainly composed of field effect transistors (FET). A short mode state in which the current power supply voltage is short-circuited to the ground causes a large current to flow through the fuse 851a and the fuse 851a is electrically disconnected, making the power supply board 851 unusable.

This power factor correction circuit 855b improves the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectification circuit 855a to generate DC +37V (DC+37V, hereinafter referred to as "+37V") and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 855c. ing. This smoothing circuit 855c removes the supplied +37V ripple, smoothes the +37V, and supplies it to the firing control circuit 857a and the power generating circuit 855d of the firing control section 857, respectively. In addition, the plug of the power cord is not inserted into the power outlet of 24 volts AC (24 VAC), which is the power supply voltage for the game machines of the pachinko island facility, and the commercial power supply voltage is higher than 24 volts AC (24 VAC), which is the power supply voltage for the game machines. If it is accidentally plugged into a 100 volt AC (100V AC) power outlet, it will create a power supply voltage higher than +37V and supply it to the smoothing circuit 855c.

Capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in main control MPU4100a of main control board 4100, capacitor BC1 is built into payout control MPU4120a of payout control section 4120 in payout control board 4110 It supplies backup power to the RAM (withdrawal control built-in RAM).

The launch control circuit 857a of the launch control unit 857 uses the +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 855c as a driving power source, and shoots the game ball with a launch strength (launch strength) that matches the rotational position of the rotary handle main body front 506 shown in FIG. While adjusting the drive current for hitting (shooting) toward the game area 1100 shown in FIG. As a result, the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. control.

Specifically, the firing control circuit 857a is electrically connected to the positive terminal of an electrolytic capacitor 857b whose negative terminal is grounded (GND), and the DC/DC converter 857aa shown in FIG. DC power supply for solenoid driving (+35V) is generated by stepping down the +37V supplied from the power generation circuit 855d, and the DC power supply for solenoid driving (+35V) is applied to the electrolytic capacitor 857b to charge the electrolytic capacitor 857b. It is designed to be The combined current of the current from the DC/DC converter 857aa and the current resulting from the discharge of the electric charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor 857b flows through the firing solenoid drive circuit 857ab shown in FIG. 12 of the firing control circuit 857a. It's becoming That is, the electrolytic capacitor 857b has a function as an auxiliary power supply. The firing solenoid drive circuit 857ab receives an operation signal from a potentiometer 512 that electrically adjusts the intensity (firing intensity) at which the game ball is shot toward the game area 1100 according to the rotational position of the rotary handle main body front 506 shown in FIG. The driving current for launching (shooting) the game ball toward the game area 1100 based on is controlled to output to the shooting solenoid 654 by adjusting the combined current. On the other hand, the ball-feeding solenoid drive circuit 857ac shown in FIG. 12 of the firing control circuit 857a performs control to output a constant current to the ball-feeding solenoid 585 by +24V supplied from the power generation circuit 855d.

When a power failure warning signal from a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e provided in the main control board 4100 described later is input through the payout control board 4110, the waste hitting prevention circuit 857c discharges the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor 857b and fires. By preventing the drive current from flowing to the firing solenoid 654 by flowing through the solenoid drive circuit 857ab, it is possible to prevent the shooting of useless game balls when the power is cut off.

The power source generation circuit 855d supplies from the +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 855c to +5V DC (+5V DC, hereinafter referred to as "+5V"), +12V DC (+12V DC, hereinafter referred to as "+12V"), and DC +24V (DC+24V, hereinafter referred to as "+24V") is generated and supplied to the payout control board 4110 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, respectively. +5V, +12V, and +24V are also supplied to the firing control section 857 (not shown). A power system to which +5V is applied and supplied is a +5V power line, a power system to which +12V is applied and supplied is a +12V power line, and a power system to which +24V is applied and supplied is a +24V power line.

The power generation circuit 855d monitors the magnitude of the power supply voltage supplied from the smoothing circuit 855c. The power cord plug is not inserted into a power outlet of 24 volts AC (24V AC), which is the power supply voltage for the game machines of the pachinko island facility, and the commercial power supply voltage is higher than the 24 volts AC (24V AC), which is the power supply voltage for the game machines. If a 100 volt (100 VAC) power outlet is accidentally plugged in, a power supply voltage higher than +37 V is supplied from the smoothing circuit 855c to the power generation circuit 855d. When the magnitude of this power supply voltage reaches a predetermined value (threshold value: in this embodiment, it is set to about 50V), the power supply generation circuit 855d generates various voltages of +5V, +12V and +24V as described above. Before generating and outputting the power supply voltage, a circuit breakdown signal is output to the power supply breakdown circuit 855e. When this circuit breaking signal is input, the power breaking circuit 855e breaks its own circuit, as described above, and enters the short mode state in which the power supply voltage supplied from the pachinko island facility is short-circuited to the ground. The power supply voltage supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied in the order of a fuse 851a, a power switch 852, a synchronous rectification circuit 855a, a power breakdown circuit 855e, a power factor correction circuit 855b, a smoothing circuit 855c, and a power generation circuit 855d. Therefore, when the power supply breaking circuit 855e is short-circuited, a large current flows toward the fuse 851a, the power switch 852, the synchronous rectification circuit 855a, and the short-circuited power supply breaking circuit 855e. 851a is electrically disconnected. In other words, the power supply board 851 is such that the plug of the power cord is not inserted into a power outlet of 24 volts AC (24V AC), which is the power supply voltage for game machines of the pachinko island facility, and is higher than 24 volts AC (24V AC), which is the power supply voltage for game machines. Even if it is accidentally plugged into a power outlet of 100 volts AC (100 V AC), which is the commercial power voltage, the power supply breaker circuit 855e is destroyed to make it unusable. The circuit is configured to

The +5V generated by the power generation circuit 855d is supplied to the payout control board 4110 as described later. +5V supplied to the payout control board 4110 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU4120a through the payout control filter circuit 4110a, and is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM through the diode PD0. ing. The +12V generated by the power generation circuit 855d is supplied to the +5V generation circuit 4100g of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110. This +5V creation circuit 4100g creates +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a, from +12V from the payout control board 4110. The +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 4100g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a through the main control filter circuit 4100h and to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM through the diode MD0. ing.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 851 is grounded (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 4110, and the payout The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the control board 4110 is also electrically connected. That is, the +5V generated by the power generation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 flows toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM, which is forward due to the diode PD0, and the capacitor BC1. The positive terminal is designed to allow current to flow toward it. In this way, the capacitor BC1 is connected by an electrical connection method in which +5V generated by the power generation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 is returned to the payout control board 4110, and again from the payout control board 4110 to the power supply board 851. is supplied and can be charged. As a result, when the +5V generated by the power generation circuit 855d is no longer supplied to the payout control board 4110, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 4110 as payout VBB. Therefore, although the current does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a because it is blocked by the diode PD0, the payout control MPU 4120a does not operate. It has become so.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 851 is grounded (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110. , and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 on the main control board 4100 . In other words, the +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 4100g causes current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a. A current flows in the direction of Thus, the capacitor BC0 is supplied with +5V and charged by an electrical connection method in which +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 4100g is supplied to the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 to the power supply board 851. You can do it. As a result, the +12V created by the power supply creation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 is no longer supplied to the +5V creation circuit 4100g of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, and the +5V creation circuit 4100g can create +5V. When it is exhausted, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied as the main VBB to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110. Therefore, a diode is connected to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a. Although MD0 prevents the current from flowing and the main control MPU 4100a does not operate, the main VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM so that the memory contents are retained.

A transformer (not shown) installed in the pachinko island facility converts the commercial power supply voltage of 100 volts AC (100 V AC) to the power supply voltage for the game machine of 24 volts AC (24 V AC). Some of the ball lending machines installed adjacent to the pachinko game machine operate by being supplied with 24 VAC, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine, while others operate by being supplied with 100 VAC, which is the commercial power supply voltage. The pachinko island facilities are provided with power outlets for supplying the game machine power supply voltage and the commercial power supply voltage, respectively. For this reason, hall clerks and workers who install pachinko machines (replace game boards) must plug the power cords (wiring) that supply the power supply voltage to the pachinko machines with the AC 24V power supply voltage for the game machines. When the power switch of the pachinko game machine is turned on by mistakenly inserting it into the AC 100V power outlet, which is the commercial power supply voltage, instead of the power outlet, the AC 100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage, is AC 24V, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine. Because the fuse of the pachinko game machine is electrically disconnected and the game cannot be played, an abnormal voltage is instantaneously output from the power supply board, causing the main control board, payout control board, peripheral control board, Various substrates such as a lamp driving substrate and a motor driving substrate are supplied and damaged.

After replacing the fuse, inserting the plug of the power cord (wiring) into the AC 24V power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine, and turning on the power switch of the pachinko game machine, the power supply voltage is incorrect. In other words, when AC 100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage, is supplied to the pachinko game machine, damage is caused to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the board and game board of the pachinko game machine. Because it is in a given state, for example, the excitation current continues to flow through the motors and solenoids controlled by the peripheral control board and the motor drive board, causing heat to be generated, and parts around the motors and solenoids to deform or melt. A problem arises.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the plug of the power cord is not inserted into a power outlet of 24 volts AC (24 VAC), which is the power supply voltage for the game machines of the pachinko island facility, and the 24 volts AC (24 VAC), which is the power supply voltage for the game machines. If it is accidentally plugged into a power outlet of 100 volts AC (100 V AC), which is a high commercial power supply voltage, the power generation circuit 855d monitors the magnitude of the power supply voltage, and the power supply voltage to be supplied is a predetermined value. (threshold value: set to about 50 V in this embodiment), the power supply breakdown circuit 855e is activated before generating and outputting the various power supply voltages of +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V described above. It is designed to output a destruction signal. When this circuit destruction signal is input, the power supply destruction circuit 855e, as described above, destroys its own circuit and enters a short mode state in which the power supply voltage supplied from the pachinko island facility is short-circuited to the ground. As a result, a large current flows through the fuse 851a, the power switch 852, the synchronous rectification circuit 855a, and the short-circuited power supply breaker circuit 855e. , +5V, +12V and +24V are not output at all. In other words, the plug of the power cord is not inserted into the power outlet of 24 volts AC (24 VAC), which is the power supply voltage for the game machines of the pachinko island facility, and the commercial power supply voltage is higher than 24 volts AC (24 VAC), which is the power supply voltage for the game machines. If it is accidentally plugged into a 100 volt AC (100 V AC) power outlet, no abnormal power supply voltage is output.

In this way, the power supply board 851 does not allow the plug of the power cord to be inserted into a power outlet of 24 volts AC (24 VAC), which is the power supply voltage for game machines of the pachinko island facilities, and is capable of supplying 24 volts AC (24 VAC), which is the power supply voltage for game machines. ) Even if it is accidentally plugged into a power outlet of 100 volts AC (100 V AC), which is a higher commercial power supply voltage, it will not output an abnormal power supply voltage and damage its own circuit, the power supply breakdown circuit 855e. Since it can be destroyed and rendered unusable by the power supply board 851, there is absolutely no damage to the various boards other than the power supply board 851 and the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids that operate the various movable bodies provided on the game board 4. Absent. For this reason, the plug of the power cord is not inserted into the power outlet of 24 volts AC (24 VAC), which is the power supply voltage for the game machines of the pachinko island facility, and the commercial power supply voltage is higher than 24 volts AC (24 VAC), which is the power supply voltage for the game machines. Even if it is accidentally plugged into an AC 100 volt (AC 100 V) power outlet, the electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid that operates the various movable bodies provided on the various substrates of the pachinko game machine 1 and the game board 4 By preventing the damaged state, for example, it is possible to prevent the excitation current from continuing to flow in the motors and solenoids controlled by the peripheral control board 4140 and the motor drive board 4180, thereby preventing the motors and solenoids from being heated. It can also prevent surrounding parts from being deformed or melted. Therefore, when 100 volts AC (100 V AC), which is the commercial power supply voltage higher than 24 volts AC (24 V AC), which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machine, is supplied, it is possible to prevent an abnormal power supply voltage from being output from the power supply board 851. At the same time, the power board 851 can be disabled.

In addition, the plug of the power cord is not inserted into the power outlet of 24 volts AC (24 VAC), which is the power supply voltage for the game machines of the pachinko island facility, and the commercial power supply voltage is higher than 24 volts AC (24 VAC), which is the power supply voltage for the game machines. A power breaker circuit 855e of the power supply board 851 is specified as a part that will be damaged even if it is accidentally plugged into a certain 100 volt AC (100V AC) power outlet. In other words, the plug of the power cord is not inserted into the power outlet of the 24 volt AC (24 VAC) power supply voltage for the game machines of the pachinko island facility, and the commercial power supply voltage is higher than the 24 volt AC (24 VAC) power supply voltage for the game machines. 100 volts (AC 100 V) power outlet, it will cause an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid to operate various movable bodies provided on the various substrates of the pachinko game machine 1 and the game board 4. , etc., are all received by the power supply breaking circuit 855e of the power supply board 851. FIG.

In addition, the plug of the power cord is not inserted into the power outlet of 24 volts AC (24 VAC), which is the power supply voltage for the game machines of the pachinko island facility, and the commercial power supply voltage is higher than 24 volts AC (24 VAC), which is the power supply voltage for the game machines. In the state where the power supply destruction circuit 855e is destroyed by mistakenly inserting it into a power outlet of 100 volts AC (100V AC), the fuse 851a is replaced and the power cord plug is connected to the power supply voltage for the game machine of the pachinko island facility. Even if it is plugged into a 24 volt AC (24 VAC) power outlet, the power supply breaker circuit 855e is already broken and short-circuited. When a large current flows toward the short-circuited power supply breaking circuit 855e, a large current flows through the fuse 851a and the fuse 851a is electrically disconnected. In other words, unless the power supply board 851 whose power supply destruction circuit 855e has already been destroyed is replaced with a normal power supply board 851 whose power supply destruction circuit 855e is not destroyed, the plug of the power cord is connected to the power supply voltage for the game machine of the pachinko island facility. Even if it is plugged into a certain AC 24 volt (AC24V) power outlet, the game cannot be started.

In addition, the plug of the power cord (wiring) that supplies the power voltage to the pachinko game machine 1 is connected to the power voltage for the game machine by a hall clerk or an operator who installs the pachinko game machine 1 (replaces the game board 4). If the pachinko machine is turned on by mistakenly plugging it into a power outlet of 100V AC, which is the commercial power supply voltage, instead of the power outlet of 24V AC, the power supply destruction circuit 855e will be destroyed as a trace. Therefore, even if hall clerks, workers, etc. claim that "Even if the plug of the power cord is plugged into the power outlet, the power cannot be turned on, it may be an initial failure." Mistakes) can not be deceived (excuse).

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board, etc.]
Next, the outline about the voltage supplied to each control board etc. is demonstrated, Then, the voltage mainly supplied to the payout control board and the voltage supplied to the main control board are demonstrated.

The three types of voltages +5V, +12V, and +24V created by the power supply creation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 are supplied to the payout control board 4110, as shown in FIG. Two voltages of +24 V are supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110 . The three types of voltages +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V created by the power source creation circuit 855d of the power supply substrate 851 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, are supplied to the peripheral They are supplied to the control board 4140 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 respectively.

The three voltages of +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 are applied to the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit of the motor drive board 4180, as shown in FIG. 4180a, respectively. The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 outputs various signals such as a lighting signal, a blinking signal and a gradation lighting signal to various decoration boards of the game board 4, and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180 outputs the game A drive signal is output to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for the board 4 .

The peripheral control board 4140 includes a +3.3V generating circuit 4140b that generates DC 3.3V (DC+3.3V, hereinafter referred to as "+3.3V") from +5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. ing. The +3.3V generated by the +3.3V generating circuit 4140b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1900a of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side.

The +12 V supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 is supplied to the backlight power supply 1900b of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and to the charging circuit 460a of the portable terminal charging device 460. The charging circuit 460a changes the magnetic flux of the transmission coil by controlling the current flowing through the transmission coil (not shown), and the change in the magnetic flux from the transmission coil causes current to flow through the reception coil (not shown) of the mobile terminal 470. The mobile terminal 470 can be charged by flowing the water.

On the other hand, the three voltages of +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. 18(b). The frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 has a +9V generating circuit 194a that generates DC +9V (DC+9V, hereinafter referred to as "+9V") from +12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. +9V generated by the +9V generation circuit 194a and +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to various decorative substrates of the door frame 5 and the like.

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 17, the payout control board 4110 includes a payout control filter circuit 4110a and the like in addition to the payout control MPU 4120a and the like. This payout control filter circuit 4110a is supplied with +5V from the power supply board 851, and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 851 via the diode PD0, and is also supplied to the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120, for example. +12V from the power supply board 851 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120, and is supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 4110. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal plate 784 outputs a signal that conveys the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko game machine 1, game information of the pachinko game machine 1, etc. to the hall computer installed in the game hall (hall). It is a circuit that The hall computer monitors the game played by the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko game machine 1, game information of the pachinko game machine 1, etc., from signals output from the external communication circuit 784a. . In addition, +24 from the power supply board 851 is supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110 without being used in the payout control board 4110 at all.

[8-2-2. Voltage supplied to the main control board]
As shown in FIG. 17, the main control board 4100 includes a +5V generation circuit 4100g, a main control filter circuit 4100h, a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e, etc., in addition to the main control MPU 4100a. The +5V generation circuit 4100g is supplied with +12V from the power supply board 851 through the payout control board 4110, and generates +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a, from this +12V. In the main control board 4100, the +5V power line is a power supply system to which +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 4100g is applied and supplied. In this embodiment, the +5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 and the +5V power supply line created by the +5V creation circuit 4100g of the main control board 4100 are not electrically connected. Therefore, the +5V power supply line generated by the power generation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 4100, and the +5V power supply of the main control board 4100 The +5V power supply line created by the creating circuit 4100g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as boards other than the main control board 4100. FIG.

The main control filter circuit 4100h is supplied with +5V produced by the +5V production circuit 4100g, and removes noise from this +5V. This +5 V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 851 via the diode MD0, and is also supplied to the main control MPU 4100a, for example. +12V from the payout control board 4110, for example, is supplied to the main control input circuit 4100b, etc., +24V from the payout control board 4110, for example, is supplied to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d.

The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e is supplied with +12V and +24V from the power supply board 851 via the payout control board 4110, and monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of these +12V and +24V. When the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e detects a sign of a +12V or +24V power failure or momentary power failure, it outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 4100a as a power failure warning. The power failure warning signal is input to the payout control MPU 4120a through the main control board 4100 and the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control board 4110. In addition, the power outage warning signal is input to the waste hitting prevention circuit 857c of the firing control section 857 of the power supply board 851 via the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110. Also, the power outage warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 4140 via the main control board 4100 . 18B, the power failure warning signal is input to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control board 4140, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. At the same time, they are input to the decoration substrates of the door frame and the like via the frame decoration driving amplifier substrate 194, respectively.

In this embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e monitors the voltage applied to each of the +12V power line and the +24V power line, so that the voltage applied to either the +12V power line or the +24V power line is Signs of power failure such as power failure or momentary power failure can be detected more accurately than when monitoring the voltage applied to the power supply.

[9. Launch control circuit of power supply board]
Next, the firing control circuit 857a of the firing control section 857 in the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 22. FIG. First, the rotation range of the front rotary handle main body 506 of the handle device 500 shown in FIG. 7 will be described. The relationship between the rotation angle of the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 and the rotation angle of the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 will be described. 12 for rotating the ball hitting mallet 656 shown in FIG. The drive timing of the ball feed solenoid 585 shown in FIG. 12 for feeding the ball will be described, and the waste hitting prevention circuit 857c will be described. FIG. 19(a) is a diagram showing the rotation range of the rotation angle in front of the rotary handle body, and FIG. 19(b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the rotation angle of the detection shaft of the potentiometer and the rotation angle in front of the rotary handle body. 20(a) is a diagram showing an example of the output characteristics of the potentiometer, FIG. 20(b) is a table showing the set current to the firing solenoid, and FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a driving timing chart, and FIG. 22 is a circuit diagram showing a wasteful hitting prevention circuit.

[9-1. Rotation range in front of rotary handle body]
First, the rotation range of the front rotary handle body 506 of the handle device 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 19(a). The rotational position of the front rotary handle main body 506 is the original position (zero degree (0 °)). When the front rotary handle main body 506 is rotated clockwise from the original position (zero degree (0°)) and the rotary handle front main body 506 reaches a rotational position of 10 degrees (10°), the shot shown in FIG. When the stop switch 518 is in the firing stop switch release position where the single-shot button that activates the stop switch 518 can be operated, and further rotated clockwise to reach the rotational position of 100 degrees (100 degrees) of the rotary handle main body front 506, A right-handed state in which a game ball is shot toward the game area 1100 so as to flow down to the right of the center accessory 2300 arranged substantially in the center of the game area 1100 partitioned and formed on the game board 4 shown in FIG. When it reaches the set position where it can be hit to the right and is further rotated clockwise, the rotational position of the front rotary handle main body 506 reaches 120 degrees (120°), which is the maximum rotational position. At this maximum rotation position, the rotation handle main body front 506 cannot be rotated clockwise any more.

In this way, the range of the rotation angle θ of the front 506 of the rotating handle body extends from the original position (zero degree (0°)), which is the minimum rotation position, to 120° (120°), which is the maximum rotation position clockwise. It is in the range.

[9-2. Relationship between the rotation angle in front of the rotary handle body and the rotation angle of the detection shaft of the potentiometer]
Next, the relationship between the rotation angle θ of the front rotary handle main body 506 and the rotation angle φ of the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 for detecting the rotation angle θ of the front rotary handle main body 506 will be described with reference to FIG. 19(b). to explain. As described above, the front rotary handle body 506 can be rotated clockwise from the original position (zero degrees (0°)), which is the minimum rotation position, to 120 degrees (120°), which is the maximum rotation position. can. The detection shaft of the potentiometer 512 rotates by transmitting the rotation of the rotary handle main body front 506 via the gear mechanism 519 . This gear mechanism 519 magnifies the rotation of the rotary handle main body front 506 by 1.5 times to rotate the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 . The potentiometer 512 can be rotated from 300 degrees (300 degrees) to zero degrees (0 degrees). It rotates from 300 degrees (300 degrees) toward zero degrees (0 degrees).

Thus, the range of the rotation angle φ of the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 is from 300 degrees (300 degrees) to 0 degrees (0 degrees).

When the rotary handle main body front 506 rotates 1 degree (1°), this rotation is transmitted to the detection shaft of the potentiometer 512 via the gear mechanism 519 that magnifies this rotation by 1.5 times, and the detection shaft of the potentiometer 512 rotates 1.5 times. It is designed to rotate 5 degrees (1.5 degrees). When the rotary handle main body front 506 is rotated clockwise from the original position (zero degrees (0°)), which is the minimum rotation position, to 120 degrees (120°), which is the maximum rotation position, the potentiometer 512 is turned. The resistance value, which is the output, decreases linearly. That is, when the rotary handle main body front 506 is rotated clockwise from the original position (zero degrees (0°)), which is the minimum rotation position, to 120 degrees (120°), which is the maximum rotation position, the potentiometer The rotation angle of the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 is rotated from 300 degrees (300 degrees) toward zero degrees (0 degrees) through the gear mechanism 519, and the resistance value, which is the output of the potentiometer 512, is changed to It becomes smaller linearly. Thus, in this embodiment, as the potentiometer 512, a so-called "B-curve" variable resistor is employed in which the resistance value, which is the output of the potentiometer 512, changes linearly as the detection shaft rotates.

Since the detection shaft of the potentiometer 512 has a play of about 10 degrees (10°) at maximum, in order to absorb this play, the rotational position of the rotary handle main body front 506 is set to zero degrees (0°), which is the original position. ), the rotational position of the detection shaft of the potentiometer 512 is adjusted in advance to be 290 degrees (290 degrees) obtained by subtracting 10 degrees (10 degrees) from 300 degrees (300 degrees). there is When the front rotating handle body 506 is rotated and the rotating position of the front rotating handle body 506 reaches the maximum rotating position of 120 degrees (120 degrees) clockwise from the original position of zero degrees (0 degrees), the potentiometer The rotation position of the detection shaft portion 512 is 290 degrees (290° ) to 110 degrees (110 degrees) (=290 degrees (290 degrees) - 120 degrees (120 degrees) x 1.5 times), which is the effective rotation angle at which the detection shaft of the potentiometer 512 can actually rotate. The range is from 290 degrees (290°) to 110 degrees (110°).

[9-3. Relationship between the rotation angle of the detection shaft of the potentiometer and the output of the potentiometer]
Next, the relationship between the rotation angle φ of the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 and the output of the potentiometer 512 will be described with reference to FIG. 20(a). The potentiometer 512 is a variable resistor whose resistance value can be varied from 0 (zero) to 10 kΩ (kΩ), and the rotation of the detection shaft of the potentiometer 512 causes the output resistance value to change linearly. It is. As shown in FIG. 20(a), the output of the potentiometer 512 is set to 10 kΩ which is 100% when the rotation angle φ of the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 is 290 degrees (290°). When the rotation angle φ of the detection shaft is 10 degrees (10°), it is set to zero Ω (0Ω), which is 0% (0%).

In this embodiment, the output of the potentiometer 512 is set to 100% in the range of the rotation angle φ of the detection shaft of the potentiometer 512 from 300 degrees (300 degrees) to 290 degrees (290 degrees). The output of the potentiometer 512 is set to zero percent (0%) in a region where the rotation angle φ of the detection shaft extends from ten degrees (10°) to zero degrees (0°).

[9-4. Setting current to the firing solenoid according to the rotation angle of the front 506 of the rotary handle body]
Next, the setting current to the firing solenoid 654 shown in FIG. 12 that rotationally drives the ball hitting mallet 656 shown in FIG. 20(b). As shown in FIG. 20(b), the set current to the firing solenoid 654 is set at the detection shaft of the potentiometer 512 when the rotation angle θ of the rotary handle front 506 is at the original position of zero degrees (0°). When the rotation angle φ becomes 290 degrees (290°) and the output of the potentiometer 512 becomes 100% (10 kΩ), the current is adjusted to 0.93 A, and the rotation angle θ of the front 506 of the rotary handle body releases the firing stop switch. When the position is 10 degrees (10°), the rotation angle φ of the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 becomes 275 degrees (275°) and the output of the potentiometer 512 becomes 94.6% (9.46 kΩ). is adjusted to a current of 1.04 A, and when the rotation angle θ of the rotary handle main body front 506 is 100 degrees (100°), which is the right-handed setting position, the rotation angle φ of the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 is 125 degrees ( 125°) and the output of the potentiometer 512 becomes 41.1% (4.11 kΩ), the current is adjusted to 2.10 A, and the rotation angle θ of the rotary handle front 506 is 120°, which is the maximum rotation position. (120°), the rotation angle φ of the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 is 110° (110°), and the output of the potentiometer 512 becomes 35.7% (3.57 kΩ). It is regulated for current.

When the rotary handle main body front 506 is rotated, a game ball is shot from the ball shooting device 650 with a shooting intensity corresponding to (matching) the rotation angle of the rotary handle main body front 506, and the outer rail 1111 shown in FIG. It is guided toward the game area 1100 by the inner rail 1112 .

When the rotation angle θ of the front rotary handle main body 506 is zero degrees (0°), which is the original position, the rotation angle φ of the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 becomes 290 degrees (290°) as described above. When the output of 512 becomes 100% (10 kΩ), the current is adjusted to 0.93 A. At this time, the moment the player grabs the front of the rotating handle main body 506, a current of 0.93 A flows to the firing solenoid 654. The game ball cannot actually be launched along the line.

The player grasps the front rotary handle 506 and rotates it clockwise from the original position of zero degrees (0°), and the rotation angle θ of the front rotary handle 506 is 10 degrees (the release position of the firing stop switch). 10°), the rotation angle φ of the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 becomes 275° (275°) as described above, and the output of the potentiometer 512 becomes 94.6% (9.46 kΩ). is adjusted to a current of 1.04 A. At this time, a current of 1.04 A flows to the firing solenoid 654. With this firing intensity, the game ball shot along the firing rail 660 of the batted ball firing device 650 is positioned between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the firing rail 660. Even if it is driven into between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the reverse flow of the tip of the inner rail 1112 It is not possible to enter the game area 1100 beyond the prevention member 1116 (see FIG. 8), rolling downward in the opposite direction between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, and the outer rail 1111 and From the lower end opening between the inner rail 1112 and the foul space 626 (see FIG. 1) formed between the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111, The foul ball inlet 542e (see FIG. 1) of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the door frame 5 located there is received and discharged to the lower tray 302 (see FIG. 7) of the tray unit 300. there is

The player grasps the front rotary handle body 506 and rotates the front rotary handle body 506 clockwise from 10 degrees (10°), which is the release position of the firing stop switch, so that the rotation angle θ of the front rotary handle body 506 is increased. As described above, the rotation angle φ of the detection shaft of potentiometer 512 is 275 degrees (275 degrees) to 125 degrees (125 degrees) until reaching 100 degrees (100 degrees), which is the right-handed setting position. When the output of the potentiometer 512 is 94.6% to 41.1% (9.46 kΩ to 4.11 kΩ), the current is adjusted to linearly change from 1.04 A to 2.10 A. ing. At this time, if the game ball shot from the ball shooting device 650 cannot cross the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112 and enter the game area 1100, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 Rolling downward in the opposite direction between is received in the foul ball inlet 542e (see FIG. 1) of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the door frame 5 located in the lower part of the foul space 626, and the lower plate 302 (see FIG. 1) of the plate unit 300 7). In other words, the player grasps the front rotary handle main body 506 and rotates the front rotary handle main body 506 further clockwise from 10 degrees (10°), which is the firing stop switch release position, and the game ball moves to the tip of the inner rail 1112. "Weak hitting" that can be adjusted to an extent that the firing intensity cannot be adjusted beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 to enter the game area 1100 can be realized by the resolution by rotating the front 506 of the rotary handle main body. .

On the other hand, if the game ball shot from the ball shooting device 650 can enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112, the game ball shot toward the game area 1100 The above-described “left-handed hitting” can be realized by rotating the front 506 of the rotary handle main body.

When the player grabs the front rotary handle body 506 and rotates it clockwise, and the rotation angle θ of the front rotary handle body 506 reaches 100 degrees (100°), which is the right-handed set position, as described above. , the rotation angle φ of the detection shaft of the potentiometer 512 becomes 125 degrees (125°) and the output of the potentiometer 512 becomes 41.1% (4.11 kΩ), so that the current is adjusted to 2.10 A. It's becoming At this time, a current of 2.10 A flows to the shooting solenoid 654, so that the game ball shot toward the game area 1100 can be hit to the right of the center accessory 2300. , the aforementioned "right-handed hitting" can be realized by rotating the front 506 of the rotating handle main body.

When the game board is enlarged by, for example, increasing the vertical dimension of the game board, the shooting intensity of the game ball for "right hitting" must also be increased according to the size of the game board. However, in the conventional technology, as the size of the game board increases, the size of the firing solenoid of the batted ball shooting device must also be increased. In addition, in the conventional technology, if a small-sized firing solenoid is adopted to increase the size of the game board, it is necessary to increase the firing strength of the game ball and apply a large current to the firing solenoid in the case of "right hitting". Furthermore, when adopting a "B curve" variable resistor whose resistance value changes linearly, in order to obtain the firing intensity for "right hitting", the game There is no choice but to set the shooting strength of the ball to be stronger overall, and the game ball is vigorously shot toward the game area 1100 simply by rotating the front 506 of the rotary handle main body several degrees clockwise from the original position. As a result, there is a drawback that the rate of change in firing intensity with respect to the rotation angle θ due to the rotation operation of the front 506 of the rotary handle main body becomes large. In other words, in the conventional technology, if a small-sized firing solenoid is adopted to increase the size of the game board, the firing strength of the game ball is increased, and in the case of "right hitting", the firing strength is Since the resolution of the game ball is low, it is difficult to adjust the game ball so that it pops out to a predetermined position in the game area 1100, and there is a drawback that the player is frustrated.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the entire range from zero ohms (0Ω), which is the minimum output resistance value of the potentiometer 512, to 10 kΩ (10kΩ), which is the maximum output resistance value of the potentiometer 512. When the rotation angle φ of the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 is 290 degrees (290°), it is set to 10 kΩ, which is 100%, instead of being adjusted to change linearly. When the rotation angle φ of the portion is 10 degrees (10°), it is set to zero Ω (0Ω), which is 0%, and the effective rotation angle range in which the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 can actually rotate. is set in a range from 290 degrees (290 degrees) to 110 degrees (110 degrees). As a result, the player grasps the front rotary handle main body 506 and further rotates the front rotary handle main body 506 clockwise from the firing stop switch release position of 10 degrees (10°) to rotate the front rotary handle main body 506. In a rotation range of 90 degrees (90°) where the angle θ is the right-handed setting position of 100° (100°), a “light hit” and a “left-handed hit” can be performed, and the player can grasps the front rotary handle body 506 and rotates it clockwise, and when the rotation angle θ of the front rotary handle body 506 reaches 100 degrees (100°), which is the right-handed set position, "right-handed hitting" is performed. It is possible to do so.

In this way, in this embodiment, by adopting a small firing solenoid 654, the game board 4 can be enlarged, and the rotation operation of the front 506 of the rotary handle main body in "weak hitting" and "left hitting" Since it is possible to increase the resolution of the firing intensity with respect to the amount, it is easy to adjust so that the game ball pops out at a predetermined position in the game area 1100 divided and formed on the large game board 4, and the shooting intensity can be fine. Adjustments can be made, and the player grabs the front rotary handle body 506 and rotates it clockwise until the rotation angle θ of the front rotary handle body 506 reaches 100 degrees (100°), which is the right-handed setting position. When you reach , you can definitely hit right. That is, in the present embodiment, as the game board 4 is configured to be large and the vertical dimension of the pachinko game machine 1 is restricted, the vertical distance dimension is reduced and the size is reduced. To increase the rate of change in game ball shooting intensity with respect to the rotation angle θ of the front 506 of a rotary handle body even if a small shooting solenoid 654 is used to drive a ball hitting mallet 656 that shoots a game ball. Instead, fine adjustments can be made so that the game ball pops out to a predetermined position in the game area 1100 . Therefore, by adopting a small-sized shooting solenoid, the size of the game board can be increased, and the player's frustration caused by adjusting the shooting intensity of the game ball can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, as described above, the entire range from zero ohms (0 Ω), which is the minimum output resistance value of the potentiometer 512, to 10 kΩ (10 kΩ), which is the maximum output resistance value, is adjusted from the maximum firing intensity of the game ball. It is not adjusted to change linearly up to the minimum emission intensity, but is set to 10 kΩ which is 100% when the rotation angle φ of the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 is 290 degrees (290 °), When the rotation angle φ of the detection shaft of the potentiometer 512 is 10 degrees (10°), it is set to zero Ω (0Ω), which is 0%, and the detection shaft of the potentiometer 512 can actually rotate. The effective rotation angle range is set to range from 290 degrees (290 degrees) to 110 degrees (110 degrees). Then, the range from 290 degrees (290 degrees) to 110 degrees (110 degrees), which is the range of effective rotation angles in which the detection shaft of the potentiometer 512 can actually rotate, is adjusted from the maximum firing strength to the minimum firing strength of the game ball. It is adjusted so that the intensity changes linearly. When adjusting the game ball from the maximum firing strength to the minimum firing strength along a plurality of straight lines (i.e., along a line graph-like straight line), it is necessary to provide a dedicated circuit around the potentiometer 512. Not only does this increase the cost, but it is also necessary to secure a space on the board for providing this dedicated circuit, and to make the board box larger due to this space, it is also necessary to consider heat dissipation. Then, since the load is applied to the dedicated circuit by changing along the polygonal line, the lifetime of the potentiometer 512 and the dedicated circuit is different. required and development will take time.

[9-5. Driving timing of the launch solenoid and the ball feed solenoid]
Next, drive timings of the shooting solenoid 654 and the ball sending solenoid 585 shown in FIG. 12 for sending a game ball to the batted ball shooting device 650 shown in FIG. 5 will be described with reference to FIG. The shooting control section 857 shown in FIG. 12 mainly includes a shooting control circuit 857a that performs shooting control by the shooting solenoid 654 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 585, as described above. The shooting control circuit 857a adjusts the drive current for launching (shooting) the game ball toward the game area 1100 based on the resistance value, which is the operation signal from the potentiometer 512, and controls the output to the shooting solenoid 654. At the same time, by outputting a constant current to the ball-feeding solenoid 585, the ball-feeding member of the ball-feeding unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. Control is performed to send the received game ball to the shot ball launching device 650 side. The firing control circuit 857a may be configured as an ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit), or may be configured mainly by a microprocessor containing ROM and RAM.

The emission control circuit 857a has a clock signal oscillator (not shown) that generates a source oscillation of 4.096 megahertz (MHz). )), and based on this reference time t0, the firing control by the firing solenoid 654 and the ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 585 are performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 21, the launch control circuit 857a generates the clock signal CLK to generate the reference time t0, and the operations of the ball feed solenoid 585 and the launch solenoid 654 are managed based on the reference time t0. It is The operations of the ball feeding solenoid 585 and the shooting solenoid 654 are started and completed before the reference time t0 reaches 20 times. In other words, 20 times of the reference time t0 is one operation cycle of the ball feeding solenoid 585 and the shooting solenoid 654. As shown in FIG. By setting this one operation cycle to 20 times of the reference time t0, it is possible to perform control for shooting about 100 game balls per minute.

When one operation cycle is started, an ON signal to the ball feeding solenoid 585 starts to be output, and when the time corresponding to three times of the reference time t0 elapses, an ON signal to the firing solenoid 654 starts to be output, and the reference time t0. The ON signal to the shooting solenoid 654 is stopped and the OFF signal is started to be output, and the ON signal to the ball feeding solenoid 585 is started to be output until five times of the reference time t0 elapses. When the ON signal to the shooting solenoid 654 starts to be output and the time corresponding to two times of the reference time t0 elapses, the ON signal to the ball feed solenoid 585 is stopped and the OFF signal is output. Then, when the ON signal to the ball feeding solenoid 585 is stopped and the OFF signal is output and the fifteen times of the reference time t0 is started, one operation cycle is started again.

When the ON signal to the firing solenoid 654 starts to be output, as described above, the ON signal to the firing solenoid 654 is stopped and the OFF signal is started to be output before the reference time t0 elapses. . Specifically, when the ON signal to the firing solenoid 654 is started to be output and 23 ms passes as the current supply time t1, the ON signal to the firing solenoid 654 is stopped and the OFF signal is started to be output. .

Thus, the time during which the ON signal is output to the firing solenoid 654 is 23 ms, which is the current supply time t1, which is shorter than the reference time t0 of 30.0195 ms. When the output of the ON signal to the shooting solenoid 654 is started, the ball hitting mallet 656 shown in FIG. At this time, the rotationally driven ball hitting mallet 656 is returned to its original position to shoot the next game ball, thereby prolonging the waiting time of the ball hitting mallet 656 at its original position, thereby hitting the game ball. It is possible to lengthen the time required for the ball-hitting mallet 656 to move from a vibrating state to a stationary state due to the momentum when the hammer 656 returns to the original position after being fired. As a result, the player grasps the front rotary handle main body 506 and rotates the front rotary handle main body 506 so as to obtain a desired firing intensity, thereby causing the upper starting port 2101 provided in the game area 1100 shown in FIG. In order to increase the probability of occurrence of a jackpot game state that gives the player a profit by stably hitting the game ball into the ball, when maintaining the rotational position of the front 506 of the rotary handle main body, the vibration of the ball hitting mallet 656 It is possible to prevent the game ball from being hit in a state that deviates from the center of the game ball, and it is possible to suppress the variation in the launch strength of the game ball when hitting and launching the next game ball. By stabilizing the firing intensity, it is possible to suppress fluctuations in the rate at which a game ball enters the upper starting port 2101 or the like (entering ball rate). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player's frustration due to variations in the shooting intensity of the game ball.

It should be noted that, unlike the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, the large winning opening is opened only for a predetermined period of time triggered by the game ball entering the start opening provided in the game area, and a specific area in the large winning opening (so-called , V zone) is replaced with the game board 4 shown in FIG. ', in this embodiment, as described above, it is possible to increase the resolution of the firing intensity with respect to the rotational operation amount of the front 506 of the rotary handle main body in the "light hitting" and "left hitting". Therefore, it is possible to finely adjust the shooting intensity of the game ball, and it is possible to suppress the variation in the shooting intensity of the game ball, so that the game ball can be placed in the big winning opening. It is possible to enter the ball stably.

[9-6. Wasted shot prevention circuit]
Next, the wasteful hitting prevention circuit 857c will be described. As shown in FIG. 22, a detection signal from the touch switch 516 for detecting whether or not the palm or fingers are in contact with the rotary handle body front 506 of the handle device 500 shown in FIG. is input via the handle relay terminal board 192, and a payout power failure warning signal is input via the payout control board 4110 from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e provided in the main control board 4100 shown in FIG.

A touch switch 516 for detecting whether or not a palm or finger is in contact with the rotary handle main body front 506 is a capacitive switch and has an open collector output. The touch switch 516 is turned ON when the palm or fingers are in contact with the front rotary handle body 506 , and turned OFF when the palm or fingers are not in contact with the front rotary handle body 506 .

The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e, which will be described in detail later, monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of two voltages of +12V and +24V from the power supply board 851, and detects a power failure or momentary power failure. , a payout power outage notice signal is output to the payout control board 4110 as a power outage notice, and this payout power outage notice signal is inputted to the useless hitting prevention circuit 857c as a power outage notice. The output power failure warning signal output from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e provided in the main control board 4100 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic is LOW when the signs of voltage power failure or momentary power failure of +12V and +24V are not detected. On the other hand, when either or both voltages of +12V and +24V detect a sign of power failure or momentary power failure, the voltage is pulled up to the +12V side and the logic becomes HI.

Specifically, one end of the transmission line for transmitting the detection signal (contact signal 1) from the touch switch 516 for detecting whether or not the palm or fingers are touching the front 506 of the rotary handle main body is electrically connected to the +12V power line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the connected pull-up resistor WR0 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor WTR0 via the resistor WR1. The base terminal of the transistor WTR0 is electrically connected to the resistor WR1, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor WR2 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor WTR0 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor WTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor WR3, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. By turning ON/OFF the transistor WTR0, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor WTR0 changes, and this signal is input as a connection signal to the negative logic connection signal input terminal of the firing control circuit 857a.

A circuit composed of the resistors WR1 and WR2 and the transistor WTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a detection signal (contact signal 1) from the touch switch 516. FIG.

When the palm or finger is in contact with the front 506 of the rotating handle main body, the touch switch 516 is turned ON, so that the collector terminal of the transistor of the touch switch 516 is on the ground (GND) side because the touch switch 516 is an open collector output. , the logic of the detection signal (contact signal 1) from the touch switch 516 becomes LOW, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor WTR0 is also pulled down to the ground (GND) side, thereby turning off the transistor WTR0 and turning off the switch. The circuit is also turned off.

On the other hand, when the front 506 of the rotating handle body is not touched by the palm or fingers, the touch switch 516 is turned off, and since the touch switch 516 is an open collector output, the collector terminal of the transistor of the touch switch 516 is a pull-up resistor. The logic of the detection signal (contact signal 1) from the touch switch 516 becomes HI by pulling up to the +12V side by WR0, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor WTR0 is also pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor WR0. As a result, the transistor WTR0 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on.

In this way, when the palm or finger is in contact with the front 506 of the rotary handle main body, the transistor WTR0 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the front 506 of the rotating handle body is not touched by the palm or fingers, the transistor WTR0 is turned ON, and the switch circuit is also turned ON, whereby the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor WTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. It's like

In addition, a transmission line for transmitting a power failure warning signal output from a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e provided in the main control board 4100 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor WR4, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor WTR1 via a resistor WR5. The base terminal of the transistor WTR1 in the preceding stage is electrically connected to the resistor WR5, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor WR6 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor WTR1 in the previous stage is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor WTR1 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor WR7, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. In addition, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor WTR2 via the resistor WR8. The base terminal of the transistor WTR2 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor WR8, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor WR9 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor WTR2 in the subsequent stage is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor WTR2 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor WTR0 described above, and one end of the transistor WTR2 is connected to the +5V power supply line described above. It is electrically connected to the other end of the electrically connected resistor WR3. By turning ON/OFF the transistor WTR1 in the preceding stage, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor WTR1 in the preceding stage changes. The logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of WTR2 changes, and the signal is input as a connection signal to the negative logic connection signal input terminal of the emission control circuit 857a.

A circuit composed of the resistors WR5 and WR6 and the preceding stage transistor WTR1 and a circuit composed of the resistors WR8 and WR9 and the subsequent stage transistor WTR2 are turned ON/OFF by the output power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e. It is a switch circuit that

When the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e detects no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the voltages of +12 V and +24 V, the logic of the output power failure warning signal becomes LOW, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor WTR1 in the previous stage is also grounded. By pulling down to the (GND) side, the transistor WTR1 in the previous stage is turned OFF, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned OFF. As the applied voltage is pulled up to +5V by the resistor WR7, the transistor WTR2 in the latter stage is turned ON, and the switch circuit in the latter stage is also turned ON.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e detects a sign of power failure or momentary power failure of either or both of +12V and +24V, the output power failure warning signal is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor WR4. becomes HI, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor WTR1 in the previous stage is also pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor WR4, turning on the transistor WTR1 in the previous stage, turning on the switch circuit in the previous stage, and the transistor in the subsequent stage. When the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor WTR1 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of WTR2, is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, the transistor WTR2 in the subsequent stage is turned OFF, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned OFF. It will happen.

In this way, when the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e detects no signs of power failure or momentary power failure of the voltages of +12V and +24V, the preceding transistor WTR1 is turned OFF, the preceding switching circuit is also turned OFF, and the succeeding transistor WTR2 is turned ON. Then, by turning on the switch circuit in the latter stage, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor WTR2 in the latter stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, while the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e is set to +12 V or +24 V, or both. When a sign of power failure or momentary power failure is detected, the transistor WTR1 in the previous stage is turned ON, the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned ON, the transistor WTR2 in the latter stage is turned OFF, and the switch circuit in the latter stage is also turned OFF. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of WTR2 is pulled up to the +5V side by resistor WR3.

In this embodiment, the collector terminal of the transistor WTR0 and the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor WTR2 are electrically connected to form a "wired OR circuit". As a result, when the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e detects no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the +12V and +24V voltages, the transistor WTR1 in the preceding stage is turned OFF, the switch circuit in the preceding stage is also turned OFF, and the switching circuit in the subsequent stage is turned OFF. When the transistor WTR2 of the latter stage is turned ON and the switch circuit of the latter stage is also turned ON, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor WTR2 of the latter stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of WTR0 is applied to the negative logic connect signal input terminal of launch control circuit 857a. That is, when the palm or finger is in contact with the front 506 of the rotating handle main body, the transistor WTR0 is turned off, and the switching circuit is also turned off, whereby the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor WTR0 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor WR3. While the connection signal whose logic is HI is input to the negative logic connection signal input terminal of the firing control circuit 857a, when the palm or fingers are not touching the front 506 of the rotating handle body, the transistor WTR0 is turned ON, and the switch circuit is also turned on. By turning ON, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor WTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side so that the connection signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the negative logic connection signal input terminal of the emission control circuit 857a. It's becoming

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e detects a sign of power failure or momentary power failure of either or both of +12V and +24V, as described above, the preceding transistor WTR1 is turned on, and the preceding stage switch circuit is also turned on. When it is turned ON, the transistor WTR2 in the latter stage is turned OFF, and the switch circuit in the latter stage is also turned OFF, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor WTR2 in the latter stage is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor WR3, so that the logic is always HI. , regardless of whether the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor WTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side or pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor WR3, a connection signal whose logic is always HI is emitted. It is input to the negative logic connection signal input terminal of the control circuit 857a.

As described above, the firing control circuit 857a steps down the +37V supplied from the power generation circuit 855d in the DC/DC converter 857aa of the firing control circuit 857a shown in FIG. Then, the electrolytic capacitor 857b is charged by applying the DC power supply (+35 V) for driving the solenoid to the electrolytic capacitor 857b. The combined current of the current from the DC/DC converter 857aa and the current resulting from the discharge of the electric charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor 857b flows through the firing solenoid drive circuit 857ab shown in FIG. 12 of the firing control circuit 857a. It's becoming

When the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e detects no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the voltages of +12V and +24V, the firing control circuit 857a operates when the logic of the connection signal input to the negative logic connection signal input terminal is LOW. That is, when the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e detects no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the voltage of +12 V and +24 V, and when the front 506 of the rotary handle body is not touched by the palm or finger, the firing is stopped. Determining that there is, in the firing solenoid drive circuit 857ab, operation from the potentiometer 512 that electrically adjusts the intensity (firing intensity) that launches the game ball toward the game area 1100 according to the rotational position of the front 506 of the rotary handle main body Based on the signal, the drive current for launching (shooting) the game ball toward the game area 1100 is forcibly stopped by adjusting the combined current and outputting the control to the launch solenoid 654, while the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e is When no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the voltage of +12V and +24V is detected, and when the palm or finger is touching the front 506 of the rotary handle body, it is determined that the firing is permitted, and the firing is performed. In the solenoid drive circuit 857ab, the game ball is driven based on the operation signal from the potentiometer 512 that electrically adjusts the strength (shooting strength) of hitting the game ball toward the game area 1100 according to the rotational position of the rotary handle main body front 506. The drive current for hitting (firing) toward the game area 1100 is controlled to output to the firing solenoid 654 by adjusting the combined current.

On the other hand, the launch control circuit 857a inputs to the negative logic connection signal input terminal when the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e detects a sign of power failure or momentary power failure of either or both of +12V and +24V. Since the logic of the connection signal is always HI, it is determined that the firing is stopped regardless of whether the front 506 of the rotary handle body is touched by the palm or fingers, and the firing solenoid drive circuit 857ab , based on an operation signal from a potentiometer 512 that electrically adjusts the strength (shooting strength) of hitting the game ball toward the game area 1100 according to the rotational position of the front 506 of the rotary handle main body. Forcibly stops the control of outputting the driving current for firing (firing) to the firing solenoid 654 by adjusting the combined current. As a result, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor 857b is discharged in a power failure or momentary power failure and flows into the firing solenoid drive circuit 857ab, thereby preventing it from flowing to the firing solenoid 654 as a drive current. It is possible to prevent unnecessary shooting.

It should be noted that the touch switch 516 (capacitance type switch) detects a change in capacitance due to the touch of a palm or finger on the front rotary handle body 506 , so that the player can touch the front rotary handle body 506 . The rotating position of the pachinko machine 1 is fixed with paper, coins, etc., and the game is played, the seat is left, and the state is left as it is. In addition, the touch switch 516 may be turned ON even though the front 506 of the rotating handle body is not touched by the palm or fingers due to the voltage becoming unstable due to the power cutoff, so the electrolytic capacitor 857b was charged. The electric charge is discharged and flows to the shooting solenoid 654 as a drive current to shoot the game ball toward the game area 1100 .

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e detects a sign of power failure or momentary power failure of either or both of +12V and +24V, When the logic of the connection signal input to the logic connection signal input terminal is always HI, regardless of whether the front 506 of the rotating handle main body is touched with the palm or fingers, it is determined that the firing is stopped, and firing is performed. In the solenoid drive circuit 857ab, the game ball is driven based on the operation signal from the potentiometer 512 that electrically adjusts the strength (shooting strength) of hitting the game ball toward the game area 1100 according to the rotational position of the rotary handle main body front 506. The drive current for launching (firing) toward the game area 1100 is forcibly stopped by adjusting the combined current and outputting it to the firing solenoid 654 . As a result, the player plays a game by fixing the rotational position of the front 506 of the rotary handle main body with paper or a coin, leaves the seat, and leaves the state as it is. Even if the touch switch 516 is turned on even though the front 506 of the rotary handle main body is not touched by the palm or fingers when it is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor 857b due to a power failure or momentary power failure may be lost. By preventing the discharge and flowing to the firing solenoid drive circuit 857ab from flowing to the firing solenoid 654 as a drive current, it is possible to prevent unnecessary firing of the game ball when the power is cut off.

Also, before the player starts playing a game with the pachinko gaming machine 1, the player presses the ball rental button 361 of the ball rental unit 360 shown in FIG. and leave the seat for a break (toilet or eating and drinking), or fill the upper plate 301 with game balls obtained from another pachinko machine and leave the seat for a break (toilet or eating and drinking). sometimes. At this time, the player who was playing the pachinko game machine 1 in front of the player did not notice that the rotating position of the rotary handle main body front 506 was fixed with paper, coins, etc., and remained there for a break. If a power failure or momentary power failure happens while you are away from your seat, the voltage becomes unstable due to the power failure or momentary power failure. , the touch switch 516 may be turned ON, so that the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor 857b is discharged and flows to the shooting solenoid 654 as a drive current to shoot the game ball toward the game area 1100.

Therefore, in this embodiment, even in such a case, as described above, the launch control circuit 857a causes the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e to detect a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of either or both of +12V and +24V. When is detected, if the logic of the connection signal input to the negative logic connection signal input terminal is always HI, regardless of whether the palm or fingers are touching the front 506 of the rotary handle main body, the firing is stopped. Determining that there is, in the firing solenoid drive circuit 857ab, operation from the potentiometer 512 that electrically adjusts the intensity (firing intensity) that launches the game ball toward the game area 1100 according to the rotational position of the front 506 of the rotary handle main body Based on the signal, the driving current for launching (shooting) the game ball toward the game area 1100 is forcibly stopped by adjusting the combined current and outputting it to the shooting solenoid 654 . As a result, before the player starts a game with the pachinko machine 1, the player presses the ball rental button 361 of the ball rental unit 360 to fill the upper tray 301 with game balls and leaves the seat for a break. Or, when the player fills the upper plate 301 with game balls obtained by another pachinko game machine and leaves the seat for a rest, the player is playing the game with the pachinko game machine 1 in front of the player. The touch switch 516 is turned ON even though the player does not notice that the rotation position of the front rotary handle body 506 is fixed with paper or a coin, and the palm or fingers are not touching the front rotary handle body 506. - 特許庁Even if there is a power failure or momentary power failure, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor 857b is discharged and flows into the firing solenoid drive circuit 857ab, thereby preventing it from flowing to the firing solenoid 654 as a drive current. Since it is possible to prevent useless shooting of game balls during a momentary power failure, even though the player himself/herself does not operate the rotary handle main body front 506 during a break, the game ball does not hit. The disadvantage of being fired can be prevented.

By the way, one end of the transmission line for transmitting the detection signal (contact signal 1) from the touch switch 516 for detecting whether or not the palm or fingers are touching the front 506 of the rotating handle main body is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line described above. In addition to being electrically connected to the other end of the connected pull-up resistor WR0, it is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor WTR3 via the resistor WR10. The base terminal of the transistor WTR3 is electrically connected to the resistor WR10, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor WR11, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor WTR3 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor WTR3 is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via wiring (harness). In addition, when the collector terminal of the transistor WTR3 is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via wiring (harness), the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 shown in FIG. , one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a shown in FIG. be.

The ON/OFF of the transistor WTR3 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor WTR3, and the signal is input to the payout control board 4110 as a payout connection signal via wiring (harness).

A circuit composed of the resistors WR10 and WR11 and the transistor WTR3 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a detection signal (contact signal 1) from the touch switch 516. FIG.

When the front 506 of the rotating handle body is touched with a palm or a finger, the touch switch 516 is turned on as described above, and the collector terminal of the transistor of the touch switch 516 is grounded because the touch switch 516 is an open collector output. (GND) side, the logic of the detection signal (contact signal 1) from the touch switch 516 becomes LOW, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor WTR3 is also pulled down to the ground (GND) side. It turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor WTR3 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 via the wiring (harness). A payout contact signal that has become HI is input to the payout control board 4110 .

On the other hand, when the palm or fingers are not in contact with the front 506 of the rotating handle main body, the touch switch 516 is turned off as described above, and the collector terminal of the transistor of the touch switch 516 is turned off because the touch switch 516 is an open collector output. is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor WR0 of the useless hitting prevention circuit 857c, the logic of the detection signal (contact signal 1) from the touch switch 516 becomes HI, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor WTR3 is also The transistor WTR3 is turned on by being pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor WR0, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor WTR3 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 4110 via the wiring (harness), and the payout contact signal whose logic becomes LOW is generated in the payout control board 4110. is entered in

[10. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit etc. of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 25. FIG. 23 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit of the main control board, FIG. 24 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 25 is a circuit showing an interface circuit for communication between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a diagram. First, the main control filter circuit 4100h shown in FIG. 17 will be described, followed by the power supply created by the main control board 4100, the main control system reset, the main control crystal oscillator, the main control input circuit, the power failure monitoring circuit, the main control MPU Various input/output signals to and from the main control board 4100 and the interface circuit for communication between the peripheral control boards 4140 will be described.

The main control board 4100 includes a main control MPU 4100a, a main control input circuit 4100b, a main control output circuit 4100c, a main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e, a +5V generation circuit 4100g, and a main control MPU 4100a shown in FIGS. In addition to the control filter circuit 4100h, peripheral circuits include a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal and a main control crystal oscillator MX0 that outputs a clock signal (in this embodiment, 24 megahertz (MHz )).

[10-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 23, the main control filter circuit 4100h mainly includes a main control 3-terminal filter MIC0. This main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, magnetically shielded with ferrite, and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 has its 1st terminal applied with +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 4100g, its 2nd terminal connected to the ground (GND), and noise components removed from its 3rd terminal. +5V is output. The +5V applied to the No. 1 terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0, one end of which is grounded (GND), so that the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) is first removed. smoothed.

The +5 V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other ends of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF)), one end of which is grounded (GND). , the ripple is further removed and smoothed. This smoothed +5V is applied to the power terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and the like.

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC3, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the +5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. A VSS terminal, which is a ground terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, is grounded (GND).

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 4100a, and one end of the capacitor MC4 is connected to the ground (GND). is electrically connected to the other end of the The VBB terminal of this main control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4. electrically connected to the terminal. That is, the +5 V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 4100h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and is applied to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC0 through the diode MD0. is intended to be applied to the positive terminal of As a result, as described above, the +12V created by the power supply creation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. When the circuit 4100g cannot generate +5V, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 4100 as the main VBB, so the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a Although the main control MPU 4100a does not operate because the current is blocked by the diode MD0, the memory contents are retained by applying the main VBB to the VBB terminal of the main control internal RAM.

[10-2. Main control system reset]
The +5 V from which noise components have been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 4100h is applied to the power terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 as shown in FIG. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 4100a and the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function, and includes a delay circuit. The delay capacitor terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC5, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the delay time of the delay circuit is set by the capacity of this capacitor MC5. It is possible to do so. Specifically, the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the elapse of the delay time when +5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (eg, 4.25V).

The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal, which is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type capacitor, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the other end of which is grounded (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of MC6. Ripple is removed and smoothed by this capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is higher than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI. While being input to the reset terminal of the circuit 4100ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is applied to the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. Input to the reset pin respectively. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold, the main control MPU 4100a and the reset function The main control output circuit 4100ca with is reset. One end of the power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC7 grounded to the ground (GND), and the +5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. Also, the ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the NC terminal is electrically unconnected to the outside.

[10-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
The +5 V from which noise components have been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 4100h is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, as shown in FIG. This VDD terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC8, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the +5V input to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples. In addition to the VDD terminal, this smoothed +5 V is also applied to the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal and ST terminal, which are output frequency selection terminals. The main controlled crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a 24 MHz clock signal from the F terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying +5 V to these A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal.

The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and receives a 24 MHz clock signal. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main controlled crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded (GND), and the D terminal that outputs the divided frequency of the F terminal of the main controlled crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically unconnected to the outside. state.

[10-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 4100b receives detection signals from the general prize winning opening switches 3020, 3020, the upper starting opening switch 3022, the lower starting opening switch 2109, the magnetism detection switch 304, the count switch 2110, and the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. In addition, it is a circuit to which an operation signal (RAM clear signal) or the like from the operation switch 860a provided on the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 12 is input. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, the circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 860a is input will be described here.

[10-4-1. Circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch is input]
First, as described above, the operation switch 860a is a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control board 4110 and the main control of the main control board 4100 within a predetermined period from the power on. It is operated to clear the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the MPU 4100a, or to cancel the error when an error is reported after the power is turned on. A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, and error cancellation after the power is turned on (after a period of time during which the RAM clear function has passed, that is, after a predetermined period has passed since the power was turned on). and a function to perform Since the main control board 4100 does not have the function of canceling the error that the payout control board 4110 has, when the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is input within a predetermined period from the power on, the main control It is judged as a RAM clear signal for clearing the built-in RAM, and processing for clearing the main control built-in RAM is performed.

The main control board 4100 receives an operation signal whose logic is LOW from the payout control board 4110 when the operation switch 860a is not operated. becomes HI is input from the payout control board 4110 (detailed description of this point will be given later).

The transmission line that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 860a provided on the payout control board 4110 within a predetermined period from the time of power-on is, as shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 through the resistor MR3. The base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the resistor MR3, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor MTR0 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR5, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC10 (non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC10A) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 4100a.

The circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 860a in the payout control board 4110 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is transmitted. The line is pulled up to +12V by pull-up resistor MR2. In the main control board 4100, when the operation switch 860a is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 4110 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW and is input, while the operation switch 860a is operated. When it is on, the operation signal from the payout control board 4110 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 and the logic becomes HI and is input.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by an operation signal from the operation switch 860a.

When the operation switch 860a is not operated, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, thereby turning off the transistor MTR0 and also turning off the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is raised to the +5V side by the resistor MR5, and the operation signal from the operation switch 860a whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. be done. The main control MPU 4100a judges that when the logic of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, it is not an instruction to perform RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM. do.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 860a is operated, an operation signal pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 and logic becomes HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, thereby turning on the transistor MTR0. The circuit is also turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the operation signal from the operation switch 860a whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. be done. When the logic of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, the main control MPU 4100a instructs to perform RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM. to decide.

The operation signal from the operation switch 860a is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is input through the payout control board 4110. That is, between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110, in order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards, the control reference voltage is higher than +5V A voltage of +12V is used to improve signal reliability. Therefore, in this embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening switch 3020, the upper starting opening switch 3022, and the lower starting opening switch 2109, which are directly input to the main control board 4100, are pulled up to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor. On the other hand, the detection signals from the magnetic detection switch 3024, the count switch 2110, the general winning opening switch 3020, and the gate switch 2352, which are input via the panel relay terminal board 4161 shown in FIG. Since it is not input, it is pulled up to the +12V side by a pull-up resistor like the operation signal from the operation switch 860a.

[10-5. Power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 17, the main control board 4100 is supplied with two voltages of +12V and +24V from the power supply board 851 through the payout control board 4110, and +12V and +24V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e. ing. The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e monitors signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of +12V and +24V, and when a power failure or momentary power failure sign is detected, a power failure warning signal is sent as a power failure warning to the main control MPU 4100a and the payout control board. It is output to the payout control MPU 4120 a of 4110 and the peripheral control board 4140 . Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by the monitoring of +24 V power failure or momentary power failure, +12 V power failure or momentary power failure monitoring, and the output of a power failure warning signal.

[10-5-1. Configuration of blackout monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 24, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e mainly includes a shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D-type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

The REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. +5V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (2.495 V is set in the present embodiment) that serves as a comparison reference voltage for the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC20, one end of which is grounded (GND). AC component) is removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded (GND).

The comparator MIC21 has two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used to compare the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V with the reference voltage Vref, and the other (MIC21B) is used to compare , +12V are used to compare the monitor voltage V2 and the reference voltage Vref. A monitoring voltage V1 of +24 V is applied to the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21A, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the second terminal, which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21A. A monitoring voltage V2 of +12 V is applied to the fifth terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21B, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the sixth terminal, which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21B. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This D-type flip-flop MIC22 has two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in this embodiment. The Vcc terminal, which is the power terminal of the comparator MIC21, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21, one end of which is grounded (GND). , the ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21, is connected to the ground (GND).

[10-5-2. +24V blackout or momentary blackout monitoring]
The +24V power failure or momentary power failure is monitored by comparing the +24V monitor voltage V1 and the reference voltage Vref with the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, as described above. As shown in FIG. 24, the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V is applied, is a resistor MR21 whose one end is electrically connected to the +24V power supply line. is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR22 grounded to the ground (GND), the other ends of the resistors MR21 and MR22 and the other end of the capacitor MC23 grounded to the ground (GND); are electrically connected. The monitoring voltage V1 of +24V applied to the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is divided by +24V according to the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC23 and smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are such that, when +24V power failure or momentary power failure occurs, the voltage starts to drop from +24V and becomes the preset power failure detection voltage V1pf (in this embodiment, it is set to 21.40V). The monitor voltage V1 of +24V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The first terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor MR23 electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC24, one end of which is grounded (GND), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the No. 1 terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is +5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. A signal that has been pulled up to the side and has a logic HI is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the +24V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is the ground (GND). A signal that has been pulled down to the side and has a logic LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[10-5-3. +12V blackout or momentary blackout monitoring]
The +12V power failure or momentary power failure is monitored by the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +12V monitoring voltage V2 and the reference voltage Vref as described above. As shown in FIG. 24, the fifth terminal, which is the plus terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the +12V monitor voltage V2 is applied, is a resistor MR24 whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR25 grounded to the ground (GND), the other ends of the resistors MR24 and MR25 and the other end of the capacitor MC25 grounded to the ground (GND); are electrically connected. The monitoring voltage V2 of +12V applied to the fifth terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is divided by +12V according to the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC25 and smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 are such that, when +12V power failure or momentary power failure occurs, the voltage starts to drop from +12V and becomes the preset power failure detection voltage V2pf (in this embodiment, it is set to 10.47V). The monitor voltage V2 of +12V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref when the voltage is applied.

The 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output, and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A. A preset D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor MR23 which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of a capacitor MC24 having one end grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a terminal. Capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter as described above.

When the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is +5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. A signal that has been pulled up to the side and has a logic HI is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the +12V voltage is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 is lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is the ground (GND). A signal that has been pulled down to the side and has a logic LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[10-5-4. Power failure warning signal output]
The D-type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, according to the change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, and stores this stored value. (logic) is output from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal, and a value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal. When the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a signal whose logic is LOW at the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, it releases the latched state and resets the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal (at this time, the logic of the signal output from 1Q is inverted, that is, the same logic as the signal input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal). A logic signal is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal). On the other hand, when a logic HI signal is input to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, the latch state is set. In addition, when the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is configured to set the latch state by inputting a signal whose logic is HI to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, the logic of the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, is LOW. is input, the state of outputting a signal with logic HI from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, is maintained (at this time, the signal output from 1Q is inverted in logic to be negative logic maintains the state of output from the 1Q terminal).

In the present embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has the D input terminal 1D terminal and the clock input terminal 1CK terminal grounded (GND), respectively. The circuit is configured so that there is no change in the edge of the input clock signal, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, is stored and is not output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. ing. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a PR terminal, which is a preset terminal. Alternatively, a signal from the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors momentary power failure, is input, and based on these signals, a signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. The Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC22, one end of which is grounded (GND), and is applied to the Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. +5V is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor MC22, the GND terminal as the ground terminal is grounded (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal that inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal as the output terminal is electrically connected to the outside. It is in an unconnected state.

In the present embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 4100a through a main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function to a CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal. This power failure clear signal is designed to be stopped after a predetermined period of time after starting to be output in the processing performed by the main control MPU 4100a when power is turned on on the main control side, which will be described later. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 4100a is input to the CLR terminal via the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function with the logic being LOW. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is designed to release the latched state when a power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal. is output from the 1Q terminal.

On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 4100a is stopped, the logic becomes HI through the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function and is input to the CLR terminal. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is designed to set a latch state when the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the input state with the logic LOW at the PR terminal.

The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b, and is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. A signal output from the 1Q terminal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a as a power failure warning signal. In addition, the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the main control output circuit without reset function 4100cb, and resets the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The functionless main control output circuit 4100cb outputs to the payout control board 4110 as a payout power outage warning signal, and outputs to the peripheral control board 4140 as a peripheral power outage warning signal.

The main control input circuit 4100b electrically connects the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the amplifier MIC22, is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor MR26 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via a resistor MR27. It is connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor MR27, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR28 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC23 (non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC23A) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 4100a.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR27, MR28 and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning off the transistor MTR20. , the switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side, turning on the transistor MTR20. The switch circuit is also turned ON.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the logic HI signal is preset to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 becomes LOW in logic and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR29, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes HI through the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is output to the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. Input to PA1.

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HIGH in logic and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. This turns on the transistor MTR20. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes LOW through the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is output to the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. Input to PA1.

In addition, the main control output circuit without reset function 4100cb that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the payout control board 4110 as the payout power outage warning signal is open as shown in FIG. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 4100b described above, and the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is connected via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected to the base terminal. The base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR30, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 via a resistor MR33. The base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR33, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR34 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the wiring is connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via (harness). In addition, when the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 4120 shown in FIG. 12 in the payout control board 4110 In the circuit 4120b, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a shown in FIG. connected.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR30 and MR31 and the transistor MTR21 of the preceding stage is a switching circuit of the preceding stage, and a circuit composed of the resistors MR33, MR34 and the transistor MTR22 of the succeeding stage is a switching circuit of the latter stage, and is a D-type flip-flop. It is turned ON/OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 22 .

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor in the previous stage is pulled down. MTR21 is turned off, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned off, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR32. As a result, the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the latter stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is pulled up to the +5V side, turning on the transistor MTR21. The switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, thereby The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the subsequent switch circuit is also turned off.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are met, the logic HI signal is preset to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal PR, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. transistor MTR21 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, thereby turning on the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 4110 via the wiring (harness), so that the payout power outage warning signal whose logic becomes LOW is delivered. It is input to the control board 4110 .

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HIGH in logic and is applied to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21. The input turns ON the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, thereby turning off the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 through the wiring (harness). A payout power outage warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 4110 .

In addition, the main control output circuit without reset function 4100cb that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 4140 as the peripheral power failure warning signal is open as shown in FIG. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 4100b, and is connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. is electrically connected to The base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor MR35, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR36, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 4140 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 4140 via wiring (harness), the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control section 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. , one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. Connected.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR35 and MR36 and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning off the transistor MTR23. , the switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the +5V side to turn on the transistor MTR23. The switch circuit is also turned ON.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the logic HI signal is preset to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal PR, the logic becomes LOW and the signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. is input to the peripheral control board 4140 .

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HIGH in logic and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. As a result, the transistor MTR23 is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 4140 via the wiring (harness), so that the peripheral power failure warning signal whose logic becomes LOW is generated by the peripheral control board. 4140.

In this way, a main control input circuit 4100b that transmits a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 4100a as a blackout warning signal, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. A main control output circuit 4100cb without a reset function that outputs a signal output from a peripheral control board 4140 as a peripheral power outage warning signal and a main control output circuit 4100cb without a reset function each have one transistor. The signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is issued to the payout control board 4110 while the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal input to the control board 4140 is the same logic. The main control output circuit 4100cb without a reset function that outputs a power failure warning signal has two transistors, a front stage and a rear stage. The logic is the inversion of the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the control board 4140, and is different from the logic of the power failure warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal.

The collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 4100b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the main control MPU 4100a through the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit without reset function 4100cb is connected via wiring (harness) to the payout control board. In the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 in 4110, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and the main control output circuit without reset function 4100cb The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to a pull-up resistor one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140 via wiring (harness). It is connected to the. Between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 4100b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a, the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 4100b and the main control MPU 4100a are connected to the main control substrate. 4100, the power failure notice is performed by the logic (ON/OFF signal) of the power failure notice signal using +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a, whereas the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 and between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140, in order to suppress the influence of noise intruding into the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards, the main control MPU 4100a, A power failure warning is performed by the power failure warning signal logic (ON/OFF signal) using +12V, which is a voltage higher than +5V which is the control reference voltage of the payout control MPU 4120a and the peripheral control MPU 4150a.

[10-6. Various input/output signals to the main control MPU]
Next, various input/output signals to the main control MPU 4100a will be described with reference to FIG. The RXA terminal, which is a serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the main control MPU 4100a, receives serial data from the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 11 as a payer serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 4100b. . On the other hand, the TXA terminal and TXB terminal, which are the serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 4100a, use the serial data transmitted from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 4110 as the main payment serial data transmission signal as the main control output without reset function. A main payment serial data transmission signal is sent to the circuit 4100cb and sent to the payout control board 4110 from the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function, and the serial data to be sent to the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. A peripheral serial data transmission signal is transmitted to the main control output circuit 4100 cb without reset function, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the main control output circuit 4100 cb without reset function to the peripheral control board 4140 .

In addition to the above-described operation signal (RAM clear signal) being input to each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a, for example, a payout signal indicating the completion of normal reception of the main payment serial data reception signal described above A payer ACK signal from the control board 4110 is input via the main control input circuit 4100b, and detection signals from various switches such as the upper starting port switch 3022 shown in FIG. 11 are input via the main control input circuit 4100b. entered or equal.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a, for example, a main payment ACK signal indicating the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal is output to the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function. Then, a main payment ACK signal is output from the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function to the payout control board 4110, and a drive signal is sent to the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function for the starting solenoid 2105 shown in FIG. to output a drive signal from the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function to the starting port solenoid 2105 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, and various displays such as the upper special symbol display 1185 shown in FIG. On the other hand, drive signals are output to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function, and drive signals are output from the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function to various displays.

[10-7. Interface circuit for communication between main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, an interface circuit for communication between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIG. The main control board 4100 is supplied with +12V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. ing. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 is affected by noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140. In order to suppress this, +12V, which is higher than +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a, is used for transmission, thereby increasing its reliability.

Specifically, the main control board 4100 causes the main control output circuit 4100cb without a reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly comprises a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50. It is On the other hand, the peripheral control board 4140 includes, as a communication interface circuit, a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC built-in). It is composed mainly of

+12 V supplied from the power supply board 851 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 4100 through the payout control board 4110, and the negative terminal is grounded to the ground (GND) to the cathode terminal of the diode MD50. is electrically connected to the positive terminal of an electrolytic capacitor MC50 (capacitance: 220 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment). The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal (terminal 1) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140 via wiring (harness). It is connected to the. As a result, for example, due to a power failure or instantaneous power failure, when the power from the power supply board 851 is no longer supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 +12V can be continuously applied from the main control board 4100 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140 .

As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in this embodiment, the capacitance is 470 μF) shown in FIG. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae incorporated in the main control MPU 4100a serially manages at least the command set by the main control CPU core 4100aa in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. The data can be transferred to the transmission shift register 41aea by the unit 4100aec and transmitted from the transmission shift register 4100aea as the main peripheral serial data.

The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 is transmitted to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 as described above. In order to suppress the influence of invading noise, +12V, which is higher than +5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a, is used for transmission, thereby increasing its reliability.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, +12 V is charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 so that it is applied from the main control board 4100 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 4100aa in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb to the transmission shift register 41aea by the serial management unit 4100aec and transmits it. When transmitted from the shift register 4100aea as main cycle serial data, it is possible to transmit a main cycle serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI by +12V from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50.

In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae incorporated in the main control MPU 4100a is 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, data of up to 10 packets are stored in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. Also, in this embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a is set to 19200 bps.

The cathode terminal (third terminal) of photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of transistor MTR50 on main control board 4100 via resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). A resistor AR10 of the peripheral control board 4140 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

The TXB terminal that outputs the main peripheral serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 4100a shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 via. The base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the resistor MR51, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR52 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded (GND).

A circuit composed of the resistors MR51 and MR52 and the transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit. When the logic of the main frequency serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is applied to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor MTR50 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, forward current does not flow through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140, so the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main-peripheral serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR50, turning on the transistor MTR50 and also turning on the switch circuit. . As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

+5 V supplied from the power supply board 851 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 4140 through the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is grounded (GND), and the negative terminal is grounded (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the grounded electrolytic capacitor AC10. The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, and is also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (terminal 6), which is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (4th terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal (5th terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to the +5V side by AR11 and electrically connected to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. By turning ON/OFF the photocoupler AIC10, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is transmitted as the main peripheral serial data transmission signal to the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. is input to the input terminal of

As a result, as described above, when the +5 V supplied from the power supply board 851 is no longer supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 due to, for example, a power failure or momentary power failure, The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 as +5V. When a power outage or momentary power failure occurs, +5V is applied from the electrolytic capacitor AC10, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 is transmitted to the main control MPU 4100a. The transmission of the data set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the built-in main-circumference serial transmission port 4100ae can be completed. The peripheral control board 4140 reliably receives the data without missing or missing data.

When the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off by turning off the MTR50, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the logic becomes HI. While the serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR50 to turn on the transistor MTR50, thereby turning on the photocoupler AIC10. The voltage applied to the collector terminal is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the serial I/O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. . Thus, the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140. It is the logic of

Thus, in this embodiment, the +5V power line to which +5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a is applied and the +12V power line to which +12V which is the communication voltage applied via the diode MD50 are applied. , measures are taken when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage and communication voltage drop. That is, for the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a, the +5V power supply line, the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 4100h as the first auxiliary power supply, are electrically connected in parallel, even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the +5V power supply line drops, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 4100h which is the first auxiliary power supply By applying the control reference voltage from the positive terminal of MC2, it is possible to maintain the state in which the control reference voltage is applied. +12V applied to the +12V power supply line is applied to the anode terminal of diode MD50 as a communication voltage for main control output circuit 4100cb without a reset function that functions as a communication interface circuit. and the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power supply, are electrically connected in parallel, so that a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the communication voltage is applied from the +12V power supply line through the diode MD50. Even if the voltage drops, the state in which the communication voltage is applied can be maintained by applying the communication voltage from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power supply. there is As a result, the command being transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 can be prevented from being interrupted, and the command can be prevented from being lost. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate command failures immediately after the occurrence of a power failure or during an instantaneous power failure.

In addition, a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a are all used as main peripheral serial data, and are composed of the resistor MR50, the resistors MR51 and MR52, and the transistor MTR50. 470 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 4100h so that transmission to the peripheral control board 4140 can be completed via the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function that functions as a communication interface circuit. and 220 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50. As a result, even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140, the multiple commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb are reset so that they all function as interface circuits as main peripheral serial data. Since transmission to the peripheral control board 4140 can be completed via the non-functioning main control output circuit 4100cb, the peripheral control board 4140 does not interrupt or drop the multiple commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. can be received without fail.

[11. Circuit of Payout Control Board]
Next, the circuit etc. of the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 to 32. FIG. FIG. 26 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit etc. of the payout control unit, FIG. 27 is a circuit diagram showing the payout control input circuit, FIG. 28 is a circuit diagram continuing from FIG. 27, and FIG. FIG. 31 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input/output circuit, and FIG. 32 is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals to/from a main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board. is. First, the payout control filter circuit will be described, and then the circuit of the payout control unit, various input/output signals with the main control board, and various output signals to the external terminal board will be described.

[11-1. Dispensing Control Filter Circuit]
As shown in FIG. 26, the payout control filter circuit 4110a is mainly composed of a payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, magnetically shielded with ferrite, and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The 1st terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is applied with +5V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. The +5V from the power supply board 851 is smoothed by the capacitor PC0 by first removing the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage). The 2nd terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is grounded (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 outputs +5V from which the noise component is removed.

The third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 has one end connected to the ground (GND), and the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment). By being electrically connected to each other, the +5V output from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is further smoothed by removing ripples. This smoothed +5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, the VCC terminal that is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, etc., which will be described later. .

The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded (GND). ing. A VSS terminal, which is a ground terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, is grounded (GND).

Moreover, the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU4120a, and one end is grounded (GND) and the capacitor PC4 which is grounded. is electrically connected to the other end of the The VBB terminal of this payout control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4. electrically connected to the terminal. That is, the +5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and through the diode PD0, the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC1 is intended to be applied to the positive terminal of As a result, as described above, when the +5V generated by the power source generation circuit 855d of the power source substrate 851 shown in FIG. Since it is supplied to the payout control board 4110 as, the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and the payout control MPU 4120a does not operate, but the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM The memory contents are held by applying the VBB voltage.

[11-2. Circuit of Payout Control Unit]
The payout control unit 4120 includes a payout control MPU 4120a, a payout control input circuit 4120b, a payout control output circuit 4120c, a payout motor drive circuit 4120d, a CR unit input/output circuit 4120e, and peripheral circuits such as a reset circuit, as shown in FIG. It mainly consists of a payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal and a payout control crystal oscillator PX0 that outputs a clock signal (8 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment). Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, followed by the payout control crystal oscillator, payout control input circuit, payout motor drive circuit, CR unit input/output circuit, and various input/output signals to the payout control MPU.

[11-2-1. Dispensing control system reset]
+5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, as shown in FIG. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function, and incorporates a delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC5, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the delay time of the delay circuit is set by the capacity of this capacitor PC5. It is possible to do so. Specifically, the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time elapses when +5V input to the power terminal reaches a threshold value (eg, 4.25V).

The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal, which is the reset terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function. The output terminal is an open-collector output type capacitor, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1 electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the other end of which is grounded (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of PC6. This capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is greater than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR1 and the logic becomes HI, and this logic is the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control output with reset function. While input to the reset terminal of the circuit 4120ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is applied to the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function. Input to the reset pin respectively. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold, the payout control MPU 4120a and the reset function The attached payout control output circuit 4120ca is reset. One end of the power terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of a capacitor PC7, and the +5 V input to the power terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. Also, the ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the NC terminal is electrically unconnected to the outside.

[11-2-2. Dispensing Control Crystal Oscillator]
+5V from which the noise component has been removed and smoothed by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is input to the VCC terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, as shown in FIG. This VCC terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC8, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the +5V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VCC terminal, this smoothed +5V is also applied to the OE terminal, which is the output enable terminal of the payout controlled crystal oscillator PX0. When +5 V is applied to the OE terminal of the payout controlled crystal oscillator PX0, the 8 MHz clock signal is output from the OUT terminal, which is the output terminal.

The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the payout control MPU 4120a. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout controlled crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to the ground (GND).

[11-2-3. Payout control input circuit]
The payout control input circuit 4120b receives the payout power failure warning signal from the door frame open switch 618, the body frame open switch 619, and the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e provided in the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. A circuit, a handle relay terminal plate 192 shown in FIG. 12, a circuit to which a detection signal is input from the full-tank switch 550 via the power supply board 851, and a circuit to which an operation signal is input from the operation switch 860a, are shown in FIG. A circuit to which a payout contact signal from the touch switch 516 of the handle device 500 shown in FIG. It is a circuit for inputting a payout right-handed signal that is output when the rotational position of the front 506 of the rotary handle main body reaches the right-handed set position (100 degrees (100°)) shown in FIG. 19(a). First, the circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame open switch is input will be explained, followed by the circuit to which the detection signal from the body frame open switch is input, the circuit to which the output power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input, A circuit that receives the detection signal from the full tank switch, a circuit that receives the operation signal from the operation switch, a circuit that receives the payout contact signal from the touch switch, and a right-hand payout from the power supply board launch control circuit. A circuit to which a signal is input will be described. The full-tank switch 550 and various detection switches such as the ball-out switch 750, the counting switch 751, and the rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. 12 have open collector output terminals. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal is input is substantially the same, the circuit to which the detection signal from the full-tank switch is input will be described here.

[11-2-3(a). Circuit where the detection signal from the door frame open switch is input]
The door frame open switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and when the door frame 5 is opened from the body frame 3 shown in FIG. 5 is closed by the body frame 3, the switch is turned off (disconnected). The second terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is grounded (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is a pull-up resistor PR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. , and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via a resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR21, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR22 whose one end is grounded (GND). Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC20, one end of which is grounded (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC20 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC20 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC20A) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 4120a. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR20 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a as a door opening signal.

Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21. and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 through the resistor PR24. The base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the resistor PR24, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line (not shown). It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR21, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door open information output signal.

Further, the No. 1 terminal of the door frame open switch 618 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21. , and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 through the resistor PR24. ing. The base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor PR26, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR27 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 11 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR22 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22, and the signal is input to the main control board 4100 as the main frame door opening signal.

A circuit composed of a pull-up resistor PR20 and a capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generating circuit, and when the door frame 5 is opened from the body frame 3 or when the door frame 5 is closed with the body frame 3, It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a flapping phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the door frame opening switch 618 repeat ON/OFF for a short period of time.

A circuit composed of resistors PR21, PR22 and transistor PTR20, a circuit composed of resistors PR24, PR25 and transistor PTR21, and a circuit composed of resistors PR26, PR27 and transistor PTR22 are door frame opening switches. It is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by a detection signal from 618 .

When the door frame 5 is released from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on. Therefore, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor PTR20 is turned on. It is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, and the door frame open signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. be. Further, when the door frame 5 is released from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on. Therefore, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor The PTR 21 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 through the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes HI. is input to the external terminal plate 784 . Further, when the door frame 5 is released from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, whereby the transistor The PTR 22 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to the main control board 4100 .

On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is closed from the body frame 3, the door frame open switch 618 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR20. , the transistor PTR20 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the door frame open signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. Further, when the door frame 5 is closed from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is raised to +5V, thereby turning the transistor PTR21 ON. Then, the switch circuit is also turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the external terminal plate 784. FIG. Further, when the door frame 5 is closed from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is raised to +5 V, thereby turning the transistor PTR22 on. Then, the switch circuit is also turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the main frame door open signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the main control board 4100 .

In this way, when the door frame 5 is released from the body frame 3, the door frame open switch 618 is turned ON, so that the door frame open signal whose logic is HI is output to the input terminal of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. The outer end frame door open information output signal that is input to PA0 and has a logic HI is input to the external terminal plate 784, and the main frame door open signal that has a logic HI is input to the main control board 4100. When the door frame 5 is closed to the body frame 3, the door frame open switch 618 is turned off, so that the door frame open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. , the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal plate 784 , and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 4100 .

[11-2-3(b). Circuit where the detection signal from the body frame open switch is input]
The body frame open switch 619 is of a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and when the body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2 shown in FIG. 3 is closed by the outer frame 2, the switch is turned off (disconnected). The No. 2 terminal of the body frame open switch 619 is grounded (GND), while the No. 1 terminal of the body frame open switch 619 has a pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power line. , and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via a resistor PR29. The base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor PR29, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR30 whose one end is grounded (GND). In addition, the first terminal of the body frame open switch 619 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC21 whose one end is grounded (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21, and is connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness). electrically connected. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line (not shown). It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR23 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door open information output signal.

The first terminal of the body frame open switch 619 is pulled up to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR28 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29. , and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via the resistor PR31. The base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the resistor PR31, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR32 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above, and the wiring (harness) shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 . When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR24 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24, and the signal is input to the main control board 4100 as the main frame door opening signal.

A circuit composed of a pull-up resistor PR28 and a capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generating circuit, and when the body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2 or when the body frame 3 is closed by the outer frame 2, It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage variations from the body frame open switch 619 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts forming the body frame open switch 619 repeat ON/OFF for a short period of time.

A circuit composed of resistors PR29, PR30 and transistor PTR23 and a circuit composed of resistors PR31, PR32 and transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned ON/OFF by a detection signal from body frame open switch 619. FIG.

When the body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is ON, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor PTR23 is turned on. It is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 through the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes HI. is input to the external terminal plate 784 . In addition, when the body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is turned on, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, whereby the transistor The PTR 24 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to the main control board 4100 .

On the other hand, when the body frame 3 is closed by the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. , the transistor PTR23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side at the external terminal plate 784 through the wiring (harness), and the outer edge frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is generated. It is input to the external terminal board 784 . When the body frame 3 is closed by the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is turned off, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR28. , the transistor PTR24 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 4100 through the wiring (harness), and the main frame door opening signal whose logic becomes LOW is generated by the main control board. 4100.

In this way, when the body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is turned ON, and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal plate 784. A main frame door open signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 4100. On the other hand, in the state where the main frame 3 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main frame open switch 619 is turned off, thereby turning off the logic. is input to the external terminal plate 784 , and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 4100 .

In this embodiment, as described above, one or both of the state in which the door frame 5 is closed with the main body frame 3 and the state in which the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2 Even in this case, the main frame door opening signal is input to the main control board 4100, so the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. Although it cannot be determined whether the door frame 5 is released from the main body frame 3 or the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2, the door frame 5 and / or It is possible for the player to determine that the body frame 3 is open, which does not occur during a normal game, and that the outer end frame door open information output signal is sent to the external terminal plate 784. Since the outer end frame door open information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784, the hall computer outputs the door frame door open information output signal based on the outer end frame door open information output signal. 5 is released from the main body frame 3 or the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2, but the door frame 5 and/or the main body frame 3 are opened. It can be determined that a state that does not occur during a normal game has occurred.

In this embodiment, as described above, the door frame open switch 618 and the body frame open switch 619 are normally closed switches. Even if the door frame 5 is released from the main body frame 3, and the main body frame open switch 619 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on (conducting), the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2. By adopting normally closed switches for the door frame open switch 618 and the body frame open switch 619 in this way, the main frame door open signal can be output to the main control board 4100 even in the event of a short circuit. A frame door open information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 .

If the door frame open switch 618 and the body frame open switch 619 are changed from normally closed switches to normally open (normally open (NO)) switches (door frame open switch 618' and body frame open switch 619'), , the door frame open switch 618' is turned ON (conducting) when the door frame 5 is closed from the main body frame 3, and turned OFF (disconnected) when the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3. . The body frame open switch 619 ′ is turned on (conducting) when the body frame 3 is closed from the outer frame 2 and turned off (disconnected) when the body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2 . Then, even if the door frame open switch 618' is disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned OFF (disconnected), the door frame 5 will remain in the state of being released from the body frame 3. Even if the frame release switch 619' is broken and the switch is turned OFF (disconnected), the body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2. FIG. In this way, even if normally open switches are used for the door frame open switch 618' and the body frame open switch 619', the main frame door open signal can be output to the main control board 4100 even when the wire is broken. An outer end frame door open information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 .

[11-2-3(c). Circuit to which output power failure warning signal from power failure monitoring circuit is input]
A transmission line for transmitting a power outage warning signal output from a power outage monitoring circuit 4100e provided in the main control board 4100 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR40 whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR40 via PR41. The base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the resistor PR41, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR42, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor PTR40 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC40 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40A) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 4120a. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR40 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a as the payout power failure warning signal.

A circuit composed of resistors PR41, PR42, and transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a payout power failure warning signal from a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e provided in the main control board 4100. FIG.

As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of the two voltages of +12 V and +24 V from the power supply board 851, and when the power failure or momentary power failure signs are detected, the reset function is disabled. A payout power failure notice signal is output to the payout control board 4110 as a power failure notice via the main control output circuit 4100cb. The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e monitors the +12V and +24V voltages for signs of power failure or momentary power failure, and as described above, the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, and the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When both conditions of the large condition are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 4110 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. While the payout power failure warning signal is input to the payout control board 4110, either the condition that the voltage of +24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf or the condition that the voltage of +12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf When the condition is established, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 described above through the wiring (harness), and the output power failure warning signal whose logic becomes HI. is input to the payout control board 4110 .

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the voltages of +12V and +24V. Occasionally, since a payout power outage warning signal whose logic is LOW is input to the payout control board 4110, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, thereby turning off the transistor PTR40. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the +5V side by resistor PR43. As a result, the payout power outage notice signal whose logic is HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a.

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of +12V and/or +24V. When there is a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 4110, so that the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40. The voltage applied to the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 to turn on the transistor PTR40, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the payout power outage warning signal in which the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a.

Thus, when there is a sign of power failure or instantaneous power failure of the voltage of +12V and/or +24V, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a, When there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the +12V and +24V voltages, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. This is because, as described above, when there is a sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the voltage of +12V and/or +24V, a power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. On the other hand, when there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the voltages of +12V and +24V, the power failure warning signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. The logic of the payout power failure notice signal input to the payout control MPU 4120a and the logic of the power failure notice signal input to the main control MPU 4100a are the same logic.

[11-2-3(d). Circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank switch is input]
A detection signal from the full tank switch 550 provided in the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. is entered. The output terminal of this full tank switch 550 is circuit-configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line in the payout control board 4110. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a and electrically connected to the first terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank switch. This three-terminal filter PIC50 for a full-tank switch is a T-type filter circuit, magnetically shielded with ferrite, and has excellent attenuation characteristics.

The second terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank switch is grounded (GND), and the third terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank switch is connected to the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank switch via a resistor PR44b. and the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via a resistor PR45. As a result, the detection signal of the full tank switch 550 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 after noise components are removed in the full tank switch three-terminal filter PIC50. The base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the resistor PR45, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46 whose one end is grounded (GND), and is electrically connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the electrically connected capacitor PC40. Capacitor PC40 plays a role as a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR47 having one end electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC40 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40B) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the MPU 4120a. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR41 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a as a full tank signal.

A circuit composed of the resistors PR45, PR46 and the transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by a detection signal from the full-tank switch 550. FIG.

The full tank switch 550 detects whether or not the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 540 is full of stored game balls, as described above. In this embodiment, when the storage space is not filled with stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank switch 550 is applied via the handle relay terminal plate 192 and the power supply board 851 to pay out. In the control board 4110, a signal pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and the logic becomes HI is input to the payout control board 4110, while the accommodation space is filled with the stored game balls, The voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank switch 550 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 4110 via the handle relay terminal plate 192 and the power supply board 851, and a signal whose logic becomes LOW is paid out. It is input to the control board 4110 .

When the storage space is not filled with stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank switch 550 is pulled in the payout control board 4110 via the handle relay terminal plate 192 and the power supply board 851. A signal pulled up to the +12V side by the up resistor 44a and having a logic HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41, thereby turning on the transistor PTR41 and also turning on the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the full tank signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a.

On the other hand, when the housing space is full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank switch 550 is applied to the handle relay terminal plate 192 and the power supply board 851, and the payout control board 4110. , the signal pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41, thereby turning off the transistor PTR41 and also turning off the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor PR47, and the full tank signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a.

In this embodiment, the detection signal from the full-tank switch 550 is input to the switch circuit composed of the resistor PR45, the resistor PR46, and the transistor PTR41 via the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full-tank switch. However, the detection signals from various detection switches such as the ball-off switch 750, the counting switch 751, and the rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. It has a circuit configuration in which it is directly input to each switch circuit without going through. Since the full tank switch 550 is provided in the foul cover unit 540 attached to the door frame 5, the ball cut switch 750, the count switch 751, and the rotation angle switch 752 provided in the ball prize device 740 attached to the main body frame 3 , etc., the path for transmitting the detection signal is extremely long, and is extremely susceptible to noise.

The full tank switch 550 detects whether or not the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 540 is full of stored game balls. Based on the detection signal, when it is determined that the storage space is full of stored game balls, the drive control of the payout motor 744 is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of game balls by the payout rotator. It is supposed to be done. In other words, when noise enters the transmission path (transmission line) for transmitting the detection signal from the full-tank switch 550, the payout control MPU 4120a drives the payout motor 744 even though the storage space is not filled with game balls. In some cases, the control is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of game balls by the payout rotating body, and the payout motor 744 is driven and controlled even though the storage space is full of stored game balls. When the game balls are filled up to the upstream side of the winning ball passage by rotating the payout rotor and continuing the payout of the game balls, the payout rotor itself cannot rotate and the payout motor 744 is activated. An abnormal load may be applied, causing the payout motor 744 to become overloaded, resulting in abnormal heat generation and failure, or failure of the mechanism or the like that transmits the rotating shaft of the payout motor 744 to the rotary motion of the payout rotating body. . Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, a circuit configuration is adopted in which the noise component of the detection signal from the full-tank switch 550 is first removed by the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full-tank switch. .

[11-2-3(e). Circuit to which the operation signal from the operation switch is input]
The first and second output terminals of the operation switch 860a are grounded (GND), and the third and fourth output terminals of the operation switch 860a are pulled to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 via a resistor PR49. The base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the preceding stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR49, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR50 whose one end is grounded (GND). The fourth terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 860a, is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, and is also electrically connected to the ground (GND) at one end and the other end of the capacitor PC41. ing. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR51, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 via a resistor PR52. The base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR52, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR53, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR54, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40C) without inverting it.). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. By turning ON/OFF the transistors PTR42 and PTR43 in the preceding stage and the subsequent stage, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage changes, and the signal is the RWMCLR signal input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. is entered in

The third and fourth output terminals of the operation switch 860a are pulled up to +5 V by a pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 via a resistor PR49. It is pulled up to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 through a resistor PR55. The base terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the resistor PR55, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR56, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 via wiring (harness). Incidentally, when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR2 electrically connected to the power supply line. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR44 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a as a RAM clear signal.

A circuit composed of a pull-up resistor PR48 and a capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the operation switch 860a is pressed, the contact forming the operation switch 860a repeats ON/OFF for a short time, which is a flapping phenomenon. It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the operation switch 860a caused by .

A circuit composed of resistors PR49, PR50 and transistor PTR42 is a switch circuit in the previous stage, a circuit composed of resistors PR52, PR53 and transistor PTR43 is a switch circuit in the latter stage, and resistors PR55, PR56 and transistor PTR44 are switched. is a switch circuit, which is turned on/off by an operation signal from the operation switch 860a.

As described above, the operation switch 860a is set to the RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control board 4110 and the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. It is operated to clear the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM), or to cancel the error when an error is reported after the power is turned on. A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, and to cancel an error after the power is turned on (after a period of time during which the RAM is cleared, that is, after a predetermined period has passed since the power was turned on). It has a function and The operation signal from the operation switch 860a is a RAM clear signal in the function of clearing the RAM within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. ), it becomes an error cancellation signal.

When the operation switch 860a is not operated, the 3rd and 4th terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 860a, are pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. The voltage is input to the base terminal of PTR42 to turn on the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on. When the voltage applied is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, the transistor PTR43 in the latter stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the latter stage is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic has become HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a. The payout control MPU 4120a performs RAM clear for erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. It is determined that the error is not instructed, and error cancellation is performed when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on). It is judged that it is not instructive.

Further, when the operation switch 860a is not operated, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 860a, are pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the operation signal whose logic becomes HI is generated by the transistor PTR44. , the transistor PTR44 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness), and the RAM clear signal whose logic becomes LOW is sent to the main control board 4100. is entered. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives a RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, as described above. is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is raised to the +5V side by the resistor MR5, and the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. The main control MPU 4100a judges that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, it is not an instruction to perform RAM clear for erasing information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 860a is operated, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 860a, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the operation signal whose logic becomes LOW is output to the transistor in the previous stage. The voltage is input to the base terminal of PTR42 to turn off the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned off. When the voltage applied is pulled up to +5V by the resistor PR51, the transistor PTR43 in the latter stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the latter stage is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic has become LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a. The payout control MPU 4120a performs RAM clear for erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. After the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW, the error is cleared. It is judged to be an instruction.

Further, when the operation switch 860a is being operated, the third terminal and the fourth terminal, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 860a, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48. A signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 to turn off the transistor PTR44, thereby turning off the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A clear signal is input to the main control board 4100 . The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives a RAM clear signal whose logic is HI within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, as described above. is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. The main control MPU 4100a determines that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, it is an instruction to perform RAM clear for erasing information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

[11-2-3(f). A circuit to which the payout contact signal from the touch switch is input]
A detection signal (contact signal 1) from the touch switch 516 provided in the handle device 500 shown in FIG. 7 is input to the payout control board 4110 via the power supply board 851 as shown in FIG. The output terminal of the touch switch 516 is circuit-configured as an open-collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and as shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR57a which is connected to the resistor PR57b, and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR45 via the resistor PR57b. The base terminal of the transistor PTR45 is electrically connected to the resistor PR57b, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR57c whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR45 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR45 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR57d, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC40 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40D) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA6 of the input port PA of the MPU 4120a. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR45 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR45, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA6 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a as a payout connection signal.

A circuit composed of resistors PR57b, PR57c, and transistor PTR45 is turned ON/OFF by a payout contact signal in which a detection signal (contact signal 1) from the touch switch 516 provided in the handle device 500 is input via the power supply board 851. It is a switch circuit.

As described above, the touch switch 516 is a capacitive switch that detects whether or not a palm or a finger is in contact with the rotary handle main body front 506, and has an open collector output. The touch switch 516 is turned ON when the palm or fingers are in contact with the front rotary handle body 506 , and turned OFF when the palm or fingers are not in contact with the front rotary handle body 506 . When the front 506 of the rotating handle body is touched by the palm or fingers, the touch switch 516 is turned on as described above, and the collector terminal of the transistor of the touch switch 516 is grounded because the touch switch 516 is an open collector output. (GND) side, the logic of the detection signal (contact signal 1) from the touch switch 516 becomes LOW, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor WTR3 shown in FIG. 22 is also pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor WTR3 is turned off, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor WTR3 is applied to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor PR57a in the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 through the wiring (harness). is input to the payout control board 4110. On the other hand, when the front 506 of the rotary handle body is not touched by the palm or fingers, the touch switch 516 is turned OFF as described above. As a result, since the touch switch 516 is an open collector output, the collector terminal of the transistor of the touch switch 516 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor WR0 of the wasteful strike prevention circuit 857c, so that the touch switch 516 can be detected. The logic of the signal (contact signal 1) becomes HI, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor WTR3 shown in FIG. 22 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor WR0. When the voltage applied to the collector terminal is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 4110 via the wiring (harness), the payout contact signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the payout control board 4110.

When the front 506 of the rotating handle body is touched by a palm or a finger, a payout contact signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 4110, so this payout connection signal is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR45. The voltage is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor PR57a to turn on the transistor PTR45, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR45 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the payout contact signal in which the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR45 is LOW is input to the input terminal PA6 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a. The payout control MPU 4120a determines (distinguishes) that the front 506 of the rotary handle body is touched by the palm or fingers when the logic of the payout contact signal input to the input terminal PA6 is LOW, and notifies the main control board 4100 of this fact. tell to Note that the main control board 4100 notifies the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 11 that the front 506 of the rotary handle body is being touched by the palm or fingers.

On the other hand, when the palm or finger is not in contact with the front 506 of the rotating handle main body, a payout contact signal whose logic is LOW is input to the payout control board 4110, so this payout connection signal is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR45. As the applied voltage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, the transistor PTR45 is turned off, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR45 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor PR57d. As a result, the payout contact signal whose logic is HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR45 to the input terminal PA6 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a. The payout control MPU 4120a determines (determines) that the front 506 of the rotating handle body is not touched by the palm or fingers when the logic of the payout contact signal input to the input terminal PA6 is HI. tell to Note that the main control board 4100 notifies the peripheral control board 4140 that the front 506 of the rotary handle main body is not touched by the palm or fingers.

[11-2-3 (g). A circuit to which the payout right-handed signal from the launch control circuit of the power supply board is input]
The payout right hitting signal from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 12 is input to the payout control board 4110 from the firing control circuit 857a provided in the power supply board 851 through the right hitting signal output circuit (not shown) provided in the power supply board 851. . The output terminal of the right-handed signal output circuit is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and as shown in FIG. is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR57e electrically connected to , and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR46 via the resistor PR57f. The base terminal of the transistor PTR46 is electrically connected to the resistor PR57f, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR57g whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor PTR46 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR46 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR57h, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC40 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40E) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the MPU 4120a. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR46 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR46, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a as a payout right-handed signal.

A circuit composed of resistors PR57f, PR57g, and transistor PTR46 is turned ON/ON by a payout right-handed signal output from a firing control circuit 857a provided on the power supply board 851 via a right-handed signal output circuit (not shown) provided on the power supply board 851. It is a switch circuit that turns off.

As described above, the firing control circuit 857a adjusts the rotation position θ of the rotary handle front 506 to the right setting position (100 degrees (100 degrees )) When it is determined (determined) that the above rotation operation is performed, a right-handed hitting signal is output to the payout control board 4110 as a payout right-handed signal to convey that a right-handed game is being played. This output is output through a right-handed signal output circuit (not shown), and is an open collector output. When the firing control circuit 857a determines (distinguishes) that the rotational position θ of the rotary handle main body front 506 is rotated to the right setting position (100 degrees (100°)) or more, as described above, the right The collector terminal of the transistor of the hitting signal output circuit is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 4110 through the wiring (harness), so that the payout right hitting signal whose logic is LOW is input to the payout control board 4110. On the other hand, when the firing control circuit 857a judges (determines) that the rotational position θ of the rotary handle front 506 is not rotated beyond the set position (100 degrees (100°)), it outputs a right-handed signal (not shown). In the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110, the collector terminal of the transistor of the circuit is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line and the other end of the pull-up resistor PR57e. A payout right-handed signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 4110 by being electrically connected to and pulled up to the +12V side.

When the firing control circuit 857a determines (distinguishes) that the rotation position θ of the front 506 of the rotating handle body is turned to the right setting position (100 degrees (100°)) or more, the logic becomes LOW. Since the right hitting signal is input to the payout control board 4110, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR46 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side by this payout right hitting signal, thereby turning the transistor PTR46 OFF. The voltage applied to the collector terminal is pulled up to the +5V side by resistor PR57h. As a result, a payout right-handed signal whose logic is HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR46 to the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a. The payout control MPU 4120a determines (determines) that a right-handed game is being played when the logic of the right-handed payout signal input to the input terminal PA7 is HI, and notifies the main control board 4100 of that effect. The main control board 4100 informs the peripheral control board 4140 that the game is being played by hitting to the right.

On the other hand, when the firing control circuit 857a determines (distinguishes) that the rotational position θ of the rotary handle front 506 has not been rotated beyond the set position (100 degrees (100°)) to the right, the logic becomes HI. Since the right-handed payout signal is input to the payout control board 4110, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR46 by the right-handed payout signal is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor PR57e, and the transistor PTR46 is turned on. , the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR46 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the payout right-handed signal in which the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR46 is LOW is input to the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a. The payout control MPU 4120a determines (distinguishes) that the right-handed game is not being played (that is, the left-handed game is being played) when the logic of the right-handed payout signal input to the input terminal PA7 is LOW, This is communicated to main control board 4100 . The main control board 4100 notifies the peripheral control board 4140 that the right-handed game is not being played (that is, the left-handed game is being played).

[11-2-4. Dispensing motor drive circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 4120d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 5 will be described. As shown in FIG. 30, the payout motor drive circuit 4120d is mainly composed of a voltage switching circuit 4120da and a drive ICPIC60. The power supply input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 4120da are electrically connected to the +12V power line and the +5V power line, respectively, and +12V and +5V are applied, respectively, and the ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4120da is connected to the ground (GND). Grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to a power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4120da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, and is output from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4120da. It is designed to be The power supply output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4120da is electrically connected to the third terminal and the tenth terminal, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, through a Zener diode PZD60, and is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout motor 744. , and +12 V or +5 V is applied as the motor drive voltage to the cathode terminal of the drive ICPIC 60 through the Zener diode PZD 60 based on the voltage switching signal input to the voltage switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4120da. It is supplied to the terminal and the tenth terminal, respectively, and also supplied to the payout motor 744 .

The drive ICPIC 60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In this embodiment, the emitter terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, 6th terminal and 7th terminal, are grounded (GND) respectively, and the base terminal of the drive ICPIC 60 is grounded. A payout motor drive signal is input to certain 1st, 5th, 8th and 12th terminals via resistors PR60 to PR63. The 2nd, 4th, 9th and 11th terminals that are the collector terminals of the drive ICPIC 60 are connected to the 1st, 5th, 8th and 12th terminals that are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, respectively. Correspondingly, when the payout motor drive signal is input to the 1st terminal, 5th terminal, 8th terminal, and 12th terminal, which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively, the excitation signal A certain drive pulse is output to each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) corresponding to the payout motor 744, respectively. This payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, and the drive ICPIC 60 is output from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function via resistors PR60 to PR63. Outputs are made to base terminals 1, 5, 8 and 12, respectively. These drive pulses are generated by switching exciting currents flowing through the phases (/B phase, B phase, A phase, and /A phase) of the payout motor 744 to rotate the payout motor 744 . When the driving pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) is interrupted by this switching, a back electromotive force is generated. If this back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC 60, the drive ICPIC 60 will be damaged. Therefore, as a protection, the Zener diode PZD0 is electrically connected to the front stage of the 3rd and 10th terminals, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC 60. A circuit configuration that

[11-2-5. CR unit input/output circuit]
Next, a CR unit input/output circuit 4120e for inputting/outputting various signals to/from the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 13 will be described. The payout control board 4110 receives the ball rental request signal BRDY and the one-time payout operation start request signal BRQ from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 as described above. , is supplied, and a predetermined voltage VL (+12 V) and ground LG created from AC 24 V supplied from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. Through the terminal plate 869, an EXS signal to inform that one payout operation has started or ended, and a PRDY signal to inform that the payout operation for paying out the rental balls is possible or impossible. and output As shown in FIG. 31, the input/output circuit for inputting/outputting these various signals and the like is mainly composed of photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (which incorporate an infrared LED and a phototransistor).

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. A cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 . A resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned ON, while the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. Sometimes, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via the resistor PR71. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of PTR71. The collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71, and is also electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR73, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line.

The base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR74, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR75 having one end electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is a non-inverting buffer. 26 through ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80A) without inverting it.). is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a shown in FIG. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR70 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70, and the signal is input as the CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU4120a.

On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is not only electrically connected to the resistor PR72, but also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR76 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 851 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 851 via a wiring (harness), one end of the power supply board 851 is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. is electrically connected to the other end of the The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR71 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71, and the signal is input to the power substrate 851 as a CR connection signal.

A circuit composed of resistors PR71, PR74, and transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by turning on/off the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, thereby turning on the transistor PTR70 and the switch circuit. It turns ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR70 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU4120a. be.

A circuit composed of resistors PR72, PR76 and transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned on/off by turning on/off the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, thereby turning on the transistor PTR71 and the switch circuit. It turns ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply substrate 851 through the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic is LOW is input to the power supply substrate 851. be.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR71 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the power supply substrate 851 through the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the power supply substrate 851. be done.

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77. BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. A resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON while the photo When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. there is The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR78, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80B) without inverting it.). It is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a. By turning ON/OFF the photocoupler PIC71, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU4120a as the BRDY signal.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the BRDY signal whose logic has become LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU4120a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. , The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR78, and the BRDY signal whose logic has become HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU4120a. Thus, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is the same as the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6. FIG.

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71, but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79. BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. A resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON while the photo When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. there is The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR80, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80C) without inverting it.). It is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a. When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 changes, and the signal is input as the BRQ signal to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC72 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the BRQ signal whose logic has become LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU4120a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. , The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal whose logic has become HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU4120a. Thus, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is the same logic as the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6. FIG.

An EXS signal indicating the start or end of one payout operation from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a is output to the payout control output circuit without reset function 4120cb, and is output to the payout control output circuit without reset function. 4120cb is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR82, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. A resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, EXS output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a through the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function When the logic of the signal is LOW, while the photocoupler PIC73 is ON, +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a When the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of through the payout control output circuit without reset function 4120cb is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded with the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is connected to the CR unit 6 through the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 by the pull-up resistor PR83. is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. The ON/OFF of the photocoupler PIC73 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73, and the signal is input to the built-in controller of the CR unit 6 as EXS.

When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, EXS output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a through the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the EXS whose logic is LOW becomes the CR unit. 6 is input to the built-in controller. On the other hand, when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, the output is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a through the payout control output circuit without reset function 4120cb. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned OFF, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the logic becomes HI. The resulting EXS is input to the built-in controller of the CR unit 6 . In this way, the logic of the EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit without reset function 4120cb. It has the same logic.

The PRDY signal, which indicates that the payout operation for paying out the rental balls from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a is possible or not, is sent via the resistor PR84 to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74. is entered in The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR85, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. A resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, PRDY output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a through the payout control output circuit without reset function 4120cb When the logic of the signal is LOW, while the photocoupler PIC74 is ON, +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a When the logic of the PRDY signal that is output from the output terminal of through the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded with the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is connected to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 by the pull-up resistor PR86. is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. By turning ON/OFF the photocoupler PIC74, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as PRDY.

When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, PRDY output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a through the payout control output circuit without reset function 4120cb When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the PRDY whose logic is LOW is the CR unit. 6 is input to the built-in controller. On the other hand, when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, the output is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a through the payout control output circuit without reset function 4120cb. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86, and the logic becomes HI. The resulting PRDY is input to the built-in controller of the CR unit 6 . In this way, the logic of the PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the same as the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a through the payout control output circuit without reset function 4120cb. It has the same logic.

[11-2-6. Various input/output signals to payout control MPU]
Next, various input/output signals input/output from input/output terminals of various input/output ports of the payout control MPU 4120a will be described.

As shown in FIG. 26, the RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 4120a, receives the serial data from the main control board 4100 as the main payment serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 4120b. be done. On the other hand, from the TXD terminal, which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, the serial data to be sent to the main control board 4100 is sent as the payer serial data transmission signal to the payout control output circuit without reset function 4120cb. A payout serial data transmission signal is transmitted to the main control board 4100 from the payout control output circuit without reset function 4120cb.

Each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a is connected to the above-described RWMCLR signal, payout power failure warning signal, door open signal, full tank signal, various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection signal 1, etc.), etc., etc.), for example, the main payment ACK signal from the main control board 4100, which indicates the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal, is sent via the payout control input circuit 4120b. Also, detection signals from the ball-out switch 750, the counting switch 751, the rotation angle switch 752, etc. shown in FIG.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, the above-mentioned EXS signal and PRDY signal are output to the payout control output circuit without reset function 4120cb, and the EXS signal and the PRDY signal are output from the payout control output circuit without reset function 4120cb. The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input/output circuit 4120e, the voltage switching signal is output to the payout control output circuit with reset function 4120ca, and the voltage switching signal is sent from the payout control output circuit with reset function 4120ca to the voltage switching circuit 4120da. Alternatively, the payout motor drive signal is output to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, and the payout motor drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function to the payout motor 744 via the payout motor drive circuit 4120d. In addition, for example, the payout control output circuit 4120ca outputs a payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function to send a payout ACK signal indicating the completion of normal reception of the main payment serial data reception signal to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function. Output the ACK signal to the main control board 4100, or output the drive signal of the error LED indicator 860b shown in FIG. For example, output to the error LED indicator 860b.

[11-3. Various input/output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input/output signals between the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100 and various output signals from the payout control board 4110 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG.

[11-3-1. Various input/output signals with the main control board]
The payout control board 4110 exchanges various input/output signals with the main control board 4100 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 32(a), the payout control board 4110 controls the above-described payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, etc. is output to the main control board 4100 . These output signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100. FIG.

On the other hand, the payout control board 4110, in addition to the above-described main payout serial data reception signal, main payout ACK signal, and operation signal (RAM clear signal), 15-round big-hit information output signal, 2-round big-hit information output signal, etc. Jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, starting entrance winning information output signal etc. Game information signal and payout power outage notice A signal or the like is input from the main control board 4100 . These input signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 of the payout control board 4110.

[11-3-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 4110 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 32(b), in addition to the above-described outer end frame door open information output signal, a prize ball number information output signal indicating the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 744 is displayed. , From the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, in addition to jackpot information output signals such as 15 round jackpot information output signal and 2 round jackpot information output signal, information output signal during probability fluctuation, special symbol display information output game information signals such as signals, normal symbol display information output signals, time saving medium information output signals, and starting opening winning prize information output signals, etc., are output to the external terminal board 784 . These output signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 .

A signal output from the external terminal plate 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a game hall (not shown), and the hall computer monitors the games played by the players. When the 15-round big-hit information output signal or the 2-round big-hit information output signal is output to the hall computer as one big-hit information output signal, the hall computer outputs the number of big hits with two rounds (2-round big-hit number of occurrences) and the number of big wins with 15 rounds (occurrence number of 15 round big wins) is the number of big wins of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加Therefore, since the hall computer cannot grasp the number of occurrences of the 2-round big win and the number of occurrences of the 15-land big win from the total number of big wins, the actual number of big wins occurring in the pachinko game machine 1 is large. However, it is not possible to grasp whether it is a 2-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot. A data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko game machine 1, and some players refer to the number of occurrences of the jackpot game state displayed on the data counter to decide whether or not to play the game. Some choose.

However, the number of occurrences of the big win game state displayed on the data counter may actually be biased toward the number of occurrences of the two-round big win, so even when the player starts playing, only the two-round big wins occur. Sometimes the 15 round jackpot doesn't happen easily. In this way, the number of occurrences of the big win game state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, but may unnecessarily stir up the gambling spirit of the player.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, by separately outputting the 15 round big win information output signal and the 2 round big win information output signal as the big win information output signal to the hall computer, the hall computer can output the number of occurrences of the 2 round big win, The number of 15-round big hits and the number of occurrences can be accurately grasped. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the number of big wins that actually occurred in the pachinko game machine 1 was the 2-round big win or the 15-round big win. Since the number of occurrences of the round big win and the number of occurrences of the 2nd round big win can be separately displayed or only the number of occurrences of the 15 round big win can be displayed as the number of occurrences of the big win game state, it is possible to arouse the gambling spirit of the players more than necessary. Nor.

In the present embodiment, the 2-round big win information output signal is output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence of the 2-round big win to the end of the 2-round big win, and the 15-round big win information output signal is also in the state where the 15-round big win occurs. It is in a state of being output to the hall computer during the period from generation to termination. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round big win information output signal and the 15-round big win information output signal to the hall computer as in the present embodiment, for example, when a 2-round big win occurs, the 2-round big win information output signal is output for a predetermined period. The 2-round big win information output signal and the 15-round big win information are output to the hall computer, and when the 15-round big win occurs, the 15-round big win information output signal is outputted to the hall computer for a predetermined period. A method of outputting the output signal to the hall computer only for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[12. Various commands related to transmission and reception of the main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, FIG. 34 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and FIG. is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 34, and FIG. 36 is a table showing an example of various commands received by the main control board from the payout control board. First, the prize ball command, which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, will be described, followed by various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and received by the main control board. Various commands from the payout control board will be explained.

[12-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives detection signals from various winning switches such as the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020, the upper starting opening switch 3022, the lower starting opening switch 2109, and the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. Upon input, based on these detection signals, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In this embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicate with the pachinko game machine 1 and drive the payout motor 744 of the pachinko game machine 1 (prize ball device 740) to drive the upper tray 301 or the storage tray. When the lower tray 302 is electrically connected to a device that pays out game balls as rental balls (such a pachinko game machine is called a "CR machine"), as shown in FIG. In the prize ball command transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110, command 10H to command 1EH ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared, and one prize ball is prepared at command 10H. Command 11H designates 2 prize balls, . . . , Command 1EH designates 15 prize balls. The payout control board 4110 controls to drive the payout motor 744 and pay out the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device that directly pays out game balls to the upper tray 301 and the lower tray 302, which are storage trays, as rental balls) are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall). When the game machine 1 and the ball lending machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko game machine is called a "general machine"), payout is performed from the main control board 4100 as shown in FIG. 33(b). Commands 20H to 2EH are prepared as prize ball commands to be transmitted to the control board 4110. Command 20H designates one prize ball, command 21H designates two prize balls, and so on. 2EH specifies 15 prize balls. The payout control board 4110 controls to drive the payout motor 744 and pay out the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

As a command common to CR machines and general machines, a command 30H is prepared as shown in FIG. 33(c), and this command 30H specifies a self-check. If an ACK signal output from the receiving side as confirmation of receipt of the command is not input for a predetermined period after the command is transmitted, the transmitting side transmits the command 30H and checks whether or not the ACK signal is input. Check connection status. In the case of the CR machine in this embodiment, the payout control board 4110 checks the connection state with the CR unit 6 .

[12-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a mode showing variations of effects having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

Various commands, as shown in FIGS. classified into display and others.

[12-2-1. Special figure 1 synchronization production related]
The special figure 1 tuning effect relation is based on the detection signal from the upper start port switch 3022 shown in FIG. 11, and as shown in FIG. Regarding the upper special symbol display device 1185, it is composed of commands named special figure 1 synchronization production start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 synchronization production end, and state designation at the time of fluctuation. These various commands are assigned a status of "A*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The special figure 1 synchronization production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronization production with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the special pattern 1 specification command specifies loss, specific jackpot, and non-specific jackpot. , Toku-zu 1 synchronization production end command is intended to indicate the end of Toku-zu 1 synchronization production, the state designation command at the time of fluctuation indicates the probability and time saving state.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 synchronization production start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 fluctuation, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol 1 synchronization production start, Special figure 1 synchronization The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 fluctuation time elapses (at the time of special symbol 1 determination), and the state designation command at the time of fluctuation is transmitted immediately after the special symbol win-loss information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

[12-2-2. Special Figure 2 Synchronization Production Related]
The special figure 2 tuning effect related is based on the detection signal from the lower start switch 2109 shown in FIG. 11, and as shown in FIG. Regarding the lower special symbol display device 1186, it is composed of commands named special figure 2 synchronization production start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 synchronization production end. These various commands are assigned a status of "B*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The special figure 2 synchronization production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronization production with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the special pattern 2 specification command specifies loss, specific jackpot, and non-specific jackpot. , The end of the special figure 2 synchronization production is intended to instruct the end of the special figure 2 synchronization production.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 2 fluctuation, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special figure 2 tuning effect, special figure 2 tuning The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 fluctuation time elapses (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[12-2-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in FIG. 34, the categories related to big wins include big win opening, big win 1 open Nth time display, big win 1 closed display, big win 1 count display, big win ending, big win pattern display, small win opening. , small-hit open display, small-hit count display, and small-hit ending commands. These various commands are assigned a status of "C*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The jackpot opening command instructs the start of the jackpot opening, and the N-th display command for opening the jackpot 1 is the start of the jackpot 1 opening in the 1st to 16th rounds (shown in FIG. 8, the attacker unit 2100 During the N-th round opening or opening of the large winning gate 2103, the large winning gate 1 closed display command instructs the opening of the large winning gate 2103 during the closing of the large winning gate 1 between rounds (the large winning gate 2103 of the attacker unit 2100) 2103 during closing or closing start), and the large winning opening 1 count display command indicates that 0 to 10 counts have been counted (detected by the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. 11, The number of game balls entering the big winning opening 2103) is transmitted, the big winning ending command instructs the start of the big winning ending, and the big winning pattern display command instructs the big winning pattern information display. be.

In addition, the small winning opening command is for instructing the start of the small winning opening, and the small winning opening display command is the starting of the small winning opening (during opening or opening of the large winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 at the time of the small winning) start), and the small hit count display command is a small hit middle and large winning opening winning effect production), and the small-hit ending command instructs the start of the small-hit ending.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the jackpot opening command is sent at the start of the jackpot opening, and the big win opening 1 open N-th display command is when the big win opening 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds (the large number of the attacker unit 2100). When the winning opening 2103 is opened for the Nth round), the large winning opening 1 closing display command is transmitted when closing the large winning opening 1 (starting closing of the large winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100), and the large winning The mouth 1 count display command is when the big winning mouth 1 is opened and the count changes to the big winning mouth 1 (when the big winning mouth 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened and the game ball entering the big winning mouth 2103 counts switch 2110), the jackpot ending command is sent when the jackpot ending starts, and the jackpot symbol display command is sent when the jackpot is opened (when the jackpot 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened). be.

Further, the small win opening command is transmitted at the start of the small winning opening, and the small winning opening display command is transmitted at the time of opening the small winning (when the big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened at the time of the small winning). The hit count display command is transmitted when the small hit middle big winning opening is won (when the game ball entering the big winning opening 2103 is detected by the count switch 2110 during the small winning), and the small winning ending command is Sent at the start of the jackpot ending. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[12-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 34, the category of power-on consists of various commands named power-on. This power-on command is assigned a status of "D*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The power-on command instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, the start of the effect when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 is operated when the power is turned on as shown in FIG. 12). instructions).

As the transmission timing of the power-on command, it is transmitted at times other than RAM clear and RAM clear at power-on of the main control board. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, and when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 is operated when the pachinko game machine 1 is restored from a power failure or an instantaneous power failure, the main control side power-on processing described later is executed, and a power-on command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[12-2-5. Related to Futsuzu Synchronization Production]
The general pattern synchronization effect relation is based on the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. 11, and as shown in FIG. Consists of commands related to the instrument 1189, namely, normal pattern synchronization production start, normal pattern designation, general pattern synchronization production end, and change state designation. These various commands are assigned a status of "E*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The normal pattern synchronization production start command instructs the start of the general pattern synchronization production with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the general pattern specification command specifies a loss, a specific jackpot, and a non-specific jackpot. The figure synchronous production end command indicates the end of the normal figure synchronous production, and the state designation command at the time of fluctuation indicates the probability and the time saving state.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the general pattern synchronization production start command is sent at the start of normal pattern 1 fluctuation, the general pattern designation command is sent immediately after the general pattern synchronization production start, and the general pattern synchronization production end command is , It is transmitted when the normal pattern fluctuation time elapses (when the normal pattern is determined), and the state designation command at the time of fluctuation is transmitted immediately after the normal pattern win-loss information is designated. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[12-2-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
8, which is opened and closed by driving the starting solenoid 2105 shown in FIG. It is composed of commands named opening per figure, open display of general electrics, and ending per per figure. These various commands are assigned a status of "F*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The general pattern opening command instructs the start of the general pattern opening, and the general pattern opening display command indicates that the general pattern is open during opening (a pair of movable pieces 2106 are opened in the left and right direction by driving the start port solenoid 2105). It is intended to indicate the state or when to spread), and the ending command per normal pattern instructs the start of ending per normal pattern.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the normal per pattern opening command is transmitted at the start of per normal per pattern opening, and the general power open display command is transmitted at the time of normal power opening (a pair of movable pieces 2106 are driven by the start port solenoid 2105 When spreading in the left and right direction), the ending command per normal pattern is sent at the start of the ending per normal pattern. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[12-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 35, the classification of the notification display consists of commands named Winning Abnormal Display, Connection Abnormal Display, Disconnection/Short Circuit Abnormal Display, Magnetic Detection Switch Abnormal Display, Door Open, and Door Close. These various commands are assigned a status of "6*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The winning abnormality display command is issued when the game ball enters the big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 when the game ball enters the big winning opening except during the big winning (the condition device is in operation). When the count switch 2110 detects), the connection abnormality display command instructs the start of the winning abnormality notification, and the connection abnormality display command is, for example, the electrical connection in the path between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 When there is an abnormality, it instructs the start of connection abnormality notification. The magnetic detection switch abnormality display command instructs the start of the disconnection/short circuit abnormality display when the disconnection/short circuit of the electrical connection occurs. In this case, the start of the magnetism detection switch abnormality notification is instructed.

Further, the door opening command is based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input via the dispensing control board 4110 shown in FIG. When the door is in the open state, the door open notification is given. The door close command indicates that the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the body frame 3 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618. It instructs the end of the door open notification when it is in the state of being closed.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is transmitted when winning a large winning opening other than during the big hit (condition device is in operation), and the connection abnormality display command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110 It is sent when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 4110 at the time of command transmission to, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command is the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, the count switch 2110 etc. , is sent when any one of them is disconnected or short-circuited, the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is sent when an abnormality of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is detected, and the door open command is sent when the door is detected to be open (door frame open) Based on the detection signal from the switch 618, it is transmitted when the door frame 5 is open with respect to the body frame 3), and the door closing command is transmitted when the door closing is detected (from the door frame open switch 618). (when the door frame 5 is in a closed state with respect to the body frame 3) based on the detection signal of . These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[12-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 35, the state display is divided into commands named frame state 1, error cancellation navigation, and frame state 2. In FIG. These various commands are assigned a status of "7*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The frame state 1 command, the error cancellation navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 4110, and detailed descriptions thereof will be given later. When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives the frame state 1 command, the error cancellation navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, as shown in FIG. Along with setting the status, the received command is set as the mode as it is. That is, when the main control MPU 4100a receives the frame state 1 command, the error cancellation navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, the additional information "7*H" is added to these received commands. is formatted into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

The formatted frame state 1 command is transmitted when power is restored, when the frame state changes, and during error cancellation navigation, the error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during error cancellation navigation, and the frame state 2 command is transmitted when power is restored. , and when the frame state changes. Note that these formatted frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[12-2-9. test related]
As shown in FIG. 35, the test-related section consists of various commands named test. This test command is assigned a status of "8*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The test command instructs various tests of the peripheral control board 4140 (for example, the peripheral control section 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control section 4160, the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and the frame board shown in FIG. 14). Various substrates such as the decoration driving amplifier substrate 194 are inspected).

As for the transmission timing of the test command, it is transmitted at times other than the RAM clear when the main control board power is turned on and the RAM clear. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, and when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 is operated when the pachinko game machine 1 is restored from a power failure or an instantaneous power failure, the main control side power-on processing described later is executed, and a test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[12-2-10. others]
Other divisions include, as shown in FIG. 35, start-up winning, variable reduction operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect, and It consists of a command named special symbol 2 memory look-ahead effect. These various commands are assigned a status of "9*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The starting opening winning command is for instructing the start of starting opening winning effect, and when the game ball enters the upper starting opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022, the starting of the production and the lower Based on the detection signal from the starting port switch 2109, the start of the effect when the game ball enters the lower starting port 2102, and the command to specify the end of the variable shortening operation, from the variable shortening operation state. It instructs the state transition to the variable reduction non-operating state, the high probability end designation command instructs the state transition from the high probability state to the low probability state, and the special symbol 1 storage command is the special symbol 1 hold 0 to 4 (the number of balls that have not yet been used for special symbol fluctuation display on the upper special symbol display device 1185 of the function display board 1191 after the game ball enters the upper start port 2101 shown in FIG. 8 ( The number of reservations))), and the special symbol 2 storage command is 0 to 4 special symbols 2 reservations (the game ball enters the lower start port 2102 shown in FIG. 8 and the lower special of the function display board 1191 The symbol indicator 1186 transmits the number of balls (reserved number) that has not yet been used for the variable display of special symbols, and the normal symbol storage command is normally 1 reserved 0 to 4 (the gate shown in FIG. 8 The game ball passes through the part 2350 and the normal symbol display device 1189 of the function display board 1191 conveys the number of balls (reserved number) that is not yet used for the variable display of the normal symbol, and special symbol 1 memory prefetch effect Before the special symbol 1 reserve is used for the variable display of the special symbols in the upper special symbol display 1185 of the function display board 1191, the command is read ahead and displayed by the upper special symbol display 1185 based on the special symbol 1 reserve. The special symbol 2 memory prefetch effect command is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the lower special symbol display 1186 on the lower special symbol display 1186 of the function display board 1191. It is intended to instruct the start of the look-ahead effect to look ahead and notify the advance notice of the display result by the lower special symbol display device 1186 based on the special symbol 2 reservation.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the starting entrance winning command is set at the time of starting entrance winning (when the game ball enters the upper starting entrance 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper starting entrance switch 3022, or when the lower starting entrance switch 2109, the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the body frame 3 shown in FIG. 5 and the door frame shown in FIG. The change reduction operation end designation command is transmitted from the speaker 130 provided in 5 mainly to notify that effect by voice, and the command to specify the end of the fluctuation reduction operation is issued at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation reduction has been completed the specified number of times. later), and the high probability end designation command is sent at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation is confirmed after the high probability number of times in the case of "high probability N times" (after the stop period has passed), special symbol 1 The memory command is stored when the special symbol 1 operation hold ball number changes (a game ball enters the upper start port 2101 and is not yet used for special symbol fluctuation display on the upper special symbol display device 1185 of the function display board 1191). When a game ball enters the upper starting port 2101 and the number of reservations increases in a state where there is a number, or when the number of reservations is increased, the number of reservations is used for the variable display of special symbols on the upper special design display device 1185 from the number of reservations. is reduced), and the special symbol 2 storage command is transmitted when the number of special symbol 2 operation pending balls changes (a game ball enters the lower start port 2102 and the lower special symbol display 1186 of the function display board 1191 In a state where there is a reserved number that has not yet been used for the variable display of special symbols, when a game ball enters the lower start port 2102 and the reserved number increases, or from the reserved number, the lower special symbol display 1186 is displayed. When the reserved number is reduced by using the variable display of the special design, the normal design storage command is sent when the number of the normal design 1 operation reserved balls changes (the game ball passes through the gate section 2350 and the function display board 1191 normal symbol display device 1189, when there is a reserved number that has not yet been used for variable display of normal symbols, when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2350 and the reserved number increases, or from the reserved number When the reserved number is decreased by using the pattern display device 1189 for variable display of normal patterns, the special symbol 1 memory prefetch effect command is sent when the number of special symbol 1 operation reserved balls increases (at the upper start port 2101 When the game ball enters and the number of reservations increases), the special symbol 2 memory prefetch effect command is sent when the number of special symbol 2 operation reservation balls increases (the game ball enters the lower start port 2102). It is sent when the ball is played and the number of holds increases). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

By the way, as described above, the starting opening winning command is issued at the time of starting opening winning (when a game ball enters the upper starting opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022, or from the lower starting opening switch 2109). When the game ball enters the lower start port 2102 based on the detection signal of ), the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 mainly by voice Although it is transmitted to notify that effect, how the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 14 utilizes the starting entrance winning command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine. For example, in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in addition to notifying by voice from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, the presence or absence of fraud is monitored. It is designed to be used for On the other hand, in other pachinko game machines, the speakers housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers provided in the door frame 5 simply receive the start winning command by the peripheral control board 4140 . There is also a specification that does not notify by voice from 130.

[12-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 4110 received by the main control board 4100 will be described.

Various commands from the payout control board 4110, as shown in FIG. The order of priority is set in the order of frame state 2.

The frame state 1 command includes out of ball, full tank, stock of 50 or more, abnormal connection and CR unconnected. A value of 1 is set, bit 1 (B1) is set to a value of 1 when the tank is full, bit 2 (B2) is set to a value of 1 when in stock of 50 or more, and bit 3 (B3) is set to a value of connection failure. 1 is set, and the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) when CR is not connected. Bits 5 (B5) through 7 (B7) of the Frame State 1 command have a value of 1 in B5, a value of 0 in B6, and a value of 0 in B7.

Error cancellation navigation commands are prepared for sphere detection, count switch error, and retry error. Bit 2 (B2) is set to 1 for sphere detection, and bit 3 (B3) is set for count switch error. It is set to 1, and a retry error sets bit 4 (B4) to the value 1. Here, "counting switch error" indicates whether or not the counting switch 751 shown in FIG. 12 is malfunctioning. A "retry error" indicates that an inconsistent game ball was repeatedly put out by a retry operation. Bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the error cancellation navigation command have value 0 for B0, value 0 for B1, value 0 for B5, value 1 for B6, A value of 0 is set in B7.

Frame state 2 commands are prepared during ball extraction, during handle operation, and during right-handed hitting. Bit 0 (B0) is set to 1 during ball extraction, and bit 1 (B1) is set during handle operation. A value of 1 is set, and bit 2 (B2) is set to a value of 1 when hitting right. Bits 3 (B3) through 7 (B7) of the Frame State 2 command have a value of 0 in B3, a value of 0 in B4, a value of 1 in B5, a value of 1 in B6, and a value of 0 in B7. Note that "during steering wheel operation" indicates that the palm or fingers are in contact with the front 506 of the rotary handle main body shown in FIG. It is intended to convey the message. In other words, when the frame state 2 command does not include "steering", the state in which the palm or fingers are not in contact with the rotary handle body front 506 is transmitted, and the frame state 2 command includes "right hitting". When the game is not played, the right-handed player is notified that the game is not being played (that is, the left-handed player is playing a game).

As transmission timings for these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted at power restoration, frame state change, and error cancellation navigation, the error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during error cancellation navigation, and the frame state 2 command is transmitted at the time of error cancellation navigation. is sent when power is restored and when frame status changes. For example, the frame state 2 command is the stage when the player sits on the front surface of the pachinko game machine 1 and touches the front rotary handle main body 506 with the palm or fingers, and the front rotary handle main body 506 is still being rotated. When the rotational position of the front 506 of the rotating handle main body has not reached the right-handed set position (that is, the stage where the left-handed game is started), B1 is notified of the state of "handle operation". While a value of 1 is set, B2 is set to a value of 0 and transmitted to notify that the player is not in the state of "right-handed" (that is, a state in which the player is playing a left-handed game). In order to start a right-handed game from a left-handed game, the front rotary handle main body 506 is rotated, and the rotational position of the front rotary handle main body 506 changes to the right-handed position described above. When the set position is reached, the value 1 is set in B1 to transmit the state "steering", and the value 1 is set in B2 to transmit the state "right-handed". be. Incidentally, these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process described later.

[13. Various control processing of the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 11 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 39. FIG. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing an example of main control side power-on processing, FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 37, and FIG. 39 is an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flow chart showing. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, followed by the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on processing, and the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a jackpot determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state, and a jackpot determination initial value determination for use in determining the initial value of the jackpot determination random number Random number for use, reach determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate reach (reach loss) when not generating a jackpot gaming state, and upper special symbol display 1185 and lower special shown in FIG. A random number for the variation display pattern for use in determining the variation display pattern of the special symbols to be variably displayed on the symbol display device 1186, and the upper special symbol display device 1185 and the lower special symbol display device 1186 when generating the jackpot game state. A jackpot pattern random number for use in determining the jackpot pattern to be derived and displayed, a jackpot pattern initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial value of the jackpot pattern random number, and when generating a small win game state A small hit symbol random number for use in determining the small hit symbol derived and displayed by the upper special symbol display device 1185 and the lower special symbol display device 1186, and a small hit symbol for use in determining the initial value of this small hit symbol random number. Random numbers for initial value determination for symbols are prepared. In addition to these random numbers, the random number for determining whether or not to open and close the movable piece 2106 shown in FIG. A random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit to be used, and a random number for normal symbol variation display pattern for use in determining the variation display pattern of the normal symbol to be variably displayed on the normal symbol display device 1189 shown in FIG. 11, etc. are provided.

For example, the counter for updating the random number for judging a big hit is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range ranging from the minimum value to the maximum value (in this embodiment, the minimum value is 0 to the maximum value is 32767). The range from the minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by adding 1 each time the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is performed. This counter counts up from the initial value determination random number for big hit determination toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the random number for determination of the initial value for big win determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter update method is called an "initial value update type counter". The random number for determining the initial value for judging a big win can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process of drawing one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the random number for judging a big win. In addition, the normal symbol hit determination random number and the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number described above are the same as the method of updating the big hit determination random number described above.

In the present embodiment, when the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, as described above, the initial value for determination of the jackpot determination The random number is updated by executing the initial value lottery process. In the power-on process, the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 4100a shown in FIG. When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, such as when it does not match the stored checksum value (sum value) in the power failure processing (power failure), the initial value for jackpot judgment is determined The random number for use is always the same from the fixed numerical range of the counter that retrieves the ID code from the non-volatile RAM that the main control MPU 4100a shown in FIG. An initial value derivation process for deriving a fixed value is executed, and the derived fixed value is set. That is, the random number for determining the initial value for judging a big hit is always overwritten with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value deriving process. In this way, the value to be set to the initial value determination random number for judging a big hit is derived using an ID code, and is stored in a non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 4100a by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 4100a. The first security measure is that once the code is stored, the ID code cannot be rewritten using an external device. A second security measure of deriving the same fixed value by using two security measures is taken to prevent analysis.

Here, the advantage of taking out the ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a and using the taken out ID code as the random number for determining the initial value for judging a big hit will be described. For example, a person who illegally obtains game balls to be paid out as prize balls obtains the game board 4 by some means, disassembles it, and uses the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter that is obtained illegally and updates the random number for judging a big hit coincides with the judging value for a big hit, the ID code is given a unique code for identifying the individual. Therefore, it is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a' provided in the other game board 4'. In other words, on the other game board 4', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the big-hit judgment random number and the big-hit judgment value match is completely different from that of the obtained game board 4.例文帳に追加In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 4 is completely useless in the other game board 4', that is, in the other pachinko game machine 1', so it is disassembled and analyzed. Even if an instantaneous power failure is generated at each predetermined interval obtained and a game ball is entered into the upper start port 2101 or the lower start port 2102 shown in FIG. A game state cannot be generated.

[13-2. Movement of initial value update type counter]
In the initial value update type counter, when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM (when clearing the RAM), the main control MPU 4100a takes out the ID code from the built-in non-volatile RAM, and based on this taken out ID code An initial value deriving process is executed to always derive the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for judging a big hit, and the derived fixed value is set. In the first cycle, the initial value update type counter counts up from this fixed value to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value to the fixed value. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for judging a big hit, one value is selected from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for judging a big hit as a random number for determining the initial value for judging a big hit. An initial value lottery process is executed, and the value obtained by this lottery is set. In the second cycle, the initial value update type counter counts up from the value obtained by lottery to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value to the value obtained by lottery. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for judging a big hit, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained by this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter is set. , as the third cycle, the value obtained by lottery is counted up toward the maximum value. In this embodiment, as the range of the jackpot determination value (jackpot determination range), a value of 32668 to a value of 32767 is set for a low probability. 32767 is set, and is read from the determination table at the time of probability change. In this embodiment, the counter for updating the random number for judging a big hit updates a predetermined fixed numerical range ranging from 0 as the minimum value to 32767 as the maximum value. In other words, the range of the jackpot judgment value (jackpot judgment range) is the middle value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in both the low probability and the high probability. is set.

Here, as the range of the jackpot determination value (jackpot determination range), a value of 10 to 209 is set at a low probability, and a value of 10 to 339 is set at a high probability. The value range (jackpot determination range) is set to the range closer to the minimum value from the middle value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value for both low probability and high probability. . In such a case, the period from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes value 0 to the time when it becomes the first value 10 in the range of the jackpot determination value (jackpot determination range), and this value 10 When comparing the period from the next value 11 to the maximum value (value 32767), the former period has a much lower probability of being selected by the initial value lottery process than the latter period. In other words, the range from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes value 0 to the final value (value 209 at low probability, value 339 at high probability) in the range of jackpot determination values (jackpot determination range) and the range from the value next to this last value (value 210 for low probability, value 340 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767). The probability of being selected by the initial value lottery process is extremely low compared to the range. Then, for example, by illegally acquiring the timing at which the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 by some method and irradiating radio waves toward the upper starting port 2101 and the lower starting port 2102, the game ball starts upward. If a fraudulent act is performed by pretending that the ball has entered the opening 2101 or the lower starting opening 2102, the value of the initial value update type counter becomes one of the jackpot determination value ranges (jackpot determination range). It can be said that the probability is high.

On the other hand, as in this embodiment, the range of the jackpot determination value (jackpot determination range) is between the low probability and the high probability. If it is set to a range close to the maximum value, the value of the initial value update type counter will be the first value in the range of the jackpot judgment value (jackpot judgment range) from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes value 0 The period until the value (low probability value 32667, high probability value 31767) and the period from the first value (low probability value 32668, high probability value 31768) to the maximum value (value 32767) , the former period has a much higher probability of being selected by the above-described initial value lottery process than the latter period. In other words, the value before the first value in the range of the jackpot determination value (jackpot determination range) from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes value 0 (value 32667 at low probability, value 31767 at high probability) and the range from the first value (value 32668 for low probability, value 31768 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767), the former range is better than the latter range. The probability of being selected by the initial value lottery process is extremely high. Then, the initial value update type counter has a range from the value 0 to the value before the first value in the range of the jackpot judgment value (jackpot judgment range) (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability). Among them, one of the values will be the value selected by the initial value lottery process and will be set to the above-described random number for determining the initial value for judging a big hit, so from the value obtained by this lottery toward the maximum value. It counts up, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the value obtained by lottery. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for judging a big hit, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained by this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter is set. , the value obtained by lottery will be counted up toward the maximum value.

In other words, as in the present embodiment, the range of the jackpot determination value (jackpot determination range) is either low probability or high probability, the middle value between the minimum value and the maximum value (value 16384) to the maximum value side If it is set to a range close to , the value (low The period until the value 32667 in probability and the value 31767 in high probability is irregular and rich in randomness. As a result, for example, by illegally acquiring the timing at which the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 by some method and irradiating radio waves toward the upper starting port 2101 and the lower starting port 2102, the game ball can move upward. Even if a fraudulent act pretending to have entered the starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102 is performed, the value of the initial value update type counter is within the range of the jackpot determination value (jackpot determination range). It can be said that the probability of obtaining a value is low.

Note that the initial value update type counter is repeatedly updated within the range from the minimum value to the maximum value. From the initial value to the minimum value (first value) of the jackpot judgment value range (jackpot judgment range) until the counter reaches the minimum value (first value) of the jackpot judgment value range (jackpot judgment range) in the second cycle The required time is time T0. In the third cycle from time T0, the time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (first value) of the range of the jackpot determination value (jackpot determination range) is time T1, and time T1 is shorter than time T0. . In the 4th cycle from time T1, the time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (first value) of the range of jackpot determination values (jackpot determination range) is time T2, and time T2 is shorter than time T1. . In this way, in the initial value update type counter, by giving fluctuations to the time when the updated counter reaches the minimum value (first value) of the range of jackpot determination values (jackpot determination range) (periodicity are excluded) so that they are not detected by the player.

[13-3. Main control side power-on processing]
When the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 performs main control side power-on processing as shown in FIGS. When this main-control-side power-on process is started, the main control MPU 4100a sets a stack pointer (step S10). The stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or a temporary return address of this routine when returning to this routine after terminating a subroutine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S10, the initial address is set in the stack pointer, and from this initial address, the register contents, return address, etc. are stacked on the stack. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

Following step S10, output of a power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e shown in FIG. 24 is started (step S11). The power outage monitoring circuit 4100e is composed of a comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, and a D-type flip-flop MIC22. A comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, compares +24V with a reference voltage or +12V with a reference voltage, and outputs the comparison results. The result of this comparison is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, with logic HI when no power failure or momentary power failure has occurred. Its logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. In step S11, output of a power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is started. This power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC, via the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function, with the logic LOW from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a. be done. As a result, the main control MPU 4100a can release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. It is possible to invert and output from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal, and to monitor the signal from the 1Q terminal.

After step S12, wait timer processing 1 is performed (step S12), and it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S14). The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or momentary power failure (phenomenon in which power supply is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops, and when it becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage during the period from when the power is turned on until it rises to the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S12 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the blackout warning voltage after the power is turned on and is stabilized. ms) is set. In step S14, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input. This determination is made based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, as the power failure warning signal.

In step S14, if the power failure warning signal is not input even after waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage after the power is turned on and stabilized, the power failure clear signal is output to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Stop (step S15). Here, the power failure clear signal is sent from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a to the logic HI level, and passes through the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC. is entered in Thereby, the main control MPU 4100a can set the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to the latch state. When the D-type flip-flop MIC22 latches the state in which the PR terminal, which is its preset terminal, is LOW in logic, it outputs a power failure warning signal from the 1Q terminal, which is its output terminal.

Following step S15, it is determined whether or not the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 12 is operated (step S16). This determination is based on the logic of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110. When the logic of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is HI, it is determined that the RAM clear is not instructed. If the logic of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is LOW, it is determined that the operation switch 860a is instructed to clear the RAM, and the operation switch 860a is operated. determine that there is

When the operation switch 860a is operated in step S16, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S18), while when the operation switch 860a is not operated in step S16, the RAM clear notification flag A value of 0 is set in RCL-FLG (step S20). This RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM".) This is a flag indicating whether or not to erase information, and is set to a value of 1 when game information is erased and a value of 0 when game information is not erased. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S18 and S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 4100a.

After step S18 or step S20, wait timer process 2 is performed (step S22). In this wait timer process 2, it waits until the system for drawing control of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 by the liquid crystal and sound control section 4160 of the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 14 is activated (booted). In this embodiment, 2 seconds (s) is set as the time until booting (boot timer). As described above, the mobile terminal 470 received by the player at the hall reception is placed in the concave portion 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. When the power is restored, the information indicating that the mobile terminal 470 is placed in the recess 314d is transmitted as a control signal from the communication control circuit 4162a shown in FIG. 4150 is input to a peripheral control various parallel I/O port 4150ag of a peripheral control MPU 4150a. The peripheral control MPU 4150a to which this control signal is input controls the communication control circuit 4162a by outputting the control signal from the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 4150ag to the communication control circuit 4162a. Communication initial setting is performed for exchanging each information (various data, various commands) by radio in both directions. Therefore, in the wait timer process 2 of step S22, it waits until the system for controlling drawing of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the portable terminal 470 by the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 of the peripheral control board 4140 is activated (booted). However, the time set as the time until booting (boot timer) is set to the time to wait until the system that performs drawing control of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 described above starts up (boots). It is the same time as 2 seconds (s).

Following step S22, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S24). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased, and is set to a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 in step S24, that is, when the game information is not erased, a checksum is calculated (step S26). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the total.

Following step S26, whether or not the calculated checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (at power-off) described later. (step S28). If they match, it is determined whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S30). This backup flag BK-FLG stores and retains game backup information such as game information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG value in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power failure processing described later. It is set to a value of 1 when the main-control-side power-off process has been completed normally, and set to a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off process has not been completed normally.

When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S30, ie, when the main control side power failure processing is normally completed, the work area of the main control built-in RAM is set as when the power is restored (step S32). In this setting, in addition to setting the backup flag BK-FLG to 0, the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the main control MPU 4100a (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), and this power recovery The hour information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, "recovery of power" refers to the state in which the power is turned on after the power has been cut off, the state in which the power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure, and the state in which the high frequency radiation is detected and reset. It also includes the state after which it has returned.

After step S32, power-on command creation processing is performed (step S34). In this power-on command generation process, game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to this game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S24, that is, when game information is erased, or when the checksum value (sum value) does not match in step S28 , or when the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0) in step S30, that is, when the main control side power failure processing is not normally completed, clear the entire area of the main control built-in RAM ( step S36). Specifically, the value 0 is written into the main control built-in RAM (a predetermined value may be read from the main control built-in ROM and set as the initial value). In addition, the main control MPU 4100a normally performs processing when game information is erased because the logic of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a instructs RAM clearing, when the sum values do not match, or when the power supply to the main control side is cut off. When the game has not ended yet, the unique ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is taken out, and based on this taken out ID code, the random number for judging a big hit is updated always from the fixed numerical range of the counter. An initial value derivation process for deriving a fixed value is performed, and this fixed value is set as the initial value determination random number for determining the big hit to be used for determining the initial value of the above-described random number for determining the big win.

Following step S36, the work area of the main control built-in RAM is set as initial setting (step S38). For this setting, the initial information is read from the main control built-in ROM and this initial information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S38, RAM clear notification and test command generation processing are performed (step S40). In this RAM clear notification and test command creation processing, a power-on command classified into power-on shown in FIG. 35 for performing various inspections of the control board 4140 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

After step S34 or step S40, interrupt initialization is performed (step S42). This setting is to set the interrupt period when the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 ms.

After step S42, interrupt permission setting is performed (step S44). By this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed at the interrupt period set at step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

Following step S44, a value A is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S46). The watchdog timer is cleared by setting value A, value B and value C in this watchdog timer clear register WCL in this order.

After step S46, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S48). As described above, when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is cut off, power failure or momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure forecast voltage, a power failure forecast signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e as a power failure forecast. The determination in step S48 is made based on this power failure warning signal.

If there is no power failure warning signal input in step S48, a non-hit/fall random number update process is performed (step S50). In this non-hit-lose random number update process, the above-described ready-to-win determination random numbers, variable display pattern random numbers, big-hit symbol initial value determination random numbers, small-hit symbol initial value determination random numbers, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-hit-lose random number update process, the random numbers that are not related to the hit-lose determination (big hit determination) are updated. Incidentally, the above-described random number for normal symbol hit determination, random number for normal symbol hit determination initial value determination, normal symbol variation display pattern random number, etc. are also updated by this non-hit-lose random number update process.

After step S50, the process returns to step S46 to set the value A in the watchdog timer clear register WCL. In step S48, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. For example, non-win-lose random number update processing is performed in step S50, and steps S46 to S50 are repeatedly performed. The processing of steps S46 to S50 is called "main control side main processing".

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S48, interrupt prohibition is set (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed, preventing writing to the main control built-in RAM and protecting the game information from being rewritten.

After step S52, output of a power failure clear signal is started (step S53). Here, the same processing as the processing for starting to output the power failure clear signal in step S11 is performed. As a result, the main control MPU 4100a can release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

Following step S53, the starter solenoid 2105, the attacker solenoid 2108, the upper special symbol indicator 1185, the lower special symbol indicator 1186, the upper special symbol storage indicator 1184, and the lower special symbol storage indicator 1187 shown in FIG. , normal symbol display device 1189, normal symbol memory display device 1188, game state display device 1183, round display device 1190 and the like are stopped (step S54).

Following step S54, a checksum is calculated and the calculated value is stored (step S56). This checksum is calculated by considering the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, as numerical values.

Following step S56, the backup flag BK-FLG is set to 1 (step S58). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Following step S58, clear setting of the watchdog timer is performed (step S60). This clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, as described above.

After step S60, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the watchdog timer is not cleared because the value A, value B, and value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL. As a result, the main control MPU 4100a is reset, and thereafter the main control MPU 4100a performs the main control side power-on process again. The processing of steps S52 to S60 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power failure processing".

The pachinko game machine 1 (main control MPU 4100a) is reset when there is a power failure or momentary power failure, and the main control side power-on processing is performed by the subsequent restoration of power.

In step S28, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control internal RAM is normal. are inspecting. In this way, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control internal RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information has been stored by a fraudulent act.

[13-4. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, main control side timer interrupt processing will be described. This main-control-side timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed for each interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIGS. 37 and 38 .

When the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the value B to the watchdog timer clear register WCL as shown in FIG. 39 (step S70). At this time, in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the value B is set following the value A set in step S46 of the main control side power-on processing (main control side main processing).

After step S70, the interrupt flag is cleared (step S72). The interrupt period is initialized by clearing the interrupt flag, and the next interrupt period is counted from the initial value.

After step S72, switch input processing is performed (step S74). In this switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 4100a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 shown in FIG. 2103 detection signal from count switch 2110 shown in FIG. 11 for detecting a game ball that has entered the upper starting port switch shown in FIG. 11 for detecting a game ball that has entered the upper starting port 2101 shown in FIG. A detection signal from 3022, a detection signal from the lower starting port switch 2109 shown in FIG. 11 for detecting a game ball entering the lower starting port 2102 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. 11 for detecting game balls, a detection signal from the magnetism detection switch 3024 for detecting cheating using a magnet shown in FIG. A payer ACK signal from the payout control board 4110 indicating that the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 11 has normally received the prize ball command is read and stored as input information in the input information storage area. In addition, the detection signal from the upper start port switch 3022 that detects the game ball that entered the upper start port 2101, the detection signal from the lower start port switch 2109 that detects the game ball that entered the lower start port 2102 are read respectively. 35 corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. That is, when there is a detection signal from the upper starter switch 3022, the corresponding starter winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and when there is a detection signal from the lower starter switch 2109, A starting entry winning command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area.

In this embodiment, detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 for detecting game balls entering the general winning openings 2104 and 2201, and a count switch 2110 for detecting game balls entering the big winning opening 2103 are used. A detection signal from, a detection signal from the upper start port switch 3022 that detects a game ball that has entered the upper start port 2101, a detection signal from the lower start port switch 2109 that detects a game ball that has entered the lower start port 2102 , and the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the gate section 2350 are read first when this switch input process is started, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has passed, , respectively are read again for the second time. Then, the result of the second reading is compared with the result of the first reading. It is determined whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again for the third time, and the result of the third reading is compared with the result of the second reading. It is determined again whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again for the fourth time, and the result of the fourth reading is compared with the result of the third reading. It is determined again whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the result is the same, it is treated as if there is no entry of the game ball.

Thus, in the switch input process, the detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020, the count switch 2110, the upper starting opening switch 3022, the lower starting opening switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 are received from the first to third times. It is possible to avoid erroneous detection due to the effects of chattering, noise, etc. Therefore, the reliability of the detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020, 3020, the count switch 2110, the upper starting opening switch 3022, the lower starting opening switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 can be improved.

Subsequent to step S74, timer subtraction processing is performed (step S76). In this timer subtraction process, for example, according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric auditors control process described later, the time when the upper special symbol indicator 1185 and the lower special symbol indicator 1186 are lit, the normal symbol and In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1189 lights up according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the normal electric accessory control process, the payout control board 4110 normally receives various commands sent by the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). time management such as ACK signal input judgment time set as a judgment condition when judging whether or not the payer ACK signal for notifying that it has been received is input. Specifically, when the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the variation time is subtracted by 4 ms. When the subtraction result becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S76, win-lose random number update processing is performed (step S78). In this hit-lose random number update process, the above-described random number for judging a big hit, random number for a big hit design, and random number for a small hit design are updated. In addition to these random numbers, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol, which is updated in the non-win/lose random number update process of step S50 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for small winning symbols is also updated. The random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol are updated in the main control side main process and this main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, thereby enhancing the randomness. . On the other hand, since the random number for judging a big hit, the random number for a big hit pattern, and the random number for a small hit pattern are random numbers related to the judging (big hit judging), each counter is updated only each time this random number update process is performed. counts up.

For example, the counter that updates the random number for judging a big hit is, as described above, an initial value update type counter that has a predetermined fixed numerical range ranging from the minimum value to the maximum value (in this embodiment, the minimum value is 32767) as a value from 0 to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by adding 1 each time this main control side timer interrupt processing is performed. The random number for determining the initial value for judging a big hit is counted up to the maximum value (value 32767), and then the random number for determining the initial value for judging a big hit is counted up from the minimum value (value 0). When the counter for updating the random number for judging a big win finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for judging a big win, the random number for determining the initial value for judging a big win is updated by the random number updating process. The random number for determining the initial value for judging a big win can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process of drawing one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the random number for judging a big win. Incidentally, the above-described normal symbol hit determination random number and normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number are also updated by this win/lose random number update process. The normal symbol hit determination random numbers and the like are the same as the above-described method of updating the big hit determination random numbers, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In this embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for determining the big hit, the random number for determining the initial value for the big winning symbol, and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol are set to the main control side power-on processing (main control side main processing), and the win-lose random number update process of step S78 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine. If the number of executions of the non-hit-lose random number update process in step S50 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the next interrupt timer occurs due to unevenness in the processing time , the random number for determining the initial value for determining the big hit, the random number for determining the initial value for the big winning symbol, and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol may be updated only in the non-win/lose random number update process of step S50.

Following step S78, prize ball control processing is performed (step S80). In this prize ball control process, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, a prize ball command shown in FIG. A self-check command shown in FIG. Then, the generated prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 4110 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big winning hole 2103 shown in FIG. When the payer ACK signal, which informs that the payout control board 4110 has normally received the payout control board 4110, is not input within a predetermined time, a self-check command for checking the connection state between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 is created. and transmit it to the payout control board 4110.

After step S80, frame command reception processing is performed (step S82). The payout control board 4110 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command) divided into state displays shown in FIG. In the frame command reception process of step S82, when these various commands are normally received as the payer serial data, information to notify the payout control board 4110 is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. . In addition, the command normally received as the payer serial data is formatted into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified by status display in FIG. 35 (frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame State 2 command)) is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S82, fraud detection processing is performed (step S84). In this fraudulent act detection process, an abnormal state regarding the prize balls is checked. For example, when the input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and the detection signal from the count switch 2110 is input when the game is not in the jackpot game state (when the game ball enters the big winning hole 2103), etc. 35 is created as an abnormal state, and stored as transmission information in the above-described transmission information storage area.

Following step S84, a special symbol and special electric accessory control process is performed (step S86). In this special symbol and special electric role product control process, the value of the counter for updating the above-mentioned big hit determination random number is extracted and it is determined whether or not it matches the big hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (big hit It is determined whether or not to generate a game state (referred to as "special lottery")), and the value of the counter for updating the random number for the big hit pattern is taken out and used as the probability variable hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It determines whether or not they match (determines whether or not to generate probability variation). Here, "probability change" means that the probability of winning a big hit changes to a high probability (probability variable time) set higher than the normal time (low probability). In this embodiment, as the range of the above-described jackpot determination value (jackpot determination range), a value of 32668 to a value of 32767 is set for a low probability. ~ value 32767 is set and read from the probability variation time determination table. Thus, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process of step S86, whether or not the value of the counter for updating the big hit determination random number and the big hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM match. When judging whether or not, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter for updating the big-hit judging random number is included in the big-hit judging range.

When these determination results are due to the upper starting port switch 3022, while creating various commands related to the special figure 1 tuning effect shown in FIG. To create various commands related to the special figure 2 tuning effect shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the upper special design indicator 1185 or the lower special design indicator 1186 is set so as to light the lower special design indicator 1186, and is stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when it becomes a big win game state, various commands (big win opening command, big win 1 open Nth time display command, big win 1 Closed display command, big win opening 1 count display command, jackpot ending command, and jackpot pattern display command) are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, or the opening and closing member 2107 shown in FIG. 8 is opened and closed. The drive signal output to the attacker solenoid 2108 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area. The output of the lighting signal to the 2nd round display lamp 1190a of the round indicator 1190 shown in FIG. In some cases, the output of the lighting signal to the 15th round indicator lamp 1190b of the round indicator 1190 shown in 89 is set so as to light up the 15th round indicator lamp 1190b, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area, or the probability fluctuation The output of a lighting signal to the gaming state display 1183 is set so that the presence or absence of occurrence of is lit in a predetermined color, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area.

Following step S86, a normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process is performed (step S88). In this normal symbol and normal electric accessary product control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the gate winning process is performed based on this input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. Based on the result of this determination, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the value of the counter for updating the random number for determining per normal symbol is extracted as gate information, and the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is extracted. memorize to

This gate information storage area has 0th to 3rd divisions (four divisions), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th division, 1st division, 2nd division, and 3rd division. It's like For example, if the gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, and the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the 3rd section of the gate information storage. do.

The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information in the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information in the second section of the gate information storage is stored in the first section of the gate information storage, and the gate information is stored in the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information in the third partition of the information storage is shifted to the second partition of the gate information storage, respectively, and the third partition of the gate information storage becomes a free area. For example, when gate information is stored in the first and second sections of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information of the first section is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two partitions is shifted to the first partition of the gate information storage, and the second partition of the gate information storage and the third partition of the gate information storage become empty areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first section to the third section of the gate information storage, the above-described gate information so that the total number of the stored gate information is used as a holding ball and the normal symbol storage display 1188 is lit. Based on this, the output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol storage indicator 1188 is set, and stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above.

Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the random number for determining per normal symbol is taken out from the read gate information and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value (referred to as "normal lottery"). Whether or not to open and close the movable piece 2106 is determined based on the determination result (lottery result by ordinary lottery). When the opening/closing operation is to be performed by this determination, the pair of movable pieces 2106 are expanded in the left-right direction so that the game ball can be received into the lower start opening 2102, which is advantageous to the player. It becomes a game state. The normal symbol variation display pattern corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern described above, and various commands classified into the normal symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. 34 are created and sent as transmission information. While storing in the transmission information storage area described above, set the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1189 so as to light the normal symbol display 1189 according to the determined normal symbol fluctuation display pattern, and set the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1189 as the output information Store in the output information storage area. Further, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for judging a normal symbol hit matches a normal hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric role performance shown in FIG. is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the output of the drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2105 is set so as to open and close the movable piece 2106, and stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when the value of the taken-out normal symbol per determination random number does not match the normal symbol per determination value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol is based on the above-described normal symbol variation display pattern random number. A variable display pattern is determined, various commands classified into the normal pattern synchronization effect shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the normal design indicator 1189 is set so as to light the normal design indicator 1189, and is stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above.

Following step S88, port output processing is performed (step S90). In this port output process, output information is read from the above-described output information storage area from output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 4100a, and various signals are output based on this output information. For example, based on the output information, from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU4100a, when the various commands from the payout control board 4110 is normally received, the main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 4110, or the jackpot In the game state, a drive signal is output to the attacker solenoid 2108 that opens and closes the opening/closing member 2107 of the big winning opening 2103, and a drive signal is output to the starter solenoid 2105 that opens and closes the movable piece 2106. 2, 15-round jackpot information output signal, 2-round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, information output information during time saving, start winning prize information output signal, etc. Various information (game information) signals regarding the game are output to the payout control board 4110 .

Following step S90, peripheral control board command transmission processing is performed (step S92). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information includes various commands classified into special figure 1 tuning effect related, shown in FIG. Commands, various commands classified as related to jackpot, various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to general pattern synchronization effects, various commands classified as related to normal electric role effects, shown in FIG. Various commands classified into notification display, various commands classified into status display, various commands classified into test-related commands, and various commands classified into others are stored. One packet of the main circumferential serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data includes a status indicating a command type having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status and a sum value calculated by considering the mode as a numerical value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

Following step S92, a value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S94). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL in step S94, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value B set in step S70. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

After step S94, the register is switched (restored) (step S96), and this routine ends. Here, when the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started, the main control MPU 4100a stacks the contents of the general-purpose register on the stack and saves it. This prevents destruction of the contents of the general-purpose registers used in the main processing on the main control side. In step S96, the contents saved in the stack are read and written to the original register. It should be noted that the main control MPU 4100a sets interrupt permission after returning in step S96.

[14. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 to 56. FIG. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when power is turned on for the payout control unit, FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the processing when power is turned on for the payout control unit in FIG. 40, and FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing an example of a payout control unit timer interrupt process, FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing an example of a rotation angle switch history creation process, and FIG. 45 is a sprocket. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing an example of a fixed position determination skip process, FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing an example of a ball sticking determination process, and FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing an example of a prize ball stock number addition process. 48 is a flow chart showing an example of processing for adding the stock number of prize balls for rent, FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing an example of stock monitoring processing, and FIG. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing an example of the payout setting process, FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing an example of the ball catching action setting process, FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing an example of the retry action monitoring process, and FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing an example of error cancellation operation judgment processing, FIG. 2 is a timing chart showing input signal confirmation processing (a) of .

First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be explained, followed by payout control unit timer interrupt processing, ball removal switch operation determination processing, rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball bite determination processing, award Ball stock number addition processing, rental ball stock number addition processing, stock monitoring processing, payout ball gripping operation determination setting processing, payout setting processing, ball gripping operation setting processing, retry operation monitoring processing, inconsistency Counter reset determination processing and error cancellation operation determination processing will be described. In addition, ball removal switch operation determination processing, rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball catching determination processing, prize ball stock number addition processing, rental ball stock number addition processing, stock The monitoring process, the put-out ball grip operation determination setting process, the retry operation monitoring process, the inconsistency counter reset determination process, and the error cancellation operation determination process are one of the main operation setting processes in step S562 in the payout control unit power-on process described later. Rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball catching determination processing, retry operation monitoring processing, mismatch counter reset determination processing, error cancellation operation determination processing, prize ball stock number for prize balls The order of priority is set in the order of addition processing, stock number addition processing for rented balls, stock monitoring processing, and processing for setting determination of motion determination for putting out balls.

[14-1. Dispensing control unit power-on processing]
When the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 performs the payout control unit power-on process as shown in FIGS. When this payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode sets the priority of the interrupt of the payout control MPU 4120a. In this embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing described later is set as the highest priority, and when an interrupt of this payout control unit timer interrupt processing occurs, the processing is performed preferentially.

Following step S500, input/output setting (input/output setting of I/O) is performed (step S502). In the input/output setting of this I/O, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU 4120a are set.

After step S502, wait timer processing 1 is performed (step S506), and it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or momentary power failure (phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops, and when it becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage, the power failure warning is sent from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. A warning signal (withdrawal blackout warning signal) is input. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage after the power is turned on until it rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal (output power failure warning signal) is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100 . Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the blackout warning voltage after the power is turned on and stabilized. ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on a power failure warning signal (withdrawal power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100. FIG.

After step S508, it is determined whether or not the operation switch 860a is operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logic of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a. When the logic of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is HI, it is determined that the instruction to clear the RAM is not given. On the other hand, if the logic of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is LOW, it is determined that the operation switch 860a is being operated by judging that it is instructing to clear the RAM.

When the operation switch 860a is operated in step S512, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to 1 (step S514). The notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to 0 (step S516). This payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in a RAM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in RAM") built in the payout control MPU 4120a. For example, various flags and various information storage areas. Various information stored in the prize ball information storage area (for example, prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and stored in the CR communication information storage area PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set) is to be erased. are set to the value 0 when not cleared. Note that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 4120a.

Following step S514 or step S516, a setting is made to permit access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). With this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM can be performed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read.

Following step S518, a stack pointer is set (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or a temporary return address of this routine when returning to this routine after terminating a subroutine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. At step S520, the initial address is set in the stack pointer, and from this initial address, the register contents, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

Following step S520, it is determined whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to the value 1 when the payout information is erased, and to the value 0 when the payout information is not erased.

When the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 in step S522, that is, when the payout information is not erased, a checksum is calculated (step S524). This checksum is calculated by considering the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the total.

Following step S524, it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the later-described payout control unit power-off process (power-off) (step S526). . If they match, it is determined whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1 (step S528). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as payout information and checksum value is stored in the payout control built-in RAM in payout control unit power failure processing described later. It is set to a value of 1 when the control unit power failure processing is normally completed, and to a value of 0 when the payout control unit power failure processing is not completed normally.

When the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1 in step S528, that is, when the payout control unit power failure processing is normally completed, the work area of the payout control built-in RAM is set as power recovery (step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the value 0 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, the ROM built in the payout control MPU 4120a (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in ROM") Reads the information at the time of power recovery, and this Set the power recovery information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, various flags, which are the above-described payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various information stored in the various information storage area (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area) Ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc., and PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area, in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set, Information used for various processes is set based on payout information related to payout of mismatch counter reset determination time, etc., stored in the time management information storage area. Note that "recovery of power" includes not only the state in which the power is turned on after the power has been cut off, but also the state in which the power has been restored after a power failure or momentary power failure.

On the other hand, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S522, that is, when the payout information is erased, or when the checksum values do not match in step S526, or step When the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not 1 (is 0) in S528, that is, when the payout control unit power failure processing is not normally completed, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S532 ). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

Following step S532, the work area of the payout control built-in RAM is set as initial setting (step S534). For this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM and this initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S530 or step S534, interrupt initialization is performed (step S536). This setting is to set the interrupt period when the later-described payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

After step S536, interrupt permission setting is performed (step S538). Due to this setting, the interrupt period set in step S536, that is, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every 2 ms.

Following step S538, a value A is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared by setting value A, value B and value C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL in this order.

Subsequent to step S539, it is determined whether or not a power outage warning signal (withdrawal power outage warning signal) is input (step S540). As described above, when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is cut off, power failure or momentary power failure, when the voltage becomes below the power failure notice voltage, the power failure notice signal (withdrawal power failure notice signal) is output as the power failure notice to the main control board. 4100 is input from a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power failure warning signal.

If there is no power failure warning signal input at step S540, it is determined whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is at 1 (step S542). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms in a payout control unit timer interrupt process that is processed every 2 ms, which will be described later. set.

When the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0 in step S542, that is, when 2 ms has not elapsed, the process returns to step S540 to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal (withdrawal power failure warning signal) has been input.

On the other hand, when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 in step S542, that is, when 2 ms has elapsed, the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is set to 0 (step S544).

Following step S544, a value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

Following step S546, port output processing is performed (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU 4120a based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payout motor 744, payout motor 744, payout motor 744, and payout motor 744 Various information such as drive information for controlling the drive to the payout motor 744, information on the number of balls actually paid out, and LED display information displayed on the error LED display 860b are stored. Based on the output information, when various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, a payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 4100, or the payout motor 744, or output the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 744 to the external terminal plate 784 as a winning ball number information signal (in this embodiment, the payout motor 744 is actually 10 A winning ball information signal is output to the external terminal board 784 each time a game ball is paid out.), and a display signal is output to the error LED indicator 860b.

Following step S548, port input processing is performed (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the payout control MPU 4120a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, the operation signal of the operation switch 860a, the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752, the detection signal from the counting switch 751, the detection signal from the full tank switch 550, the BRQ signal from the CR unit 6, the BRDY signal and the CR connection signal, A main payment ACK signal or the like from the main control board 4100, which tells that the main control board 4100 has normally received various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described later, is read and stored as input information in the input information storage area.

After step S550, timer update processing is performed (step S552). In this timer update process, when determining whether or not the ball is caught by the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted, the ball sticking determination is set as the determination condition. Time, skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed, shown in FIG. The ball removal determination time, the full tank determination set as the determination condition when determining whether or not the storage space of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. 1 is full of stored game balls It is set as a judgment condition when judging whether or not the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 by the detection signal from the ball cut-out switch 750 is a predetermined number or more. In addition to performing time management such as the determination time of running out of balls, the discrepancy between the number of game balls received by the recess of the payout rotating body and paid out and the number of balls actually detected by the counting switch 751 is caused. Inconsistency counter reset judgment set as a judgment condition when judging whether or not to reset an inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not inconsistent game balls are repeatedly put out. Time management. For example, when the ball sticking determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 2 ms. becomes a value of 0, the ball sway judgment time is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the skip determination time is set to 22.75 ms, the ball empty determination time is set to 60060 ms, the full tank determination time is set to 504 ms, the dead ball determination time is set to 119 ms, and the mismatch counter reset determination time is set to 7000 seconds (about 2 hours). Each time this timer update process is performed, the ball removal determination time, full tank determination time, ball exhaustion determination time, and mismatch counter reset determination time are subtracted by 2 ms, and the result of the subtraction becomes 0. Accurately measures the time to determine whether the tank is empty, the time to determine whether the tank is full, the time to determine whether the ball has run out, or the time to determine whether the mismatch counter is reset. These various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the RAM with built-in payout control.

Following step S552, CR communication processing is performed (step S554). In this CR communication process, input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit 6 are input. judge. Based on various signals from the CR unit 6, the payout control MPU 4120a exchanges various signals with the CR unit 6. In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, various flags, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and various information stored in the various information storage areas etc. (for example, prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area Information to be used for various processes is set based on payout information related to payout such as PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the signal is set.

By this process, for example, even if there is an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. at the time of power restoration are stored as payout backup information. It is possible to restore the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. just before the momentary power failure or power failure. As a result, even if the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is executed and the payout operation cannot be continued due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the payout operation can be continued when power is restored. Therefore, the game balls can be paid out to the upper tray 301 and the lower tray 302 just enough. In other words, the payout control MPU 4120a exchanges various signals with the CR unit 6 in the CR communication process, and when game balls are being paid out to the upper tray 301 or the lower tray 302, momentary power failure or power outage causes CR Even if the exchange of various signals with the unit 6 is interrupted and game ball payout cannot be continued, prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC at the time of power restoration. etc. are restored to values such as prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. just before instantaneous power failure or power failure, stored as payout backup information. , the exchange of various signals between the pachinko game machine 1 (payout control MPU 4120a) and the CR unit 6 immediately before an instantaneous power failure or power failure can be continued from the time of power restoration, and the payout of game balls can be continued. It is possible.

In this way, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 4120a) and the CR unit 6 is restored to the state immediately before the momentary power failure or stop when the power is restored even if the momentary power failure or stop occurs. , and various signals from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 4120a) and the CR unit 6 do not change due to the influence of an instantaneous power failure or stoppage. Therefore, the reliability of exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 4120a) and the CR unit 6 can be enhanced.

Various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information as described above. In the CR communication process, when the power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530. If the PRDY signal output setting information read out by the lever is set to, for example, the logic state of the PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, the PRDY signal is put out control. Output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the MPU 4120a. Then, in, for example, a retry operation monitoring process that is performed as one process of the main operation setting process, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC in the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is included in the payout backup information to determine whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, and if the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal. That is, it is determined that the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state, the value 1 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, and the payout ball licking operation determination setting processing is performed. , as an error state output setting to the CR unit 6, for example, the logic state (LOW) of the PRDY signal that informs that the dispensing operation for dispensing the rental ball is impossible when the communication with the CR unit 6 is not in progress. is set as the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

As a result, in the CR communication process, the logic state of the PRDY signal is read out from the CR communication information storage area at the next timer interrupt after the power is restored, and the PRDY signal is sent to the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a. to the CR unit 6. In this way, for example, if the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state immediately before the momentary power failure, the state is restored when the power is restored. At an early stage, it is possible to output a PRDY signal to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, which informs that the payout operation for paying out the rental balls is impossible. It is possible to inform that the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the CR unit 6 from outputting BRDY, which is a useless ball rental request signal, at an extremely early stage after power is restored.

In addition, in the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and based on this CR connection signal, when the logic is HI, that is, the pachinko game When the machine 1 is powered on and the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 are electrically connected via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, the ball is paid out. In order to notify that the payout operation is possible, the logic state of the PRDY signal is set to HI and output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a. In other words, when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on and the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 are not electrically connected via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, the ball is rented. In order to notify that the payout operation for payout is impossible, the logic state of the PRDY signal is set to LOW and output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a. In addition, the logic state of the EXS signal that informs the start or end of one payout operation is stored as EXS signal output setting information in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the payout control board 4110 and A CR connection signal that tells whether or not the CR unit 6 is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

Following step S554, a full tank and out-of-ball check process is performed (step S556). In this full-tank and out-of-ball check process, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, the storage space of the above-described foul cover unit 540 is reserved by a detection signal from the full-tank switch 550. It is determined whether or not the tank is full of game balls, and the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number according to a detection signal from the ball-out switch 750. and determine whether or not For example, to determine whether or not the housing space of the foul cover unit 540 is full of stored game balls, the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms is used to check the full tank and run out of balls in this full tank switch. When the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is turned ON, and the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is turned OFF in the previous (2ms ago) full tank and bulb out check processing, that is, the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is turned ON from OFF. , the timing of the above-mentioned full tank determination time (504 ms) is started in the timer updating process of step S552. When the full-tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full-tank determination time comes, the full-tank and ball-out check process determines whether the detection signal from the full-tank switch 550 is ON. determine whether In this determination, when the detection signal from the full-tank switch 550 is ON, the above-described state information storage stores the full-tank information indicating that the storage space of the foul cover unit 540 is full of game balls. store in the area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full-tank switch 550 is OFF, the storage space of the foul cover unit 540 is not full with the stored game balls, and the full-tank information to that effect is stored in the state information storage area. .

Whether or not the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is also determined using the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms, and the balls are detected in the current full tank and ball exhaustion check processing. When the detection signal from the cut-off switch is ON, and the detection signal from the cut-out switch is turned OFF in the previous (2ms ago) full tank and cut-out check processing, that is, the detection signal from the cut-off switch 750 is turned ON from OFF. , the timing of the out-of-ball determination time (119 ms) described above is started in the timer update process of step S552. And when the ball out determination time becomes the value 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball out determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the ball out switch 750 is ON in this full tank and ball out check process determine whether In this judgment, when the detection signal from the ball-out switch 750 is ON, the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the prize-ball device 740 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, and the ball-out information to that effect is displayed. While stored in the information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball run-out switch 750 is OFF, the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 is not more than a predetermined number, and the ball run-out is transmitted. The information is stored in the state information storage area.

Following step S556, command reception processing is performed (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 (prize ball command and self-check command shown in FIG. 33) are received. When these various commands are normally received, payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when various commands can not be received normally, there is an abnormality in the connection between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 (abnormalities occur in various command signals). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

Following step S558, command analysis processing is performed (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S560, main operation setting processing is performed (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as prize balls, rental balls, ball extraction and ball catching are performed, retry operation is determined, and the number of unpaid balls (the number of prize balls in stock) is monitored. do.

Following step S562, LED display data creation processing is performed (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the above-described state information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator 860b of the payout control board 4110 is created, and stored as LED display information in the above-described output information storage area. Remember. For example, the out-of-ball information is read out from the state information storage area, and based on this out-of-ball information, when the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the winning ball device 740 is less than a predetermined number, the corresponding display data is displayed. (In this embodiment, display value 1 (number "1")) is created and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, command transmission processing is performed (step S566). In this command transmission process, various types of information are read out from the above-described state information storage area, and based on the various types of information, various commands (frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame State 2 command) is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100 . For example, when the out-of-ball information is read out from the state information storage area, based on this out-of-ball information, when the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the winning ball device 740 is less than a predetermined number, the frame state 1 command is issued. It is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100 .

Following step S566, a value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

Following step S568, the process returns to step S539 to set the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and in step S540 it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal (withdrawal power failure warning signal) has been input. If there is no notice signal (withdrawal power failure notice signal) input, it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1. When this 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, When 2 ms has passed, the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is set to 0 in step S544, the watchdog timer clear register HWCL is set to B in step S546, port output processing is performed in step S548, and port output processing is performed in step S550. Input processing is performed, timer update processing is performed in step S552, CR communication processing is performed in step S554, full tank and bulb out check processing is performed in step S556, command reception processing is performed in step S558, and command analysis is performed in step S560. Main operation setting processing is performed in step S562, LED display data creation processing is performed in step S564, command transmission processing is performed in step S566, value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, Steps S539 to S568 are repeated. The processing of steps S539 to S568 is called "payout control section main processing".

Depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 4100, the processing contents of the payout control unit main processing differ. Therefore, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU 4120a fluctuates. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU 4120a preferentially outputs to the main control board 4100 a payer ACK signal that indicates that various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 have been normally received. there is Thereby, the payout control MPU 4120a secures the processing time so as to sufficiently perform other processing that fluctuates.

On the other hand, when there is an input of a power failure warning signal (withdrawal power failure warning signal) in step S540, interrupt prohibition is set (step S570). Due to this setting, the later-described payout control unit timer interrupt processing is not performed, preventing writing to the payout control built-in RAM and protecting the rewriting of the payout information described above.

After step S570, the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is stopped (step S574). As a result, the payout of game balls is stopped.

Following step S574, clear setting of the watchdog timer is performed (step S60). This clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, as described above.

Following step S576, a checksum is calculated and the calculated value is stored (step S578). This checksum is calculated by considering the payout information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, as numerical values.

After step S578, the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is set to 1 (step S580). This completes the storage of the payout backup information.

Following step S580, access prohibition setting to RAM with built-in payout control is performed (step S582). By this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading become impossible, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

After step S582, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the watchdog timer is not cleared because the watchdog timer clear register HWCL is not set to the values A, B and C in that order. Therefore, the payout control MPU 4120a is reset, and after that, the payout control MPU 4120a again performs the payout control unit power-on process. Incidentally, the processing of steps S570 to S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power failure processing".

The pachinko game machine 1 (payout control MPU 4120a) is reset when there is a power failure or momentary power failure, and the payout control unit power-on processing is performed by the subsequent restoration of power.

In step S526, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and in step S528, it is checked whether or not the payout control unit power failure processing has been completed normally. are inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information has been stored by fraud.

[14-2. Dispensing Control Unit Timer Interrupt Processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt period (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 sets the timer interrupt to disabled and switches (saves) the register, as shown in FIG. (Step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the payout control unit main processing described above is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents destruction of the contents of general-purpose registers used in the payout control unit main processing.

Following step S590, the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is set to 1 (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms each time this payout control unit timer interrupt processing is performed, that is, every 2 ms, and has a value of 1 when 2 ms has elapsed, and a value of 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed. set respectively.

After step S592, the register is switched (restored) (step S594). This return is switched from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main processing, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing.

Following step S594, interrupt permission is set (step S596), and this routine ends.

[14-3. Rotation angle switch history creation process]
Next, the rotation angle switch history creating process will be described. In this rotation angle switch history creation process, a history of detection signals from the rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. 12 is created.

When the rotation angle switch history creation process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 reads the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST from the payout control built-in RAM, as shown in FIG. (Step S610). This rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). It has a storage capacity, and the history of the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 is stored in the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST. In step S610, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the rotation angle switch history information storage area.

After step S610, it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 (step S612). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main processing) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S612, the input information is read out from the input information storage area and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752. When there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 in the input information, the detection slit for grasping the rotational position of the payout rotor to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted prevents the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from being cut off. It is determined that the state has transitioned to the non-blocking state. On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 in the input information, it is determined that the detection slit has transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state of the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 .

If it is determined in step S612 that the detection slit has transitioned from the blocking state to the non-blocking state of the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752, shift processing of the rotation angle switch detection history information is performed (step S614). In this shift processing of the rotation angle switch detection history information, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S610 is shifted to the most significant bit B7←B6, B6←B5, B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2. , B2.rarw.B1, B1.rarw.least significant bit B0, and so on from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7.

Following step S614, the least significant bit B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is set to 1 (step S616), and this routine ends.

On the other hand, when the detection slit has transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state of the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 in step S612, shift processing of the rotation angle switch detection history information is performed (step S618). In this shift processing of the rotation angle switch detection history information, the same processing as the shift processing of the rotation angle switch detection history information in step S614 is performed. B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0. do.

Following step S618, the least significant bit B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is set to 0 (step S620), and this routine ends.

In this manner, each time the rotation angle switch history creation process is performed, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is shifted by one bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7, and then the detection slit rotates. Depending on the state in which the optical axis of the angle switch 752 has transitioned from the blocking state to the non-blocking state or the state in which the detection slit has transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state of the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752, the least significant bit B0 has a value of 1 or Since the value 0 is set, the history of detection signals from the rotation angle switch 752 can be created.

[14-4. Sprocket fixed position judgment skip processing]
Next, the sprocket fixed position determination skip processing will be described. This sprocket fixed position determination skip processing skips the determination of whether or not the payout rotator to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted is at a fixed position when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It should be noted that the determination of the fixed position of the payout rotating body is also performed when the payout of game balls by the prize ball device 740 is completed. As a result, the rotation of the rotating shaft of the payout motor 744 can be reliably started in a state in which the balls are not squashed.

When the sprocket fixed position determination skip process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. is determined (step S630). This fixed position judgment skip flag SKP-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the fixed position judgment of the payout rotor is performed. It is set to a value of 0 when body position determination is performed (when not skipped).

When the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is 0 (not skipped) in step S630, that is, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotor is performed, the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM The switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S632), and it is determined whether or not it matches the fixed position determination value (step S634). This fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in this embodiment, it is "00001111B ("B" represents a bit.)", the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are 0, the lower 4 bits Bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In step S634, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

Here, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST have a value of 1, the above-described detection slit is continuously detected as the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 at four timer interrupt cycles. It means that the state has transitioned from the blocked state to the non-blocked state. When the timer interrupt cycle occurs four times, the payout motor 744 shown in FIG. 12 rotates four steps. The rotation of the payout motor 744 becomes the rotation of the payout rotating body of the rotation detection board via the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear. Since these first gear, second gear, and third gear have play (backlash), the payout rotor rotates clockwise or counterclockwise. Since the rotation is designed to be equivalent to about two steps of rotation of the payout motor 744, in this embodiment, when determining the fixed position of the payout rotating body, the rotation angle switch 752 Detection signal history, rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is created by the rotation angle switch history creation process shown in FIG. This is done based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 due to the occurrence of the latest four timer interrupt cycles. As a result, since the payout motor 744 rotates in four steps in four timer interrupt cycles, it rotates more than the payout rotator due to backlash, and the rotation of the payout rotator due to backlash can be absorbed. can be done. Therefore, erroneous detection of the fixed position of the payout rotator due to backlash can be prevented, so that the rotational position of the payout rotator can be correctly managed by the rotational position of the payout motor 744 . In this embodiment, the period of four timer interrupts is 8 ms (=2 ms×4 times), which is set as the backlash absorption time.

In step S634, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S632 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, a fixed position determination skip flag is generated. SKP-FLG is set to 1 (step S636). Thereby, it is possible to set so as not to perform (skip) the determination of the fixed position of the payout rotator. The payout control MPU 4120a sets the rotational position of the payout rotator in step S636 to the fixed position of the payout rotator.

After step S636, the skip determination time is set to valid (step S638), and this routine ends. Here, the number of detection slits is three, which is the same as the number of recesses of the payout rotor, and the detection slits are formed at equal intervals (every 120 degrees) on the outer periphery of the rotation detection disk. Also, as described above, the rotation of the payout motor 744 becomes the rotation of the payout rotator of the rotation detection board via the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear. In this embodiment, the rotation between detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection plate (dispensing rotator) is designed to correspond to 18 steps of rotation of the dispensing motor 744 .

The payout control MPU 4120a manages the rotational position of the payout rotator based on the number of steps of the payout motor 744 . Specifically, (1) a transitional state (referred to as an “edge detection state”) in which the detection slit shifts the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from a blocked state to a non-blocked state (2) (3) a state in which the optical axis of the switch 752 transitions from the blocking state to the non-blocking state (referred to as a "fixed position fixed state"); It is managed in three states: a state (“fixed position determination skip state”) and a state where the position is skipped. The edge detection state (1) corresponds to one step rotation of the payout motor 744, the fixed position determination state (2) corresponds to four steps of rotation of the payout motor 744, and the fixed position determination skip state (3). corresponds to 13 steps of rotation of the dispensing motor 744, and a total of 18 steps of rotation controls the rotational position between the detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection plate, that is, the rotational position of the dispensing rotator.

In the fixed position determination skip state of (3), the detection slit is in a state in which the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 is shifted from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, so the skip determination time is the time for the payout motor 744 to rotate 13 steps. is set. As described above, since the timer interrupt period is set to 2 ms, the skip determination time is 26 ms (=2 ms×13 steps).

By enabling the skip determination time in step S638, the skip determination time is subtracted in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. The payout control MPU 4120a subtracts the skip determination time, and when the result of the subtraction becomes 0, sets the initial value 0 to the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG.

On the other hand, when the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S630 (when skipping), that is, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed, or in step S634, step S632 If the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step 1 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match, this routine ends. It should be noted that the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG set in step S636 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU4120a.

Game balls supplied from the pachinko island facility are stored in a prize ball tank 720 and a tank rail 731 , taken into a supply passage of a prize ball device 740 and guided to the prize ball device 740 . When game balls rub against each other and become charged, they generate static electricity and generate noise. For this reason, the prize ball device 740 is under the influence of noise and under the file environment. A rotation angle switch 752 is provided on the rotation angle switch board 753 of the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. Cheap. In addition, the wiring (harness) connecting between the payout control board 4110 and the board 754 inside the prize ball case in the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. Cheap.

Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to suppress erroneous detection due to the influence of noise, the fixed position determination skip state of (3) described above, that is, the detection slit changes the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. In the transition state, the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed. This enhances the accuracy of determination of the fixed position of the dispensing rotator. Since the period and period necessary for detecting the fixed position of the payout rotor can be calculated in advance as described above, the skip judgment time can be easily set and adjusted.

[14-5. Sphere Determination Processing]
Next, a description will be given of the ball sway determination process. In this ball entanglement determination process, it is determined whether or not a ball entanglement state has occurred due to the payout rotor to which the rotation of the rotating shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted.

46, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 acquires the rotation angle from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. The switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S640).

After step S640, it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 (step S642). This determination is to determine whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 matches the home position determination value. This fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, as described above, and in this embodiment, it is "00001111B ("B" represents a bit)", and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are The value is 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are 1. In step S642, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

In step S642, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S640 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the detection slit detects the rotation angle. Assuming that the optical axis of the switch 752 has transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, that is, the state in which the payout rotor is rotating and no ball catching state has occurred, this routine ends as it is.

On the other hand, in step S642, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S640 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the ball is caught. A middle flag PBE-FLG is set to 1 (step S644). This flag during ball catching PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the state of ball catching by the payout rotor is occurring. Each is set to a value of 0 when no action is performed.

Following step S644, the ball sway determination time is set to valid (step S646), and this routine ends. When this ball stagnation determination time becomes effective, the ball stagnation determination time is decremented in the timer update processing of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main processing) shown in FIG. .

[14-6. Various prize ball stock number addition processing]
Next, various prize ball stock number addition processing will be described. The various prize ball stock number addition processing includes prize ball stock number addition processing and prize ball stock number addition processing for rental balls. This is a process of adding the number of balls to be paid out based on a prize ball command, which will be described later. be. First, the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls will be described, and then the prize ball stock number addition process for rental balls will be described. In this embodiment, the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls is set to be performed preferentially. After the game balls are paid out by the prize ball device 740, it is set so as to carry out the prize ball stock number addition process for rental balls.

[14-6-1. Prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls]
When the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not there is a prize ball command as shown in FIG. 47 (step S650). This determination is performed based on the command analyzed in the command analysis process of step S560 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main processing) shown in FIG. Specifically, the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S650, the received command information is read out from the received command information storage area to determine whether or not it is a prize ball command.

When the received command information is not a prize ball command at step S650, this routine is terminated as it is. Read from the number information table (step S652). The prize ball number information table, which will be described later in detail, is an information table in which the prize ball commands and the number of prize balls PBV are associated and stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM.

Following step S652, the prize ball stock number PBS is read out from the payout control built-in RAM (step S654). This prize ball stock number PBS represents the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out by the prize ball device 740, that is, the number of balls that have not yet been paid out, and has a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits) in this embodiment. ing. As a result, the prize ball stock number PBS can store the number of unpaid balls ranging from 0 to 32,767. The prize ball stock number PBS is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S652, the prize ball stock number PBS is read out from the prize ball information storage area.

The number of prize balls PBV read out in step S652 is added to the number of prize balls in stock PBS read out in step S654 (step S656), and this routine ends. After addition in step S656, the winning ball command read out in step S650 is erased from the received command information storage area.

[14-6-2. Addition processing of stock number of prize balls for rental]
Next, the processing for adding the stock number of prize balls for rental will be described. When this processing for adding the stock number of prize balls for lending is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not there is a ball lending request signal, as shown in FIG. (Step S660). This determination is performed based on the ball rental request signal from the CR unit 6 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main processing) shown in FIG. Specifically, the ball rental request signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S660, the input information is read out from the input information storage area and it is determined whether or not there is a ball rental request signal.

When there is no ball lending request signal at step S660, this routine is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when there is a ball lending request signal at step S660, the prize ball stock number PBS is read from the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. (Step S662), the number of rental balls RBV is added to the prize ball stock number PBS (step S664), and this routine ends. The number of rental balls RBV is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In this embodiment, a value of 25 is set as the number of rental balls RBV. After addition in step S664, the ball rental request signal read out in step S660 is erased from the input information storage area. In addition, in the present embodiment, since prize balls are given priority (distinguishably managed between prize balls and rental balls), even when there is a ball rental request signal, the ball rental request signal is held. , Rental balls will be paid out upon completion of the payout of prize balls. Therefore, in this embodiment, the rental balls are paid out after the prize ball stock number PBS becomes zero.

[14-7. Stock monitoring process]
Next, stock monitoring processing will be described. This stock monitoring process monitors whether or not the player continues the game with the housing space of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. It is a process to

When the stock monitoring process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110, as shown in FIG. Read (step S670), and determine whether or not the read prize ball stock number PBS is greater than or equal to the caution threshold TH (step S672). The caution threshold TH is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In this embodiment, a value of 50 is set as the caution threshold TH.

When the prize ball stock number PBS is equal to or greater than the caution threshold value TH in step S672, the caution flag CA-FLG is set to 1 (step S674), and this routine ends. This caution flag CA-FLG indicates that the player starts stocking game balls in the housing space of the foul cover unit 540, and the number of unpaid game balls (the above-mentioned prize ball stock number) reaches or exceeds the caution threshold value TH. It is a flag indicating that it has been reached, and is set to a value of 1 when it has reached the caution threshold TH or more, and set to a value of 0 when it has not reached the caution threshold TH or more.

On the other hand, when the prize ball stock number PBS is less than the caution threshold value TH in step S672, the caution flag CA-FLG is set to 0 (step S676), and this routine ends.

When the game state becomes a jackpot and the player relaxes and watches the performance unfolding on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the portable terminal 470 shown in FIG. During this period, game balls paid out as prize balls may not be removed from the lower tray 302 by operating the lower tray ball removal button 354 shown in FIG. If the game is continued in this state, the lower tray 302 is filled with game balls, and the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 is filled with game balls. When the housing space of the foul cover unit 540 is filled with game balls, as described above, the value of the prize ball stock number PBS increases to exceed the caution threshold value TH, and the door frame 5 is provided as a caution effect. A plurality of LEDs on various decorative substrates blink. By this flashing, for example, it is possible to inform the store clerk of the hall that he/she should be careful of the player's game. As a result, the hall clerk can tell the player to remove the game balls from the lower tray 302, and the player fills the lower tray 302 (accommodating space of the foul cover unit 540) with game balls. It is possible to prevent continuation of the game.

Note that, in this embodiment, the caution threshold TH is set to a value of 50, which corresponds to approximately one-fifth of the upper limit value of 255 that can be represented by one byte (8 bits). As a result, it is possible to notify the hall clerk that the player should pay attention to the game at the earliest possible stage.

[14-8. Set-up process for determination of ball-out movement]
Next, a description will be given of the put-out ball grip operation determination setting process. This payout ball catching operation determination setting process is performed by paying out the game ball to the upper tray 301 or the lower tray 302 shown in FIG. This is a process to set whether or not to perform discharge or the like.

When the payout ball grip operation determination setting process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110, as shown in FIG. (step S680).

Following step S680, it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. 12 (step S682). This determination is to determine whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 matches the home position determination value. This fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, as described above, and in this embodiment, it is "00001111B ("B" represents a bit)", and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are The value is 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are 1. In step S682, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

In step S682, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S680 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, a retry error flag RTERR- It is determined whether FLG is 1 (step S684). This retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the retry operation, which will be described later, is operating abnormally. are set to the value 0 respectively when the operation is working normally).

In step S682, if the lower 4 bits B3-B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S680 do not match the lower 4 bits B3-B0 of the fixed position determination value, or in step S684 , when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is not 1 (is 0), that is, when the retry operation is not abnormally performed, it is determined whether or not the ball catching flag PBE-FLG is 1 ( step S686). This ball catching flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a ball catching state is occurring due to the payout rotor to which the rotation of the rotating shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted. It is set to a value of 1 when performing an action, and to a value of 0 when not performing a swing motion.

In step S686, when the ball-switching flag PEB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), that is, when the ball-switching operation is not performed, the prize ball stock is stored from the prize ball information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. The number PBS is read (step S688), and it is determined whether or not the read prize ball stock number PBS is greater than the value 0 (step S690). This determination determines whether or not there are unpaid balls in the payout of game balls by the payout motor 744 .

In step S690, when the prize ball stock number PBS is greater than the value 0, that is, when there are unpaid balls, it is determined whether or not the housing space of the foul cover unit 540 is full of stored game balls ( step S692). This determination is performed based on the full-tank information stored in the full-tank and out-of-ball check processing of step S556 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main processing) shown in FIG. Specifically, the full tank information is stored in the state information storage area of the aforementioned payout control built-in RAM. In step S692, full tank information is read out from the state information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 is full of stored game balls.

When the housing space of the foul cover unit 540 is not full with the stored game balls in step S692, a later-described payout setting process is performed (step S694), and this routine is terminated. In this payout setting process, a payout operation of putting out game balls to the upper tray 301 and the lower tray 302 is performed.

On the other hand, when the storage space of the foul cover unit 540 is full of stored game balls in step S692, this routine is terminated as it is. In the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, when the storage space of the foul cover unit 540 is filled with the stored game balls, the payout motor 744 is forcibly stopped. When prize balls are generated while the payout motor 744 is forcibly stopped, the number of balls not paid out by the payout motor 744 increases, and the prize ball stock number PBS is added by the prize ball stock number addition process shown in FIG. will increase over time.

On the other hand, when the prize ball stock number PBS is not greater than the value 0 (is 0) in step S690, that is, when there is no unpaid ball number, this routine ends as it is. As a result, game balls are not put out.

On the other hand, when the ball catching flag PBE-FLG is 1 in step S686, that is, when the ball catching motion is being performed, a ball catching motion setting process, which will be described later, is performed (step S700), and this routine ends. In this ball catching operation setting process, a ball catching operation to eliminate the ball catching state by the payout rotating body of the prize ball device 740 is performed.

On the other hand, in step S684, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormal, output stop (stop) of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set (step S702). . In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above.

Following step S702, an error status output to CR unit 6 is set (step S704), and this routine ends. In step S704, in order to inform the CR unit 6 that the ball cannot be rented at present, the payout control MPU 4120a, when not in communication with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, In other words, when the PRDY signal is held at a falling edge, the logic of the PRDY signal is set to LOW, that is, the fallen state is held, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Remember. As a result, in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 42, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM. The PRDY signal output setting information read by the lever, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is passed from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 CR. Output to unit 6. On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, when it rises and is held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained. is set as the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. As a result, in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 42, the EXS signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM The EXS signal output setting information read by the lever, that is, the EXS signal whose logic is maintained, is output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a through the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. . Note that "maintaining the logic state of the EXS signal" means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal is held after falling), the logic LOW is maintained, and when the logic of the EXS signal is HI. One is to maintain its logic HI when (the EXS signal is held rising).

[14-8-1. Payment setting processing]
Next, the payout setting process will be described. This payout setting process is a process of setting to drive the payout motor 744 to pay out game balls.

When the payout setting process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 reads the drive command number DRV from the payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. 51 (step S710). This drive command number DRV commands the number of game balls to be put out by the payout motor 744, and has the same value as the prize ball stock number PBS. The drive command number DRV is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S710, the drive command number DRV is read out from the prize ball information storage area.

After step S710, it is determined whether or not the drive command number DRV is 0 (step S712). This determination determines whether or not the number of game balls to be put out by the payout motor 744 remains, based on the drive command number DRV.

When the drive command number DRV is 0 in step S712, that is, when the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 744 is zero, output stop (stop) of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set ( step S714). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above.

Following step S714, the prize ball stock number PBS is read from the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S716), and the real ball count PB is read (step S718). This actual ball count PB is obtained by counting the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 744 . This count, which will be described in detail later, is the count switch 751 shown in FIG. Based on the detected signal. The actual ball count PB is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S718, the actual ball count PB is read out from the prize ball information storage area.

Following step S718, a value obtained by subtracting the real ball count PB read out in step S718 from the prize ball stock number PBS read out in step S716 is set to the prize ball stock number PBS and the drive command number DRV (step S720), The real ball count PB is set to 0 (step S722), and this routine ends. When the drive command number DRV and the actual ball count PB are 0, at step S722, the value of the prize ball stock number PBS read at step S716 is set as the drive command number DRV.

On the other hand, when the drive command number DRV is not 0 in step S712, that is, when there is a number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 744, the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set. (Step S724). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Subsequent to step S724, the value 1 is subtracted from the drive command number DRV (decremented, step S726), and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the counter switch 751 (step S728). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the counting switch 751 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main processing) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S728, the input information is read from the input information storage area and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the counter switch 751. FIG.

When there is a detection signal from the count switch 751 in step S728, the actual ball count PB is incremented by 1 (step S730), and this routine ends. By incrementing the real ball count PB in step S730, the real ball count PB is counted up.

On the other hand, if there is no detection signal from the counter switch 751 in step S728, this routine is terminated. In this way, the payout control MPU 4120a decrements the drive command number DRV in step S726, and when there is no detection signal from the count switch 751 in the determination of step S728, that is, when the real ball count PB is not incremented. determines that one game ball could not be paid out because the game ball was not received by the recess of the payout rotor to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted. Therefore, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the drive command number DRV to a value obtained by subtracting the actual ball count PB from the prize ball stock number PBS in the above-described step S720 in order to pay out the ball that should have been paid out again. As a result, when there is no detection signal from the count switch 751 in the judgment of step S728, that is, when the real ball count PB is not incremented, the value 1, which is the one ball to be paid out, can be included in the prize ball stock number PBS. In other words, since the value 1, which is the one ball to be paid out, can be rounded into the prize ball stock number PBS, a retry operation can be performed to put out the one ball to be paid out again. By performing this retry operation, it is possible to extremely reduce the risk of the game balls not being paid out to the player, and to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by the non-paying out of the game balls.

[14-8-2. Spherical movement setting process]
Next, a description will be given of the ball swaying motion setting process. In this ball catching operation setting process, it is a process of setting to eliminate the ball catching state by the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotating shaft of the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740 is transmitted.

When the ball-sticking operation setting process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not the ball-sticking determination time has elapsed (step S750). This determination is performed based on the ball sway determination time subtracted in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main processing) shown in FIG. Specifically, the ball-sticking determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S750, the time management information is read out from the time management information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the ball sway determination time has elapsed.

When it is determined in step S750 that the ball-sticking determination time has not elapsed, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read out from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S752).

After step S752, it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 (step S754). This determination is to determine whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 matches the home position determination value. This fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, as described above, and in this embodiment, it is "00001111B ("B" represents a bit)", and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are The value is 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are 1. In step S754, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

In step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S752 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, a ball-squeezing operation is performed. The output of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set to perform (step S756), and this routine is terminated. In this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the above payout control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, in step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S752 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the payout motor 744 is set to stop the drive signal to (step S758). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S758, the ball-switching flag PBE-FLG is set to 0 as the end of the ball-switching operation (step S760), and this routine ends. This flag during ball catching PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the state of ball catching by the payout rotor is occurring. Each is set to a value of 0 when no motion is performed (end of ball catching motion).

On the other hand, when the ball sticking determination time has elapsed in step S750, the stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set (step S762). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S762, an error status output to the CR unit 6 is set (step S764). Here, in order to inform the CR unit 6 that it is currently in a state where ball lending is not possible, the payout control MPU 4120a is not in communication with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, that is, When the PRDY signal is held at a falling edge, the logic of the PRDY signal is set to LOW, that is, the falling state is held, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set as the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. do. As a result, in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 42, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM. The PRDY signal output setting information read by the lever, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is passed from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 CR. Output to unit 6. On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, when it rises and is held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained. is set as the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. As a result, in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 42, the EXS signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM The EXS signal output setting information read by the lever, that is, the EXS signal whose logic is maintained, is output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a through the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. . As described above, "maintaining the logic state of the EXS signal" means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal falls and is held), the logic LOW is maintained and the EXS signal is logic HI (the EXS signal is held high), it should remain logic HI.

Following step S764, the value 0 is set to the ball-switching flag PBE-FLG as the end of the ball-switching operation (step S766), and this routine is terminated.

[14-9. Retry operation monitoring process]
Next, retry operation monitoring processing will be described. This retry operation monitoring process is a process for monitoring whether or not the retry operation of putting out the game balls that should have been put out is being performed normally.

When the retry operation monitoring process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110, as shown in FIG. The detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S770).

After step S770, it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 (step S772). This determination is to determine whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 matches the home position determination value. This fixed position determination value is stored in the payout control built-in ROM, as described above, and in this embodiment, it is "00001111B ("B" represents a bit)", and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 has a value of 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In step S772, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

In step S772, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S770 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the inconsistency counter INCC A value of 1 is added (incremented, step S774). This inconsistency counter INCC includes the number of game balls received and paid out by the recess of the payout rotor to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted, the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751, This is a counter for calculating the difference between the number of game balls received by the recess of the payout rotating body and paid out, and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751 usually match. , has the value 0. The payout control MPU 4120a performs a retry operation in the payout installation process shown in FIG. An inconsistency counter INCC monitors and judges whether or not the number of balls detected at 751 and the number of balls detected at 751 are repeatedly dispensed with inconsistent game balls due to inconsistency. The inconsistency counter INCC is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. At step S774, the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area is incremented.

Following step S774 or in step S772, the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S770 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value. Sometimes, it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751 (step S776). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the counter switch 751 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main processing) shown in FIG. Specifically, as described above, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S776, the input information is read out from the input information storage area and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the counter switch 751. FIG.

When there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751 in step S776, the mismatch counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is subtracted by 1 (decremented, step S778).

Following step S778 or when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 751 in step S776, it is determined whether or not the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH (step S780). In the pachinko game machine 1 of the present invention, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability of one inconsistent game ball being put out by a retry operation is about one in several millions. A value of 5 is set as the threshold INCTH.

In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530 in the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. , information used for this retry operation monitoring process is set based on the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area. With this process, for example, even if there is an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the value of the mismatch counter INCC, etc. at the time of power restoration is restored to the value of the mismatch counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, which is stored as the payout backup information. You can do it. As a result, in the determination of step S780, the monitoring of the game ball payout operation (retry operation) by the prize ball device 740, which was performed until just before the momentary power failure or power failure, can be continued from the time of power restoration. ing. Therefore, for example, immediately before an instantaneous power failure or power failure, if the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, it is determined that the retry operation is normal. It can be determined that the game ball payout operation by the device 740 is in a normal state, and that the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is in a normal state by the determination in step S780 even when the power is restored. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S780 that the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold value INCTH, it is determined that the retry operation is abnormal, that is, the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is abnormal. It can be determined that the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state by the determination in step S780 even when the power is restored.

If the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, this routine ends. On the other hand, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is greater than or equal to the mismatch threshold INCTH, a "retry error" is indicated. In order to notify, retry error information is set to display the number "5" on the error LED indicator 860b, which is a segment display mounted on the payout control board 4110, and the state information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM (step S782).

Following step S782, a value 0 (initial value 0) is set to the mismatch counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S784). In step S784, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is greater than or equal to the mismatch threshold INCTH, Triggered by the occurrence of this internal factor, it is initialized. The inconsistency counter INCC is initialized when the operation switch 860a is operated to clear the RAM when power is turned on, triggered by the occurrence of this external factor. When the operation switch 860a is operated when the power is turned on, the operation signal is input as the RAM clear signal to the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 11, as described above. As described above, the main control MPU 4100a erases all the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM and outputs the RAM clear notification command to the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. As a result, the RAM clear notification sound is played from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. 5 and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5 shown in FIG.

Following step S784, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to 1 (step S786), and this routine ends. This retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the retry operation is operating abnormally. are set to the value 0 respectively when operating normally).

In addition, the payout control MPU 4120a stores the retry error information set (stored) in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S782 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main processing) shown in FIG. In the command transmission process of step S566, a retry error status command is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100, and in the LED display data creation process of step S564 in the same process, display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator 860b is created. This information is stored in the output information storage area as LED display information, and a drive signal is output to the error LED indicator 860b based on the LED display information stored in the output information storage area in the port output process of step S548 in the same process. The number "5" is displayed on the LED indicator 860b. The main control board 4100 having received the status command transmits it to the peripheral control board 4140 in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. A door frame side lighting and blinking command for outputting a lighting signal for causing a plurality of LEDs of various decoration boards provided in the frame to emit light in a predetermined color (red in this embodiment) is sent to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. output to cause a plurality of LEDs to emit light in a predetermined color. A hall clerk or the like who notices the light emission of the plurality of LEDs opens the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 as described above so that the error LED indicator 860b mounted on the payout control board 4110 displays the number " 5” is displayed, it is possible to confirm that a “retry error” has occurred. As a result, in order to investigate the cause of the occurrence, the hall clerk or the like can confirm the failure of the counting switch 751, disconnection of various harnesses extending from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, poor contact of various connectors, and the like. This can be done very quickly compared to the case where the light emission of the plurality of LEDs and the display contents of the error LED indicator 860b are not notified.

In addition, by intentionally setting the count switch 751 to a non-operating state, it is difficult to detect the game ball that is received by the recess of the payout rotor to which the rotation of the rotating shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted and that is put out. Even if a retry operation is forcibly generated and a fraudulent act of fraudulently obtaining the game balls paid out by this retry operation is performed, if the value of the mismatch counter INCC becomes equal to or greater than the mismatch threshold value INCTH. Since a plurality of LEDs on various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 5 emit light, hall clerk or the like rushes to check the state of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加Then, the player who commits the fraudulent act has no choice but to stop the act so as not to be discovered, and cannot continue to acquire illegal game balls by the fraudulent act. Even if the value of the inconsistency counter INCC coincides with the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the player who commits cheating is the same as the inconsistency threshold INCTH. Therefore, it is possible to minimize the damage to the holes caused by intentionally deactivating the counting switch 751 .

Furthermore, as described above, the mismatch counter INCC is set when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is greater than or equal to the mismatch threshold INCTH. It is designed to be initialized when an internal factor occurs. As a result, the inconsistency counter INCC is prevented from being initialized when an external factor such as the manipulation of the operation switch 860a to clear the error occurs. Therefore, even if the error canceling switch 860a or the like is illegally modified so that the operation signal is input to the payout control MPU 4120a, the mismatch counter INCC will be forcibly initialized by such illegal acts. There is no

[14-10. Mismatch counter reset determination process]
Next, mismatch counter reset processing will be described. In this mismatch counter reset processing, the number of game balls received by the recess of the payout rotor to which the rotation of the rotating shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted and paid out, and the number of balls detected by the count switch 751 , to determine whether or not to reset an inconsistency counter INCC that calculates the difference between the .

When the mismatch counter reset determination process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. step S790). This determination is performed based on the mismatch counter reset determination time updated in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main processing) shown in FIG. Specifically, the mismatch counter reset determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the aforementioned payout control built-in RAM. In step S790, the time management information is read from the time management information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the inconsistency counter reset determination time has elapsed.

If it is determined in step S790 that the mismatch counter reset determination time has not passed, this routine ends. On the other hand, when the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed in step S790, the mismatch counter reset determination time is initialized (step S792). By this initialization, the initial value of 7000 seconds (about 2 hours) is set to the mismatch counter reset determination time.

Following step S792, a value 0 (initial value 0) is set to the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S794), and this routine ends. The inconsistency counter INCC, as described above, is the number of game balls received and paid out by the recess of the payout rotor to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted, and the count switch 751 detects the number of game balls. It is a counter for calculating the difference between the number of balls and the number of balls received by the recess of the payout rotating body and paid out, and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751 is usually the same. Since they match, the value is 0. The payout control MPU 4120a performs a retry operation in the payout installation process shown in FIG. An inconsistency counter INCC monitors and judges whether or not the number of balls detected at 751 and the number of balls detected at 751 are repeatedly dispensed with inconsistent game balls due to inconsistency. In the pachinko game machine 1 of the present invention, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability of one inconsistent game ball being put out by a retry operation is about one in several millions.

Here, as described above, the pachinko game machine 1 is composed of the game board 4 and a frame such as the main body frame 3 to which the game board 4 is mounted. Since the game specifications can be changed, the payout control board 4110 that controls the prize ball device 740 and the power board 851 that generates the drive power supply for the prize ball device 740 and the control power supply for the payout control board 4110 are common. It is equipped on the frame side as a function. The payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 monitors the inconsistency counter INCC to determine whether or not the retry operation is repeated. In the payout control unit power-off processing in the payout control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. In the process of step S530 in the time process (setting of the RAM work area when the power is restored), the process is restarted from the stored inconsistency counter INCC when the power is turned on.

Then, when the power is turned off and the game board 4 attached to the pachinko game machine 1 is replaced with a game board 4' having different game specifications from the game board 4 and the power is turned on, payout control is performed. The payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the substrate 4110 starts the process again from the mismatch counter INCC stored when the game board 4 is attached to the pachinko game machine 1. That is, when the player plays the pachinko game machine 1 to which the game board 4' is mounted, the mismatch counter INCC of the pachinko game machine 1 to which the game board 4 before replacement is mounted is inherited as it is. Therefore, when a player plays the pachinko game machine 1 to which the game board 4' is mounted, there is a probability of one in several million that the number of game balls that do not match up is generated, resulting in an inconsistency counter INCC. increases, and when the inconsistency counter INCC becomes equal to or greater than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, the game board 4 is replaced with the game board 4' in a short period of time. There is a risk that In other words, in a short period after the game board 4 is replaced with the game board 4', the malfunction of the counting switch 751, disconnection of various harnesses from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, contact failure of various connectors, etc. In spite of the fact that a retry operation has not occurred, there is a possibility that the retry operation may be suddenly determined as an abnormal operation.

In this way, if the game board 4 is replaced with the game board 4' and it is determined as an abnormal retry operation in a short period of time, the replaced game board 4' is new but is likely to break down. It may give to the player. The probability of one inconsistent game ball being put out due to the retry operation, which is one in several million, is determined by installing the pachinko game machine 1 of the present invention in the hall and operating it continuously during the opening hours of the hall for one week. Since the probability of one inconsistent game ball being put out due to the retry operation is the same as the probability that one inconsistent game ball is put out in the case of a retry operation, in the process of step S778 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. With a probability of 1, the value 1 will not be subtracted. Then, in one week, the mismatch counter INCC is incremented by 1, and the mismatch counter INCC becomes 1. In two weeks, the mismatch counter INCC is further incremented by 1, and the mismatch counter INCC becomes 2 and 3. In the week, the inconsistency counter INCC is further incremented by 1 to become 3; in 4 weeks, the inconsistency counter INCC is further incremented by 1 to become 4; The value 1 is further incremented to the mismatch counter INCC, and the mismatch counter INCC becomes the value 5, which coincides with the mismatch threshold value INCTH. In other words, when five weeks have passed, the mismatch counter INCC matches the mismatch threshold INCTH, so the payout control MPU 4120a determines in step S776 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. It is determined that there is no detection signal, and it is determined that there is a malfunction of the counting switch 751, disconnection of various harnesses from the counting switch 751 to the dispensing control board 4110, poor contact of various connectors, etc. In the process of step S782 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in 53, the number " 5” is set and set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Therefore, the payout control MPU 4120a repeatedly resets the mismatch counter every 7000 s (about 2 hours) when it is determined in step S790 in the mismatch counter reset determination process that the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed. By forcibly setting the value 0 to the mismatch counter INCC in the process of step S794 in the determination process, that is, by forcibly resetting it, the increment of the mismatch counter INCC, which occurs with a probability of 1/several millions, can be reduced. Disabled. As a result, an error has occurred in the retry operation even though there is no malfunction of the counting switch 751, disconnection of various harnesses from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, contact failure of various connectors, etc. It is possible to prevent setting (storing) of retry error information that conveys to the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

In addition, by intentionally setting the count switch 751 to a non-operating state, it is difficult to detect the game ball that is received by the concave portion of the payout rotor to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted and that is put out. Even if a retry operation is forcibly generated and a game ball paid out by this retry operation is fraudulently acquired, the counter switch 751 is intentionally repeatedly deactivated for a short period of time. Thus, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC becomes equal to or greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH, a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 emit light, so that a hall clerk or the like can check the state of the pachinko machine 1. I will rush over to confirm. Then, the player who commits the fraudulent act has no choice but to stop the act so as not to be discovered, and cannot continue to acquire illegal game balls by the fraudulent act. On the other hand, when the count switch 751 is intentionally repeatedly deactivated for a long period of time so that the value of the mismatch counter INCC does not exceed the mismatch threshold value INCTH, the mismatch counter INCC is reset every 7000 seconds (approximately 2 hours). Although it is reset, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the player who commits cheating during this time is up to the mismatch counter INCC and the mismatch threshold INCTH, as described above, and the count switch 751 is intentionally turned on. Even if the non-operating state is repeatedly set for a long period of time, the number of game balls that can be acquired by a player who commits cheating can be extremely reduced.

[14-11. Error cancellation operation judgment process]
Next, error cancellation operation determination processing will be described. In this error cancellation operation determination process, it is determined whether or not the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 12 is operated.

When the error cancellation operation determination process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not the operation switch 860a is operated to cancel the error, as shown in FIG. (step S800). This determination is performed based on the operation signal from the operation switch 860a in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main processing) shown in FIG. Specifically, the operation signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the aforementioned payout control built-in RAM. In step S800, the input information is read out from the input information storage area, and when the logic of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is HI, it is determined that it is not an instruction to cancel the error, and the operation switch 860a is operated. On the other hand, when the logic of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is LOW, it is determined that the operation switch 860a is being operated by judging that the error cancellation is instructed.

If the operation switch 860a is not operated in step S800, this routine is terminated as it is. If the operation switch 860a is operated in step S800, an error flag state confirmation process is performed (step S802). In this error flag state determination process, the state of the error flag corresponding to various error information regarding the prize ball device 740 is confirmed. For example, the state of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether the retry operation is abnormal is checked. As described above, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG has a value of 1 when the retry operation is abnormal, and a value of 0 when the retry operation is not abnormal (retry operation is normal). Since it is set, the payout control MPU 4120a confirms whether the value of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is 0 or 1.

After step S802, state information setting processing is performed (step S804). In this status information setting process, based on the error flag confirmed in step S802, if the status of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred, the status information corresponding to the error flag is set to the above-described It is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the built-in payout control RAM. As a result, in the command transmission process of step S566 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main processing) shown in FIG. A state command is created based on and transmitted to the main control board 4100 . For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation is abnormal is 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormal, it indicates that an error has occurred in the retry operation. When the retry error information to be transmitted is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, in the command transmission process of step S566 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. A retry error status command is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100 .

The main control board 4100 that has received the retry error information transmits it to the peripheral control board 4140 in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. A retry operation error notification process is performed to notify that an error has occurred in the retry operation. In this retry operation error notification process, the retry operation error notification announcement of "Please check the prize ball unit" and "Please check the harness of the payout control board" is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment , 2 times.) The hall clerk or the like is notified by the sound flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. 5 and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5 shown in FIG. It is designed to Hall clerk, etc., who heard the error notification announcement of this retry operation, may have trouble with the counting switch 751 shown in FIG. can be confirmed very quickly compared to the case where the error notification announcement of the retry operation is not played from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5.例文帳に追加Further, in the retry operation error notification process, a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 5 are caused to emit light in a predetermined color (red in this embodiment).

Following step S804, a cancellation setting process is performed (step S806). In this release setting process, based on the error flags corresponding to the various error information confirmed in step S802, if the state of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred, The CR unit 6 can forcibly stop the content displayed by the error LED indicator 860b, which is a segment indicator already mounted on the payout control board 4110, or is ready to lend the ball. , the logic of the PRDY signal described above is kept HI, that is, the raised state, and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 is connected from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120. and output to the CR unit 6 via. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation is abnormal is 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormal, the error LED indicator 860b has already displayed the error. In order to forcibly stop the number "5" that indicates that there is a "retry error", the retry error information stored in the state information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM is changed to "normal". Forcibly overwrite the information displayed with a figure "-" to notify that effect. In addition, in order to inform the CR unit 6 that the ball can be rented, the logic of the PRDY signal is set to HI, that is, the rising state is maintained, and the game ball is sent from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a. It is output to the CR unit 6 via the lending device connection terminal board 869 .

Following step S806, error flag initialization processing is performed (step S808), and this routine ends. In this error flag initialization processing, based on the error flags corresponding to the various error information confirmed in step S802, if the state of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred, the error flag is reset. initialize. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation is abnormal is 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormal, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to 0. Set and initialize. At this time, the logic of the PRDY signal is held at HI, that is, the rising state, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set as the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. As a result, in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 42, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM. The PRDY signal output setting information read by the lever, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a through the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. .

As described above, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to the value of the internal factor when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is equal to or greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH in the determination of step S780 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to 1 in the process of step S786 of the same process with the occurrence of Triggered by the occurrence, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to 0 and initialized. The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set when the operation switch 860a is operated to clear the RAM when the power is turned on. Similar to the case where the switch 860a is operated, the initialization is triggered by the occurrence of this external factor.

[14-12. Exchange of various signals with the CR unit]
Next, the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 42 will be described using a timing chart. In this CR communication process, various signals are exchanged between the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. First, the signal processing during the payout operation by lending the ball will be explained, and then the input signal confirmation processing from the CR unit 6 will be explained. Here, the number of game balls worth 200 yen (in this embodiment, 50 balls, and 25 balls worth 100 yen are dispensed twice) is used as the number of rental balls, The case of dispensing to the upper tray 301 and the lower tray 302 shown in FIG. 7 will be described. The BRQ signal, the BRDY signal and the CR connection signal from the CR unit 6 are stored in the input information read out from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. confirms the logic states of the BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal from the input information every 2 ms, which is the interrupt timer period.

[14-12-1. Signal processing during payout operation by ball lending]
The payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 reads the PRDY signal output setting information from the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. is set to the logic state of the PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation is possible, as shown in FIG. , the logic of the PRDY signal is set to HI, i.e., raised and held, and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120. Output to CR unit 6 via plate 869 (timing H0). In this state, for example, when the player presses the ball lending button 361 of the ball lending unit 360 shown in FIG. 2, the ball lending switch 365b is turned on. An operation signal is input from the frequency display plate 365 as TDS shown in FIG. The CR unit 6 to which this TDS is input pays out the number of game balls worth 200 yen to the upper tray 301 and the lower tray 302 as the number of rental balls. BRDY, which is a ball request signal, is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is raised and held (timing H1). . This BRDY is input as a BRDY signal to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

The payout control MPU 4120a to which this BRDY signal is input is set to the lending request monitoring time HA (20 milliseconds (ms) to 58 ms in this embodiment) from timing H1, as shown in FIG. 56(b). ) passes from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, a predetermined number of balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, and the amount is 100 yen) in one payout operation. ) is monitored to see whether or not BRQ, which is a one-time payout operation start request signal for paying out, rises.

Of the number of game balls worth 200 yen, the CR unit 6 first pays out the number of game balls worth 100 yen to the upper tray 301 and the lower tray 302 as the number of rental balls. ), BRQ is output from the CR unit 6 to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 from the timing H1 until the lending request monitoring time HA elapses, and the signal is It is raised and held (timing H2). This BRQ is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a as a BRQ signal.

As shown in FIG. 56(c), the payout control MPU 4120a, when the BRQ signal rises from the timing H1 until the lending request monitoring time HA elapses, the BRQ request acknowledgment ACK monitoring time HB (in this embodiment, 20 ms±1 ms.), in order to notify that one payout operation has started, the logic of the EXS signal is set to HI, that is, the raised state is maintained and the payout control MPU 4120a , and output as EXS to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing H3).

As shown in FIG. 56(b), the CR unit 6, to which this EXS is input, waits until the lending instruction monitoring time HC (which is set to 20 ms to 58 ms in this embodiment) elapses from the timing H3. , BRQ raised and held from the timing H2 is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is lowered and held (timing H4).

As shown in FIG. 56(c), the payout control MPU 4120a performs one payout operation from the timing H4 until the payout monitoring time HD (in this embodiment, set as the ball payout time) elapses. A predetermined number of rental balls, that is, the number of game balls worth 100 yen are put out to the upper tray 301 and the lower tray 302 as the number of rental balls. When the payout monitoring time HD elapses, the EXS signal raised and held from the timing H3 is set to LOW logic, that is, held in a fallen state and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a. , EXS to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing H5).

The CR unit 6 pays out the remaining 100 yen of the number of game balls worth 200 yen to the upper tray 301 and the lower tray 302 as the number of rental balls. ), BRQ is transferred from the CR unit 6 to the connection terminal board for the game ball lending device until the next request confirmation timing HE (in this embodiment, the maximum is set to 268 ms) has elapsed from the timing H5. 869, output to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU4120a), the signal is raised and held (timing H6).

Similarly, the payout control MPU 4120a pays out the number of game balls for the remaining 100 yen to the upper tray 301 and the lower tray 302 as the number of rental balls using the above-described method, as shown in FIG. , the EXS signal that has been raised and held is set to LOW, that is, held in a fallen state, and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a. Output to CR unit 6 via plate 869 (timing H7).

The CR unit 6 starts from timing H1 as shown in FIG. The raised and held BRDY is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is lowered and held (timing H8).

The above-described lending request monitoring time HA, BRQ request acknowledgment ACK monitoring time HB, lending instruction monitoring time HC, payout monitoring time HD, next request confirmation timing HE, and CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF are controlled by the payout control shown in FIG. It is clocked in the timer update process of step S552 in the part power-on process (payout control part main process).

Note that the payout control MPU 4120a is not in communication with the CR unit 6 (BRDY logic is LOW, that is, is kept falling), the PRDY signal that has risen from timing H1 and is held is changed to LOW, that is, in a falling state, as shown in FIG. 56(d). It is held and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, and output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing H9). On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, when it rises and is held), although not shown, the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and issued. It is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the control MPU 4120a, and is output as EXS to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. "Maintaining the logic state of the EXS signal" means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal is held after falling), the logic LOW is maintained, and the logic of the EXS signal is HI ( Maintain its logic HI when the EXS signal is held high.

In this way, the CR unit 6 exchanges various signals with the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110. By performing the payout operation of 25 balls for a circle twice, the game balls with the number of rental balls of 50 are put out to the upper tray 301 and the lower tray 302.例文帳に追加A setting unit (not shown) provided on the front side of the CR unit 6 is operated by a hall clerk or the like, and the number of game balls worth 100 yen is used as the number of rental balls. When set to be put out to the lower tray 302, the payout control MPU 4120a performs the payout operation of 25 balls worth 100 yen once, and the number of game balls worth 500 yen is set as the number of rental balls. When setting is made to put out to the upper tray 301 or the lower tray 302, the payout control MPU 4120a performs the payout operation of 25 balls worth 100 yen five times, and the number of game balls worth 1000 yen is counted. When the number of rental balls is set to be paid out to the upper tray 301 or the lower tray 302, the payout control MPU 4120a performs the payout operation of 25 balls worth 100 yen ten times.

[14-12-2. Input signal confirmation processing from CR unit]
The payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 keeps the CR unit 6 from receiving the BRQ from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 even after the above-mentioned lending request monitoring time HA has passed. is output to the payout control board 4110, and even if the signal is not started or the above-mentioned lending instruction monitoring time HC has passed, the CR unit 6 connects the BRDY to the game ball lending device. Via the terminal plate 869, output to the payout control board 4110, even if the signal is not lowered, or even if the next request confirmation timing HE described above has passed, the CR unit 6 outputs BRQ from the CR unit 6 to the game If the signal is output to the payout control board 4110 via the ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the signal is not started, or even if the above-mentioned CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF has passed, the CR unit 6 will be BRDY. is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869, and if the signal is not lowered, BRQ and Confirm whether BRDY is normal or not. Specifically, when the payout control MPU 4120a determines that BRQ and BRDY are not normal (timing J0), as shown in FIGS. , 200 ms±1 ms.), the logic of the PRDY signal is set to LOW, that is, it is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 while maintaining the fallen state. Then, as PRDY, it is output to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869, and the logic of the EXS signal is set to LOW, that is, the lowered state is maintained and a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a and output as EXS to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J1).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal held down from the timing J1 to HI after a predetermined period of time JB (in this embodiment, it is set to 200 ms±1 ms) from the timing J1. That is, it is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a while maintaining the raised state, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J2 ).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal raised and held from the timing J2 to LOW after the elapse of a predetermined period JC (set to 100 ms±1 ms in this embodiment) from the timing J2. That is, it is held in the lowered state and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J3 ).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal held down from the timing J3 to HI after a predetermined period JD (set to 100 ms±1 ms in this embodiment) from the timing J3. That is, it is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a while maintaining the raised state, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J4 ).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal raised and held from timing J4 to LOW after the lapse of a predetermined period JE (set to 100 ms±1 ms in this embodiment) from timing J4. That is, it is held in the lowered state and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J5 ).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a, after the lapse of a predetermined period JF (set to 10000ms±1ms in this embodiment) from the timing J5, sets the PRDY signal held down from the timing J5 to the logic HI. That is, it is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a while maintaining the raised state, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J6 ).

The above-described predetermined period JA to predetermined period JF are clocked in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG.

[15. Various control processing of the peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 4140 for receiving various commands from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) shown in FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59. FIG. FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing an example of the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 59 is an example of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. 60 is a flow chart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing an example of peripheral control unit power outage notice signal interrupt processing.

As shown in FIG. 14, the peripheral control board 4140 comprises a peripheral control section 4150 and a liquid crystal and sound control section 4160. Here, various control processes of the peripheral control section 4150 will be described. First, peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described, followed by peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing. . In this embodiment, as the priority of interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set to the highest priority, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. It is set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

[15-1. Various control processing of the peripheral control unit]
[15-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral controller power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a performs initial setting processing (step S1000). This initial setting process includes a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a itself, a hot start/cold start determination process, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU 4150a first performs a process of initializing itself, but the time required for the process of initializing this peripheral control MPU 4150a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a enters a state in which interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs from the main control board 4100, shown in FIGS. , various commands such as commands relating to the control of game effects and commands relating to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be received.

In the hot start/cold start determination process, the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. ) are compared, and effect backup information (1 ms), which is the content backed up in Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms), is compared, and Bank3 (1 fr) and Bank4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 4150 cc are compared. The performance backup information (1 fr), which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (1 ms), and the performance backup information (1 ms), which is the content backed up in Bank 4 (1 ms), are compared, and the contents of the comparison are compared. are the same, the performance backup information (1fr) which is the content stored in Bank1 (1fr) for Bank0 (1fr), which is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. While performing a hot start by copying back the effect backup information (1 ms), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1 ms), to Bank0 (1 ms), when the compared contents do not match (i.e. , mismatch), a value of 0 is forcibly written into Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), which are normally used storage areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, to perform a cold start.

In the hot start/cold start determination process, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d shown in FIG. (SRAM), and effect backup information (SRAM), which is the content backed up in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) in the second backup area 4150dc. When the contents of this comparison match, the effect backup information (SRAM), which is the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), is stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 4150d shown in FIG. ) is copied back to perform a hot start, and when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), a value is stored in Bank0 (SRAM) which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. 0 is forcibly written to cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written into the backup unmanaged work area 4150cf of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. After performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af shown in FIG. 15 and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e shown in FIG. 14 to reset the peripheral control MPU 4150a. I try not to get caught.

Note that the peripheral control MPU 4150a may also perform communication initialization in this initialization setting process. The mobile terminal 470 received by the player at the hall reception is placed in the concave portion 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. When the portable terminal 470 is placed, information indicating that the portable terminal 470 is placed in the recess 314d is input to the peripheral control parallel I/O port 4150ag of the peripheral control MPU 4150a as a control signal from the communication control circuit 4162a shown in FIG. be done. The peripheral control MPU 4150a to which this control signal is input controls the communication control circuit 4162a by outputting the control signal from the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 4150ag to the communication control circuit 4162a. Communication initial setting is performed for exchanging each information (various data, various commands) by radio in both directions.

In this communication initial setting, individual information acquisition processing is performed to acquire an ID number (No. Correlation processing for associating the number (unit number installed in the hall, No. 8 in this embodiment) with each other is performed. As a result, in the communication initial setting, when the mobile terminal 470 associated with the association process is placed (set) in the concave portion 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300, the game A state in which the operation of various game devices provided on the board 4 can be started can be maintained, and when this communication initial setting is completed, the message "game preparation completed" is carried. It is displayed large in the center of the display area of the terminal 470 . On the other hand, in the communication initial setting, another mobile terminal 470′ different from the mobile terminal 470 associated in the association process (excluding the mobile terminal MST for attendants possessed by an attendant such as a hall clerk who patrols the hall) When another portable terminal 470') is placed (set) in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300, various game devices provided on the game board 4 can be operated. It is designed to be able to maintain a state in which it cannot be started, and when this communication initial setting is completed, the mobile terminal 470 displays the contents of "This is a table where another player is playing a game" to that effect. is displayed large in the display area of .

Following step S1000, current time information acquisition processing is performed (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. is set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. In addition, in the current time information acquisition process, the luminance setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and sets the brightness of the LEDs included in the acquired brightness setting information to the brightness of the game board. Processing is performed to adjust the brightness of the backlight of the side liquid crystal display device 1900 and turn it on. As described above, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, It includes the set brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 .

Specifically, in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%, and the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is set to 75%. is lit, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is turned on. When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 80% and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on, the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. Lights up by adjusting the brightness. In the brightness setting processing of the liquid crystal display device, correction similar to the brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the use time of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is performed. It is not done at all. This is because a correction program similar to the brightness correction program is incorporated into the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting processing of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. After performing the current time information acquisition process, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset.

Following step S1002, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 0 (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later. are set to the value 0 when not executed. The V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be accepted is input from the tone generator VDP 4160a. A value of 1 is set in the partial V blank signal interrupt process. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. After setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 0, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. there is

After step S1006, it is determined whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (is 0), the process returns to step S1008 to repeatedly determine whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not. By repeating such determinations, a standby state is established until the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed. After determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e to reset the peripheral control MPU 4150a. I try not to get caught.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to 1 (step S1009). The steady-processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and set to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

Following step S1009, 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing is performed (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer start processing, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is started, and the number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed by the 1 ms interrupt timer being started is counted. 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is set to 1 to initialize the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

After step S1010, lamp data output processing is performed (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, continuous DMA serial transmission to the lamp driving board 4170 shown in FIG. 14 is performed. Here, serial I/O port serial transmission for the lamp driving board is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. When this lamp drive board serial I/O port continuous transmission is started, the data shown in FIG. Game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 4 is created by a lamp data creation process described later. is set by default.

The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The first byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored at the top address is sent to the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. transfer and write to the transmit buffer register of As a result, the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side emission clock signal SL-CLK to transmit 1 byte of the transmission shift register. data is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

Every time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board occurs, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the transmission buffer register for the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board Triggered by the fact that the written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register is empty because there is no more 1-byte data.), the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa is transmitted, byte by byte, via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai, By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board, the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, In synchronism with the board-side light emission clock signal SL-CLK, transmission of 1-byte data in the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed through the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board.

In the lamp data output process, DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. 14 is performed. Here too, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is used to perform serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration driving amplifier board LED. When this frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port continuous transmission is started, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. In 4150cab, door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 5 is created by the lamp data creation process described later. is set by default.

The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area. The first byte of the door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored at the top address of 4150cab is sent to the frame decoration driving amplifier board LED serial signal via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer and write to the transmit buffer register of the I/O port. As a result, the serial I/O port for the frame decoration driving amplifier board LED transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door-side light emission clock signal STL-CLK. Start transmitting 1-byte data bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac receives a transmission interrupt request for the frame-decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port (in this embodiment, the frame-decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port). 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte data.), peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is not using the bus, the remaining door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab are transferred byte by byte to the external bus 4150h and the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad. , and by transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port via the peripheral bus 4150ai, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port receives this written data. The data in the transmission buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK, transmission of 1 byte data in the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED Continuous transmission is performed by the serial I/O port.

Following step S1012, mobile terminal monitoring processing is performed (step S1013). In this mobile terminal monitoring process, it is determined whether or not the player places the mobile terminal 470 received at the hall reception on the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. to monitor. In the mobile terminal monitoring process, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is ready for the player to sit in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and start playing when the mobile terminal 470 is not placed in the recess 314d. It determines that there is no such thing, sets a screen to notify that the customer is away, sets permission to perform a demonstration that will be a customer waiting screen, and switches to power saving mode after the demonstration. set transitions. On the other hand, when the portable terminal 470 is placed in the recess 314d, as described above, the information is transmitted as a control signal from the communication control circuit 4162a shown in FIG. O port 4150ag, the peripheral control MPU 4150a receiving this control signal outputs the control signal from the peripheral control parallel I/O port 4150ag to the communication control circuit 4162a. , and controls the communication control circuit 4162a to perform initial communication settings for exchanging each information (various data, various commands) wirelessly with the portable terminal 470 in both directions.

This communication initial setting is the same as that executed in the initialization setting process in step S1000. processing to associate the ID number acquired in this individual information acquisition process with the machine number of the pachinko game machine 1 (the machine number installed in the hall, No. 8 in this embodiment). . As a result, in the communication initial setting, when the mobile terminal 470 associated with the association process is placed (set) in the concave portion 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300, the game A state in which the operation of various game devices provided on the board 4 can be started can be maintained, and when this communication initial setting is completed, the message "game preparation completed" is carried. A demonstration screen that is displayed large in the center of the display area of the terminal 470 and drawn in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 or nothing is displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 due to the power saving mode. The state (that is, a state of a black screen) is switched to a state in which a game screen (for example, the screen of FIG. 62(b), which will be described later) is displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. ing.

Even when the portable terminal 470 is placed in the concave portion 314d, the rotating handle body can be rotated by the player leaving the seat of the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 7 or interrupting the game. The palm and fingers are separated from the front 506 and the game is not played, and the state where the game ball does not enter the upper start port 2101 or the lower start port 2102 continues, and the reserved balls are digested and become zero. When the state is reached, permission to perform a demonstration that becomes a screen of the customer waiting state is set, and after the demonstration is performed, a transition to the power saving mode is set. On the other hand, in the communication initial setting, another mobile terminal 470′ different from the mobile terminal 470 associated in the association process (excluding the mobile terminal MST for attendants possessed by an attendant such as a hall clerk who patrols the hall) When the portable terminal 470') is placed (set) in the concave portion 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300, various game devices provided on the game board 4 start operating. When this communication initial setting is completed, the content of "This is a machine where other players are playing games" is handled by the correspondence processing. A screen for leaving the seat notification displayed in the display area of the other mobile terminal 470' different from the attached mobile terminal 470 and drawn in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (for example, the screen of FIG. 63 to be described later). screen) is maintained, and the game screen (for example, the screen of FIG. 62(b) to be described later) is not switched from such a screen to the state displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. ing. In the mobile terminal monitoring process, other mobile terminals 470′ different from the associated mobile terminal 470 (excluding mobile terminals MST for attendants possessed by attendants such as hall clerks who patrol the hall) are included in the initial communication settings. When the portable terminal 470') is placed (set) in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300, various game devices provided on the game board 4 start operating. In the case of maintaining the state in which it is not possible to do so, the game information display device processing and the command transmission/reception processing, which will be described later, are not performed.

In addition, in the mobile terminal monitoring process, the game information display device process is performed following the initial communication settings. This game information display device processing outputs various signals to the game information display device DCNT shown in FIG. Various information of the game information display device DCNT is set based on various signals from DCNT. The game information display device information acquisition storage area ( (not shown), various information is acquired from the game information display device DCNT, and a command corresponding to the acquired information is stored in the Bank (1fr) of the backup management target work area 4150ca of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. is set in the portable terminal transmission command storage area (not shown) in the .

In addition, in the portable terminal monitoring process, command transmission/reception processing is performed following communication initial setting and game information display device processing. This command transmission/reception process is a process of transmitting/receiving various commands to/from the mobile terminal 470. When various commands are received from the mobile terminal 470, they are stored in the received command storage area 4150cac of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. When various commands are set in the portable terminal transmission command storage area (not shown) in the Bank (1fr) of the backup management target work area 4150ca of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Send to terminal 470 .

Following step S1013, operation unit monitoring processing is performed (step S1014). In this operation unit monitoring process, in the operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later, the dial operation unit 401 is detected based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. Rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 (for example, various information obtained by acquiring operation of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) ) history information, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) is set based on the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Whether or not the unit 405 is operated is monitored, and whether or not to reflect the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the state of operation of the pressing operation unit 405 in the game effect is appropriately determined.

Following step S1014, display data output processing is performed (step S1016). In this display data output process, the VDP with built-in tone generator 4160a outputs the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the VDP with built-in tone generator 4160a in the display data creation process described later from channels CH1 and CH2 shown in FIG. Output to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the mobile terminal 470 (actually, the image data for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and the image data for the mobile terminal 470 is output to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900). Data is output from channel CH2 to portable terminal 470 via communication control circuit 4162a of communication control section 4162 shown in FIG. As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the portable terminal 470 . In the display data output process, if the drawing exceeds the drawing capability of the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is sent to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the portable terminal 470. It is designed to cancel the output. Although this makes it possible to prevent a delay in the processing time, so-called dropped frames may occur. A speaker housed in a speaker box 820 provided in the body frame 3 shown in FIG. The mechanism is such that priority can be given to synchronizing performances such as music, sound effects, and the like that match various performances from the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5 shown in FIG.

After step S1016, sound data output processing is performed (step S1018). In this sound data output process, sound data such as music and sound effects set in the tone generator built-in VDP 4160a in the sound data creation process described later is output as serialized audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. In addition, the sound data of the notification sound and notification sound are output to the audio data transmission IC 4160c as serialized audio data. When serialized audio data is input from the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source, the audio data transmission IC 4160c converts the right audio data to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 as differential serial data with positive and negative signals. At the same time, the left audio data is transmitted to the frame-decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data with positive and negative signals. As a result, music, sound effects, and the like are reproduced in stereo from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5, as well as the notification sound and notification sound. are also played in stereo.

Following step S1018, scheduler update processing is performed (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 15 are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in time series that constitute the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, the number of screen data from the top screen data is transferred to the tone generator VDP 4160a. Update the pointer to indicate whether to output.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in time series that constitute the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, the number of the light emission data from the first light emission data is changed to light emission of various LEDs. Update the pointer to indicate which mode to use.

In the scheduler update process, the sound data such as music and sound effects, and the sound data of the notification sound and notification sound, which are arranged in time series and constitute the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, are instructed. Of the sound command data, the pointer is updated to indicate what order of the sound command data from the top sound command data is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a.

In the scheduler update process, among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, the first drive data is The pointer is updated to indicate which drive data is to be output. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which constitute the electric drive source schedule data, are repeatedly executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt, which will be described later. It is updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing, which is repeatedly executed each time this 1ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is executed. Update the pointer to the data and update the pointer each time you do your own work. In other words, the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be instructed, the scheduler updating process is forcibly instructed to the drive data that should be originally instructed.

Following step S1020, received command analysis processing is performed (step S1022). In this received command analysis processing, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, and the received various commands are analyzed. Various commands are received in the command transmission/reception processing in the mobile terminal monitoring processing in step S1013, and the received various commands are analyzed. Various commands from the main control board 4100 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the received command storage area 4150cac of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. , various commands stored in the received command storage area 4150cac are analyzed. Various commands, shown in FIG. , various commands classified into normal figure synchronization effects, various commands classified into ordinary electric role effects related, various commands classified into notification display shown in FIG. 35, and status display There are various commands, various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified as others. The various commands from the mobile terminal 470 include a break time setting completion command for notifying that a break time has been set for taking a meal break or a break to refresh yourself after interrupting a game, a hall clerk, or the like. There is an attendant call request command or the like for transmitting a request to call an attendant.

After step S1022, warning processing is performed (step S1024). In this warning process, when the commands analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022 include various commands classified into the notification displays shown in FIG. Various control data in the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control unit 4150, such as the set schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and electrical drive source schedule data. It is extracted from the copy area 4150ce and set to 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. If the commands analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 include the door open command among the various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. The break time setting drawing command for displaying is extracted from the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control unit 4150, and is stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. It is set in the portable terminal transmission command storage area (not shown) in Bank (1fr). In addition, in the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in order of the priority registered in advance, and the abnormality notification is automatically changed to the remaining abnormality notification after the abnormality is resolved. It is designed to Thus, a plurality of abnormalities can be monitored simultaneously without losing information that one abnormality has occurred due to the occurrence of another abnormality after the occurrence of one abnormality and before the abnormality is resolved. can be done.

Following step S1024, RCT acquisition information update processing is performed (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The time information stored in the time information storage unit is updated. By this RCT acquisition information update processing, the hour, minute, and second, which are the time information stored in the time information storage unit, are updated, and based on the updated time information, the year, month, and month, which are the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit. date is updated.

Following step S1026, lamp data creation processing is performed (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and based on the light emission data indicated by the pointer among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. , game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decoration boards provided on the game board 4 shown in FIG. 4150 of the peripheral control ROM 4150b or various control data copy area 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to multiple LEDs of various decorative substrates provided in the peripheral control ROM 4150b or peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control unit 4150 It is created by extracting it from the control data copy area 4150ce and set in the transmission data storage area 4150cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG.

Following step S1028, display data creation processing is performed (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer, out of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation, is displayed by the peripheral control unit. 4150 of the peripheral control ROM 4150b or various control data copy area 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and output to the tone generator built-in VDP 4160a. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data, creates sprite data, and displays it on the game board side liquid crystal display device. Drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the 1900 and the portable terminal 470 is generated on the built-in VRAM.

After step S1030, sound data creation processing is performed (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation, the sound command data indicated by the pointer is It extracts from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy area 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and outputs it to the tone generator built-in VDP 4160a. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b and controls the built-in sound source to generate the sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated in accordance with the track number specified in the data, and the output channel to be used is set in accordance with the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak shown in FIG. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob 4140a is converted into 1024 steps of values from 0 to 1023. In this embodiment, the values in 1024 steps are divided into 7 and managed as board volumes 0 to 6. Board volume 0 is set to mute and board volume 6 is set to maximum volume. Each is set so that the volume increases toward the volume 6. - 特許庁By controlling the built-in sound source VDP 4160a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 so that the sound volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, the sound data is serialized in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the transmission IC 4160c, music and sound effects are played from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5. FIG.

In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound are designed to flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, and the volume from mute to maximum volume can be controlled by the program. The built-in VDP 4160a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from mute to maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into 7 steps described above. For example, even if a hall clerk or the like turns the knob of the volume control volume 4140a to set the volume to a low level, the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the body frame 3 and the door frame 5 may Although the performance sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the provided speaker 130 are reduced, the volume is increased when there is a problem with the pachinko game machine 1 or when the player is cheating. (maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk from noticing the occurrence of a problem or the player's fraudulent behavior due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and the portable terminal 470 is made more powerful by increasing the volume of the sound, or the game state is shifted to an advantageous game state for the player. You can also notify them that there is a high possibility of doing so.

After step S1032, backup processing is performed (step S1034). In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control SRAM 4150d are copied and backed up in the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 4150c is backed up every frame in the backup target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. Lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, reception command storage area 4150cac, RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, schedule The effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in the data storage area 4150cae, the portable terminal transmission command storage area (not shown), and the game information display device output data storage area, is used as the effect backup information (1fr) in the backup stage. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) of the 1 area 4150cb at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc at high speed. make a copy.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) are specified to be copied to Bank1 (1fr) in the first backup area 4150cb, and the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) are copied to the end address of Bank0 (1fr). The contents up to the stored content are copied in sequence from the top address of Bank 1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). 4150ac specifies to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank2 (1fr) in the first backup area 4150cb, and copies the contents stored in the top address of Bank0 (1fr) to Bank0 (1fr ) up to the end address of Bank2 (1fr) of the first backup area 4150cb in sequence from the start address of Bank2 (1fr) of the first backup area 4150cb.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, ) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are successively stored by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) at the start address of Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. , and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. Then, the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are continuously transferred to Bank4 ( 1fr) are copied in order from the first address.

In the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d is backed up every frame in the backup target work area 4150da shown in FIG. Effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), is stored in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) of the first backup area 4150db as effect backup information (SRAM). , and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) are specified to be copied to Bank1 (SRAM) in the first backup area 4150db, and the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) are copied to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). The contents up to the stored contents are copied in sequence from the head address of Bank 1 (SRAM) of the first backup area 4150db by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa performs the peripheral control DMA controller. Copying the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank2 (SRAM) in the first backup area 4150db is specified as the request factor of 4150ac, and the contents stored in the top address of Bank0 (SRAM) are copied to Bank0 (SRAM ) up to the end address of the first backup area 4150db are copied in sequence from the start address of Bank 2 (SRAM) in the first backup area 4150db.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. ) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) are continuously backed up by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at the start address of Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc. , and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. Then, the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) are continuously transferred to Bank4 of the backup second area 4150dc by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). SRAM) are copied in order from the first address.

Following step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clearing process, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset.

Following step S1036, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to 0 as the completion of the steady-state processing of the peripheral controller (step S1038), and the process returns to step S1006 to set the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 0. is set for initialization, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing to be described later. That is, in step S1008, the system waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006. Thus, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing from step S1009 to step S1038 is called "peripheral control unit regular processing".

This peripheral controller steady-state processing starts by setting the value 1 to the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG assuming that the peripheral controller steady-state processing is being executed in step S1009, and starts 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing in step S1010. , and step S1036, and finally in step S1038, the normal processing flag SP-FLG is set to 0 to indicate completion of the normal processing of the peripheral control unit. It will be done. The peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal is input from the built-in tone generator VDP 4160a to indicate that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be accepted. A value of 1 is set in peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the mobile terminal 470 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, so the V blank signal is input. The interval between the two is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). In other words, the peripheral controller steady-state processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[15-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, as shown in FIG. 14, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 can be accepted is input from the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed with this as a trigger will be described. When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. 58 (step S1045). As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. Each of them is set to a value of 0 when the processing is completed.

When the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control section steady-state processing is being executed, this routine ends. On the other hand, when the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050), Exit this routine. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing. They are each set to a value of 0 when no routine processing is executed.

In this embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether or not the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. In some cases, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 in step S1050. When the signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1, it is determined in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. Since the peripheral controller steady-state processing is forcibly canceled in the middle and the execution of the peripheral controller steady-state processing is started from the beginning, in order to prevent this, in step S1009 in the peripheral controller power-on processing (peripheral controller steady-state processing) of FIG. By setting the value 1 to the processing in-progress flag SP-FLG, the fact that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed is transmitted to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, and the peripheral control unit power supply in FIG. By setting the value 0 to the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG in step S1038 in the processing at the time of turning on (peripheral control unit steady-state processing), the completion of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is indicated by the peripheral control unit V blank which is this routine. By notifying the signal interrupt processing, it is determined in step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, whether or not the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed. It is determined whether or not it is completed. In other words, this is a measure to be taken when the peripheral controller steady-state processing cannot be completed until the next V-blank signal is input after the V-blank signal is input, which is a so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady-state processing, if the processing cannot be completed within a time of about 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next time is determined in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. is in a standby state until the V blank signal is input. That is, the time required to execute the current peripheral controller steady-state processing that has failed is approximately 66.6 ms. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is normally executed every time a 1 ms interrupt timer occurs due to activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit regular processing) in FIG. is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process. is executed only 32 times. That is, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing which is timer interrupt control are not consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral controller steady-state processing fails, it is possible to reliably match the state of progress of the presentation.

[15-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 57 will be described. . When this peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. is determined (step S1100). As described above, the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by this routine after the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times that a certain peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the mobile terminal 470 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, so the V blank signal is input. The interval between the two is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed at intervals of about 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. is executed, the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the second, . will occur.

If the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 in step S1100, that is, if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine ends. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the priority of the interrupt processing is given to the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to this 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, , the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is newly started due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is incremented by 1 (step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed increases by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Of the drive data for electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. is driven, the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series, and the pointer is updated each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is performed. Here, serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. When the continuous transmission to the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is started, first, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c are transmitted. Drive signal to dial drive motor 414 of operation unit 400 shown in FIG. is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores transmission data for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. The first byte of the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the top address of the area 4150caf is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. transfer and write to the transmit buffer register of the serial I/O port for As a result, the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. starts transmitting 1-byte data bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac receives a transmission interrupt request for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte data.), peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is not using the bus, the remaining door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf are stored 1 byte each, the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and via the peripheral bus 4150ai to the transmission buffer register of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port for writing, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port receives this write data. transfer the data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, start transmitting the 1-byte data of the transmission shift register bit by bit in synchronization with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and frame decoration drive amplifier board Continuous transmission is performed by the motor serial I/O port.

In the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Here too, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 15 is used to perform serial I/O port continuous transmission for the motor drive board. When the motor drive board serial I/O port continuous transmission is started, first, the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c are configured. A motor for moving various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 shown in FIG. and the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting the drive signal to the solenoid is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy area 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. 15 is set in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores it in the top address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. The first byte of the received game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is sent to the transmission buffer of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer and write to a register. As a result, the serial I/O port for the motor drive board transfers the data written in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK. Start sending byte data bit by bit.

Every time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I/O port for the motor drive board occurs, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the transmission buffer register for the serial I/O port for the motor drive board Triggered by the fact that the written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register is empty because there is no more 1-byte data.), the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is using the bus. If not, the rest of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag are transferred byte by byte via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. , by transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board, the serial I/O port for the motor drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, In synchronization with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK, 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed through the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 4 are input or not, thereby detecting history information (for example, original position history information) of detection signals from various detection switches. , movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. It is possible to acquire the original positions, movable positions, etc. of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 from the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah.

Following step S1106, operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this operation unit information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 are input, thereby detecting history information of detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, the dial operation unit). 401 rotation (rotation direction) history information, and operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.), and stores the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Set to 4150 cai. The rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and whether or not the pressing operation unit 405 is operated can be acquired from history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai.

Following step S1108, game information display device information acquisition processing is performed (step S1109). In this game information display device information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not various signals are input from the game information display device DCNT shown in FIG. Call button DCNTb is operated to create staff call release information that informs that the staff call state has been released. It is set in a game information display device information acquisition storage area (not shown) in Bank (1 ms) of area 4150ca. Various information from the game information display device DCNT can be obtained from history information of various signals from the game information display device DCNT set in this game information display device information acquisition storage area (not shown).

Following step S1109, backup processing is performed (step S1110), and this routine ends. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control SRAM 4150d are copied and backed up in the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, every time a 1ms interrupt timer occurs in the backup target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. Each time, Bank0 (1ms) to be backed up includes a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, and a movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah. , the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai, and the game information display device information acquisition storage area 4150cai, and the effect information (1ms) stored in the game information display device information acquisition storage area as the effect backup information (1ms), Bank 1 (1ms) of the backup first area 4150cb ) and Bank2 (1 ms) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) of the backup second area 4150cc.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) are specified to be copied to Bank1 (1ms) in the first backup area 4150cb, and the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1ms) are copied to the end address of Bank0 (1ms). The contents up to the stored contents are copied in sequence from the top address of Bank 1 (1ms) of the first backup area 4150cb by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). Copying the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank2 (1ms) in the first backup area 4150cb is specified as the request factor of 4150ac, and the contents stored in the top address of Bank0 (1ms) are copied to Bank0 (1ms). ) up to the end address of Bank 2 (1 ms) in the first backup area 4150cb in sequence from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank3 (1ms) of the backup second area 4150cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, ) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) are continuously stored in units of a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) from the start address of Bank3 (1 ms) of the second area 4150cc. , and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank4 (1ms) of the backup second area 4150cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. Then, the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1ms) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1ms) are successively transferred to Bank4 ( 1ms) are copied in order from the first address.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effects of steps S1104 to S1109 described above as the progress of the effects are executed within a period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. are doing. In the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and this peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, Therefore, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt will cause the peripheral control unit After forcibly canceling the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt processing and restarting the 1 ms interrupt timer again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed by newly generating the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started. That is, consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is prevented from collapsing. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the state of progress of the production.

In addition, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the portable terminal 470, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a are mounted on the periphery. The interval at which the V-blank signal is output may vary slightly in production lots of the control board 4140 as well. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute the part V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt, this It is possible to absorb the time lag due to slight changes in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[15-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 4100 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 4100 start to be transmitted as serial data, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 1-byte (8-bit) information is loaded into the reception buffer by the substrate serial I/O port, and when this loading is completed, an interrupt is generated and the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing is performed. One packet of the main-circumference serial data consists of 3 bytes. The 1st byte is the status, the 2nd byte is the mode, and the 3rd byte is the status and mode. is assigned a sum value calculated from

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 60 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100 can be received.

When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, when it is within the period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100 can be received, the peripheral 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the main control board serial I/O port built in the control MPU 4150a is taken in (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (incremented, step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the main circumference serial data is read out from the reception buffer. When it is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 2, and when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 3. An initial value of 0 is set to the reception counter SRXC when the power is turned on.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC is 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data, has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status, which is the first byte of the main-circumference serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main-circumference serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, are sequentially sent from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

When the reception counter SRXC is not 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status which is the 1st byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode which is the 2nd byte of the main circumference serial data, and the 3rd byte of the main circumference serial data. is not taken out from the reception buffer in order, a 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine ends. A 1-byte reception period timer is set in step S1208, thereby setting a period during which the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, or the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, can be received.

On the other hand, when the value of the reception counter SRXC is 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status, which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the 3 of the main circumference serial data. When the sum value of the byte is sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the initial value 0 is set to the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status, which is the first byte of the main-circumference serial data, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main-circumference serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values, and the total (sum value ) is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main-circumference serial data among the main-circumference serial data from the main control board 4100. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from a pachinko island facility, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, they generate static electricity and generate noise. in a receptive environment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 4150 side regards the status assigned as the first byte of the received main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data as numerical values. The total (sum value) is calculated using the main control board 4100, and does this calculated sum value match the sum value assigned as the 3rd byte of the main peripheral serial data among the main peripheral serial data from the main control board 4100? is determining whether or not As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data between the main control substrate 4100 and the peripheral control substrate 4140 has been affected by noise and changed to non-normal main peripheral serial data. be able to.

In step S1214, when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, the received main-circumference serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are stored in the received command storage area 4150cac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. (step S1216) and terminate this routine. This received command storage area 4150cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main circumferential serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main circumferential serial data are Stored in the 4150 cac peripheral controller receive ring buffer. This "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected. Remember. It should be noted that the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the status assigned as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the status assigned as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data when storing in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216. is stored in association with the mode assigned, and the sum value assigned as the third byte is discarded.

On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100 can be received is exceeded. Alternatively, in step S1214, when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202, does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, this routine is executed as it is. finish.

[15-1-5. Peripheral control unit blackout warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, as shown in FIG. 17, a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100 is input from the main control board 4100. Interrupt processing will be described. When this peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. signal) is input (step S1302). If the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in this judgment, the routine ends as it is.

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have passed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds. If two macroseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the routine returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If the signal has been input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have passed. In other words, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input for 2 microseconds after the start of the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine.

If the power failure warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing of this routine is started in step S1304, power failure warning command transmission processing is performed (step S1305). In this power outage warning command transmission process, when a power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) from the power outage monitoring circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100 is input from the main control board 4100, the top of the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. In order to transmit a power failure notice command (power failure notice information) to the mobile terminal 470 placed in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the dish top panel 314, the communication control circuit 4162a shown in FIG. Send. The portable terminal 470 that has received this power failure warning command starts an application that notifies that there is a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure.

After step S1305, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko game machine 1 is reduced by sequentially turning off the excitation of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 4, and extinguishing various LEDs. As a result, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU 4150a can operate even if the power to the pachinko game machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception waiting process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 4100, a period of at least 17 milliseconds is set so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a can receive the command being transmitted. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the above-described peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, and the received command storage area 4150cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. ) stores the received command.

Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In this command backup process, the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc at high speed.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copying of the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. Copy the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the control DMA controller 4150ac to the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the first backup area 4150cb. Then, a predetermined byte (for example, , 1 byte) of the received command storage area contained in Bank 1 (1fr) of the first backup area 4150cb in sequence from the first address, and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa requests the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. copy the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb, and store in Bank0 (1fr) From the contents stored at the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored at the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr), each predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) is continuous. are copied in order from the first address of the received command storage area contained in Bank2 (1fr) of the first backup area 4150cb.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa includes the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac in Bank3 (1fr) of the second backup area 4150cc. specified to be copied to the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr), and stored from the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr). up to the contents of the received command are copied in sequence from the top address of the received command storage area contained in Bank 3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and then the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa transfers the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. Copy is specified, and the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is copied to a predetermined address. Bytes (for example, 1 byte) are successively copied from the start address of the received command storage area contained in Bank 4 (1fr) of the second backup area 4150cc.

After step S1310, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) has been input (step S1312). When the power failure warning signal is input in this determination, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clearing process, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af shown in FIG. 15 and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e shown in FIG. 14 to prevent the peripheral control MPU 4150a from being reset. .

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal has not been input in step S1312, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input. In other words, it is endlessly determined whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input. By endlessly continuing determination in this way, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sends a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e. is not output, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset. On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1312, WDT clear processing is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset, the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 57 is started again.

As described above, when the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) continues in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312, the WDT clearing process is executed in step S1314 to perform the peripheral control immediately before the power failure occurs. The MPU 4150a is designed not to be reset. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power failure warning signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop, the WDT clear processing is not executed. The output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit blackout warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise is generated beyond the period of 2 microseconds and the judgment in step S1302 is passed, step If it is determined in S1312 that the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not continued and canceled in the infinite loop, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset because the WDT clearing process of step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, such noise can be dealt with by automatically resetting.

[16. Image displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device on the game board side]
Next, images displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 provided on the game board 4 shown in FIG. 8 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 62 and 63. FIG. The image displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is generated by the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. It is drawn by executing the control unit regular processing and the like. As a result, various effects are performed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side. First, an image such as a variable display displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 will be described, followed by an explanation of a seat leaving notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 . FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device on the game board side, and FIG. 63 shows an example of a seat leaving notification image displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device on the game board side. It is a diagram.

[16-1. Images such as variable display displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device on the game board side]
First, an image such as a variable display displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 will be described with reference to FIG. 8 by the main control side main processing of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 38 by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. The first special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball into the upper start port 2101, or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball into the lower start port 2102 shown in FIG. Then, the number of repetitions (the number of rounds) of the opening and closing operation of the big winning opening 2103 shown in FIG. When a game ball enters the big winning hole 2103 and the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls), the round is completed, and one game ball enters the big winning hole 2103. A predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15 balls) are paid out each time a ball is played.

The first special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the upper start port 2101, or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the lower start port 2102, from the main control board 4100 The peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 14 controls the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 based on the various commands shown in FIG. The variable display of the decorative pattern 1950a on the left side of the display area of the display device 1900, the decorative pattern 1950b in the center, and the decorative pattern 1950c on the right side is started, and after a predetermined time has passed, the variable display of the decorative patterns 1950a to 1950c is stopped. The player can recognize the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, and at this time, the upper special pattern display 1185 or the lower special The result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery can also be confirmed with the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed on the symbol display 1186.例文帳に追加When the decorative patterns 1950a to 1950c are variably displayed, the decorative patterns 1950a to 1950c are translucent to the extent that the background image can be visually recognized. is variably displayed from the upper center to the lower center of the display area, and the decorative pattern 1950c is variably displayed from the upper right side to the lower right side of the display area as if reels were rotating. there is

As shown in FIG. 62(a), when the variable display of the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c is started and the stop symbols of the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c are stopped and displayed with the same decorative symbols after a predetermined period of time has passed, the above-mentioned operation is performed. It will be a "big hit". On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 62(a), the variable display of the decorative patterns 1950a to 1950c is started, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the stopped patterns of the decorative patterns 1950a to 1950c are displayed as shown in FIG. If the same decorative pattern is not stopped and displayed, it will be "missing". At this time, there is no reserved ball (that is, the upper special symbol memory display 1184 and the lower special symbol memory display 1187 of the function display unit 1180 shown in FIG. When (the number of held balls) and the number of held balls (the number of held balls) regarding the acceptance of game balls to the lower start port 2102 are not displayed, respectively, and the number of held balls is zero), the upper start port 2101 or Even if the game ball does not enter the lower starting port 2102, when the player is playing the game by touching the front 506 of the rotary handle main body shown in FIG. The payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the board 4110 informs the main control board 4100 that the palm or fingers are touching the front 506 of the rotary handle body. Since the fact that the finger is being touched is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140 becomes the screen of the customer waiting state shown in FIG. 62(c). The demonstration screen is not drawn in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, and the state in which the stop symbols of the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c shown in FIG. 62(b) are displayed (that is, the game screen) is maintained. It is designed to be At this time, sound effects and music continue to flow without being faded out.

On the other hand, when the player leaves the seat of the pachinko game machine 1 or interrupts the game so that the palm or fingers are separated from the rotary handle body front 506 and the game is not played, a payout is made. The payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 of the control board 4110 informs the main control board 4100 that the palm or fingers are not touching the front 506 of the rotary handle body, and the main control board 4100 sends the palm to the front 506 of the rotary handle body. Since it is designed to inform the peripheral control board 4140 that the fingers are not touched, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140 receives the mobile terminal 470 received at the reception of the hall. Even in the state of being placed in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. In the mobile terminal monitoring process of step S1013 in the steady process, as described above, the state where the game ball does not enter the upper starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102 continues, and the reserved balls are digested and become zero. If this happens, permission to perform a demonstration with a screen in the customer waiting state is set, and after the demonstration is performed, a shift to the power saving mode is set. As a result, the demonstration screen, which is the screen of the customer waiting state shown in FIG. At this time, sound effects and music are set to mute. Then, when the demonstration screen is drawn in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 for a predetermined number of times (for example, three times in the present embodiment), the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 shifts to the power saving mode. Nothing is displayed in the display area of the display device 1900 (that is, the screen is completely black). At this time, various lamps provided on the door frame 5 and various lamps provided on the game board 4 shown in FIG. 2 are turned off.

When the demonstration screen is drawn in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and progresses, or when the power saving mode is set, the player touches the front 506 of the rotary handle body with the palm or finger. When the game is played (started), the stop symbols of decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c shown in FIG. It is designed to switch. That is, based on the game ball entering the upper starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102, the decorative patterns 1950a to 1950c shown in FIG. 62(a) change from the demonstration screen shown in FIG. 62(c). When the display suddenly switches to the screen where the display is started, or the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 in the power saving mode does not display anything (that is, the state becomes a black screen), the state shown in FIG. It is designed not to suddenly switch to the screen where the variable display of the decorative patterns 1950a to 1950c is started.

As described above, in this embodiment, the player places the portable terminal 470 received at the hall reception on the concave portion 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. A state in which the game ball does not enter the upper start port 2101 or the lower start port 2102 continues even though the player has not left the seat of the pachinko game machine 1 or interrupted the game. Even when the reserved balls are digested and the number of pieces becomes zero, the customer waiting shown in FIG. Since it is designed not to switch to the demonstration screen, which is the state screen, the stress of switching to the demonstration screen even though the game is in progress, such as frustration and humiliation, reduces the player's desire to play. It can be suppressed.

[16-2. Image of Seat Leaving Notification Displayed in Display Area of Liquid Crystal Display Device]
Next, referring to FIG. 63, a description will be given of an image of the seat leaving notification displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. FIG. When a player is playing a game while sitting in front of the pachinko game machine 1, there are cases where the player leaves the seat to take a restroom break, purchase a drink, or the like. When the player leaves the seat, the mobile terminal 470 and the surrounding area can be removed (by lifting) the mobile terminal 470 from the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. Communication with the control board 4140 becomes impossible. Triggered by this, the peripheral control board 4140 starts measuring the elapsed time when communication with the mobile terminal 470 is disabled, that is, the elapsed time after the player takes out (lifts) the mobile terminal 470 from the recess 314d. It's like When the portable terminal 470 is not placed in the recess 314d, the peripheral control board 4140 determines that the player is not ready to start the game by sitting in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A seat leaving notification screen for notifying that the player is leaving the seat is displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 .

Specifically, in the mobile terminal monitoring process of step S1013 in the peripheral control unit steady-state process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. When the portable terminal 470 is taken out of the recess 314d (lifted) from the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the unit 300, the peripheral control board 4140 is placed on the pachinko machine 1. It is determined that the player is not ready to start the game by sitting in front of the player, and in order to notify that the player is away from the seat, as shown in FIG. In the center of the display area, control is performed so that the message MS30 "away from seat" is displayed in a large size as a screen for notifying the user of leaving the seat. By maintaining the state of notifying the player by displaying the screen of leaving the seat in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the fact that the player is leaving the seat can be continuously notified.

In addition, the leaving notification screen is displayed when the player who has left the seat returns to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and places (sets) the mobile terminal 470 in the concave portion 314 d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 . ), the state displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is maintained. However, as described above, an attendant such as a hall clerk who patrols the hall places the attendant portable terminal MST that he/she owns on the concave portion 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300. Then, the elapsed time from when the player who left the seat takes out (lifts) the mobile terminal 470 from the concave portion 314d is displayed in the display area of the attendant mobile terminal MST, and the elapsed time displayed on the screen is the predetermined time ( In this embodiment, when 15 minutes have passed, the correspondence relationship between the portable terminal 470 possessed by the player who left the seat and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is canceled, and the customer exits from the seat leaving notification screen. It is designed to switch to a demonstration that is a waiting screen. As a result, the correspondence relationship between the portable terminal 470 possessed by the player who has left the seat and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cancelled, so that when an attendant such as a hall clerk takes out the attendant portable terminal MST from the concave portion 314d ( When lifted), the pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control board 4140) can accept a portable terminal 470' possessed by another player. In other words, another player can sit on the front surface of the pachinko game machine 1 and place the portable terminal 470' on the concave portion 314d formed on the right side of the plate unit 300 to start the game. there is When an attendant such as a hall clerk takes out (lifts up) the attendant portable terminal MST from the concave portion 314d, the screen of the away notification screen is switched to the screen of the customer waiting state, and this demonstration is performed. If the mobile terminal is not placed (set) in the concave portion 314d and the game is not started while the game is being played, the game moves to the power saving mode after the demonstration.

In this way, when the player sits in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and is playing a game, for example, when he or she leaves the seat to take a restroom break or buy a drink, the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. By removing (lifting) the mobile terminal 470 from the recess 314d formed on the right side of the dish top panel 314, the mobile terminal 470 and the peripheral control board 4140 cannot communicate with each other. Triggered by this, the peripheral control board 4140 displays, in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, a seat leaving notification screen for notifying that the player is away from the seat. As a result, other players other than the player who has left the pachinko gaming machine 1 have already started playing by viewing the leaving notification screen displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. Since it is possible to understand that the game is interrupted due to restroom breaks, purchase of drinks, etc., it is possible to restart the game by mistakenly sitting in front of the pachinko game machine 1 during the interruption of the game. can be prevented. Therefore, even if the player leaves the seat, it is possible to prevent the game from being restarted by another player until the player returns to the original seat.

[17. Image displayed in the display area of the mobile device]
Next, images displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal 470 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66. FIG. First, the error notification image displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal 470 will be described, followed by the description of the break time setting image displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal 470 . The image of the call to the attendant to be called will be described, and the image of the notification of the occurrence of the power failure displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal 470 will be described. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing an example of an error notification image displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal, and FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example of an image of setting the break time displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing an example of an image of calling a member of staff displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal, and FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an example of an image of a power failure notification displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal. .

[17-1. Error notification image displayed in the display area of the mobile device]
First, the error notification image displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal 470 will be briefly described with reference to FIG. The state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, etc. on the error LED indicator 860b provided on the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. When the player is playing a game by placing the mobile terminal 470 received at the hall reception on the concave portion 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. When an error occurs in the state of the machine 1, the content displayed on the error LED display 860b is also displayed in the display area of the portable terminal 470 as an error notification screen, which can be used by hall clerks and the like. 1, before the body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2 shown in FIG. It's becoming

Specifically, for example, when the number "1" is displayed on the error LED indicator 860b, the display area of the portable terminal 470 is displayed as shown in FIG. , the rear photo PIC of the pachinko game machine 1 is displayed on the right side thereof, and a message MS0 indicating that it is an error notification screen is displayed on the upper left side thereof. A message MS1 that conveys the content of the error is displayed as 'Blowout' (No. 1). In this example, as the message MS1, the content of "out of bulb" is displayed, and "NO. 1", which is the number "1" displayed on the error LED indicator 860b, is displayed. . Underneath this message MS1, there is a message stating "The ball has run out." Open the body frame and inspect the flashing points A to C in the right figure. is displayed as message MS2. In this example, as a specific procedure for resolving the error of "running out of balls", an instruction is given to inspect the prize ball tank 720 at a position corresponding to the prize ball tank 720 in the back photograph PIC of the pachinko game machine 1. The procedure A to be performed is displayed blinking in red with the letter A surrounded by a circle (EP0), and the procedure B instructing to inspect the tank rail 731 at the position corresponding to the tank rail 731 is surrounded by the letter B. In the closed state (EP1), it is displayed blinking in red, and the procedure C instructing to inspect the prize ball unit 700 at the position corresponding to the prize ball unit 700 is circled (EP2). Flashes in red. In this way, procedure A, procedure B, then procedure C, returning to procedure A again, procedure B, . to be notified.

In addition, below the message MS2, a message "Press the operation switch to cancel the error. is displayed as message MS3. In this example, in the back photograph PIC of the pachinko game machine 1, the characters "operation switch" indicating the position of the operation switch 860a are displayed as the state (ER) of the balloon characters in red. As described above, the operation switch 860a can cancel the error if it is operated when an error is reported after the power is turned on.

Also, a 7-segment image ED imitating the error LED indicator 860b is displayed on the lower left side of the display area of the mobile terminal 470 below the message MS3. In this example, since the number "1" that indicates "out of bulb" is displayed on the error LED indicator 860b, the number "1" is displayed in red on the 7-segment image ED, and the dot is also displayed in red.

When an error occurs in the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the pachinko hall clerk or the like can change the content displayed in the display area of the portable terminal 470 before releasing the main frame 3 from the outer frame 2 shown in FIG. In addition, the content displayed on the error LED display 860b can be known, and even a person other than a person who is familiar with the pachinko game machine 1 can understand the procedure for solving the error. You can find out without looking up the manual. Also, in order to actually solve the error, the hall clerk or the like opens the main body frame 3 from the outer frame 2 and places the portable terminal 470 on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. While looking at the message MS2 displayed in the display area of the portable terminal 470 and the back photograph PIC of the pachinko game machine 1, the inspection place of the pachinko game machine 1 can be easily found (specified). In addition, it is possible to reliably check one by one according to the procedure. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the early resolution of the error that occurred in the pachinko game machine 1 .

When the hall clerk or the like releases the main body frame 3 from the outer frame 2 and operates the operation switch 860a, the error notification state can be canceled. While the contents of the error continue to be displayed on the display 860b, the contents displayed in the display area of the portable terminal 470 when the portable terminal 470 is removed from the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 are also displayed. It does not change. When the hall clerk or the like resolves the error and the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. A figure "-" is displayed to notify that the device is "normal". When the hall clerk or the like clears the error and returns the portable terminal 470 to the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300, the display area of the portable terminal 470 shows the message shown in FIG. After the text "Error has been resolved" is displayed in a large size in the center of the display area of the mobile terminal 470 from the notification screen of the error display, the game screen (the screen during the game before switching to the notification screen of the error display) is displayed. screen).

[17-2. Image of the break time setting displayed in the display area of the mobile device]
Next, the image for setting the break time displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal 470 will be briefly described with reference to FIG. When a player is seated in front of the pachinko game machine 1 and is playing a game, he/she leaves the seat to take a meal break (including a break to refresh himself/herself by interrupting the game; hereinafter the same). Sometimes. In such a case, the player calls the hall clerk and informs the hall clerk or the like that he/she is leaving the seat. The hall clerk, etc. will say, "Please return to your seat by what time and call the hall clerk again." Please call a clerk or the like." is conveyed to the player. The hall clerk or the like communicates with the manager of the hall by wireless device that the door frame 5 shown in FIG. 1 is to be released from the main frame 3 shown in FIG. 1, and the game board shown in FIG. A plate "resting" is placed in front of the game area 1100 of No. 4, and the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3 again. The hall clerk or the like has a terminal for operating the game information display device DCNT shown in FIG. Carrying it around the hall. The game information display device DCNT displays information about games in the data display section DCNTa. As described above, this game-related information includes, for example, the number of big wins, the number of fluctuations until the big win, the number of times the big win continues, and the time the player left his seat (the game information display device DCNT It also has a function of measuring the time when the person left the seat.) and the like. In other words, the data display part DCNTa displays the number of hits, the number of fluctuations up to the hit, the number of consecutive hits, and the time the player left his seat. You can do it. Information about these games is transmitted to the management terminal of the hall via the pachinko island facility.

The hall clerk or the like communicates with the hall manager by wireless device that the door frame 5 is to be released from the main body frame 3, and places a plate "resting" in front of the game area 1100 of the game board 4. - 特許庁Then, when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3 again, the terminal is used to operate the game information display device DCNT to start timing the time when the player leaves the seat. Also, the hall clerk or the like can use the terminal to display the time when the player left the seat on the data display section DCNTa of the game information display device DCNT.

In this embodiment, when the player is sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and is playing a game, when he leaves his seat to take a meal break, he calls the hall clerk, as shown in FIG. A break time setting screen is displayed in the display area of the portable terminal 470 placed in the recess 314 d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 . In other words, an application for setting break times is pre-installed in the mobile terminal 470 . This application is activated by an instruction command from the peripheral control board 4140 (rest time setting drawing command to be described later).

Specifically, when the player is sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and is playing a game, when he leaves his seat to take a meal break, he calls a hall clerk. , as described above, communicates with the manager of the hall by wireless device, informs that the door frame 5 is to be released from the main body frame 3, releases the door frame 5 from the main body frame 3, and opens the game area of the game board 4. A plate "resting" is placed in front of 1100 and the door frame 5 is closed to the body frame 3 again. When the door frame 5 is released from the body frame 3 by this action, the door frame open switch 618 shown in FIG. 35 to the peripheral control board 4140 based on the logic of the main frame door open signal. The frame opening switch 618 is transmitted to the main control board 4100 as a main frame door opening signal via the payout control board 4110, and the main control board 4100 opens the door shown in FIG. 35 based on the logic of the main frame door opening signal. Send a close command to peripheral control board 4140 .

The peripheral control board 4140 analyzes various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 in the received command analysis processing of step S1022 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. When the received command includes a door opening command from the main control board 4100, the mobile terminal 470 placed in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 is notified of the break time. The break time setting drawing command for displaying the setting screen is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy area 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and is backed up in the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. It is set in the portable terminal transmission command storage area (not shown) in Bank (1fr) of the managed work area 4150ca. Then, the break time set in the mobile terminal transmission command storage area (not shown) in the command transmission/reception process of the mobile terminal monitoring process in step S1013 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. A setting drawing command is transmitted to the mobile terminal 470 .

The portable terminal 470 that has received this break time setting drawing command activates an application for setting the break time. When this application is started, as shown in FIG. 65(a), in the display area of the mobile terminal 470, a message MS10 indicating that it is a break time setting screen is displayed on the upper side of the display area. A scroll display area SC10 for setting a break time is displayed at the lower left of this message MS10. When a hall clerk or the like moves his or her finger from the bottom to the top of the scroll display portion SC10 while touching the scroll display portion SC10, it is as if the reels are rotating in the direction of increasing the break time by 5-minute increments. On the other hand, when moving from the upper side to the lower side while contacting the reel, the reel appears to rotate in the direction of decreasing the break time in increments of 5 minutes. The time highlighted in the center of the scroll display portion SC10 is set as the break time. When the rest time setting screen is drawn in the display area of the mobile terminal 470, the rest time set as the default (initial value) (45 minutes in this embodiment) is displayed in the center of the scroll display portion SC10. is highlighted as the default (initial value). From this description, it is assumed that the hall clerk or the like sets the default (initial value) break time of 45 minutes.

In the display area of mobile terminal 470, an OK button BT10 is displayed at the lower right of message MS10 and at the upper right of scroll display portion SC10, and a cancel button BT11 is displayed at the lower right of scroll display portion SC10. . When the hall clerk or the like taps the cancel button BT11 (touches the cancel button BT11), the portable terminal 470 terminates this application and changes from the break time setting screen to the break time setting screen before the break time setting screen is displayed. It is designed to switch (return) to the screen of

When the hall clerk or the like operates the scroll display unit SC10 to set the break time and taps the OK button BT10 (when the OK button BT10 is touched), the portable terminal 470 displays as shown in FIG. 65(b). In the area, above it, "Break time has been set. is displayed, and below this message MS11 is displayed a message MS12 of "45 minutes remaining until game restart time". In this state, after a predetermined period of time (15 seconds in this embodiment) has passed, the content of the message M11 is switched to the message MS13 "mission in progress". When the hall clerk or the like taps the OK button BT10 (touches the OK button BT10), a break time for taking a meal break or interrupting the game to refresh himself is set. A break time setting completion command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 .

A hall clerk or the like takes out (lifts) the portable terminal 470 from the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300, and hands it over to the player. Triggered by this, the portable terminal 470 starts counting the remaining time until the game restart time. On the other hand, as described above, the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) performs the recess If the portable terminal 470 is not placed on the 314d, it is determined that the player is not ready to sit in front of the pachinko game machine 1 and start the game, and a customer waiting state screen is displayed. After the demonstration is performed, the transition to the power saving mode is set.

In the mobile terminal 470, the remaining time until the game restart time is measured, and when three minutes remain, as shown in FIG. message MS13 is displayed, and below this message MS13 is displayed a message MS12 that reads "3 minutes left until game restart time", and the number "3", which is the remaining time of 3 minutes, is displayed blinking, and the background color is changed. It changes from white to bright red. At this time, the portable terminal 470 continues to vibrate, and the alarm sound "Boo, Boo, Boo" continues to sound.

In this state, when the portable terminal 470 is again placed on the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300, the communication between the portable terminal 470 and the peripheral control board 4140 is restored. Since the peripheral control board 4140 has already received the break time setting completion command, it determines that the meal break has ended, and transmits a command to stop the vibration and alarm sound to the portable terminal 470 . As a result, the vibration of the mobile terminal 470 and the alarm sound are stopped. Then, although not shown, in the display area of the mobile terminal 470, the background color is white and "Mission complete!" is displayed in a large red color, and in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 shown in FIG. , the background color is white and in the center is "Congratulations on completing the mission! ] is displayed in a large red message. Then, after a predetermined time (15 seconds in this embodiment) has passed, the contents displayed when the player leaves the seat of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are displayed in the display area of the portable terminal 470 and the display of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. are displayed in each area.

It should be noted that even if the remaining time exceeds 3 minutes until the game restart time (for example, when the remaining time until the game restart time is 5 minutes), the portable terminal 470 is formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300. When communication between the mobile terminal 470 and the peripheral control board 4140 is restored by placing the peripheral control board 4140 in the concave portion 314d, the peripheral control board 4140 always transmits a command to stop the vibration and the alarm sound. The mobile terminal 470 does not vibrate and does not sound an alarm when the remaining time exceeds 3 minutes until the game restart time (for example, when the remaining time until the game restart time is 5 minutes). Even if a command from 4140 is received, this received command is discarded.

In this way, when the player is sitting in front of the pachinko game machine 1 and is playing a game, when he leaves his seat to take a meal break, he calls the hall clerk and asks the staff as shown in FIG. A break time setting screen is displayed in the display area of the portable terminal 470 placed in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300, and the hall clerk or the like sets the break time. When the mobile terminal 470 is taken out (lifted) from the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the unit 300 and handed over to the player, the display area of the mobile terminal 470 shows how many minutes are left until the game restart time. By displaying whether or not, a mission to return to the pachinko game machine 1 again by the game restart time is started. In other words, the time in which the player continues to enjoy the game in the pachinko game machine 1 until the meal break is not interrupted by the meal break, but returns to the pachinko game machine 1 before the game restart time during the meal break. Even if the player is unable to play a game with the pachinko game machine 1 due to a meal break by giving the player a special mission for In order to carry out a special performance called a mission during a meal break, the player can experience the behavior of always returning by the game resuming time, even if it is no longer enjoyable. . As a result, the time during which the player continues to enjoy the game in the pachinko game machine 1 until the player takes a meal break is not interrupted by the meal break, but rather, during the meal break, the actions of the player himself/herself are reflected in the pachinko game machine. Even if you leave the production performed by the machine 1, the production based on your own experience will continue.

In addition, in the display area of the mobile terminal 470, it is possible to set the break time. There is no need to provide an operation button or an operation switch for setting the rest time, and there is no need to install a program for setting and timing the break time.

[17-3. Image of staff call displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal]
Next, the image of the call to the attendant displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal 470 will be briefly described with reference to FIG. A player sits on the front surface of the pachinko game machine 1 and plays a game, and a game ball launched toward the game area 1100 enters the upper starting port 2101 shown in FIG. 8 or the lower starting port 2102 shown in FIG. 38 by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 11 and the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. When the first special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the starting port 2101 or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the lower start port 2102 becomes a "big hit", it is shown in FIG. The number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing operation of the large winning opening 2103 is 15 rounds in total from 1 round to 15 rounds. When the ball enters and the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls), the round is digested, and each time one game ball enters the big winning hole 2103, a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) ) is paid out, which is an advantageous jackpot game state for the player.

The first special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the upper start port 2101, or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the lower start port 2102, from the main control board 4100 14 controls the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 based on the various commands shown in FIG. The variable display of the decorative pattern 1950a on the left side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the decorative pattern 1950b in the center, and the decorative pattern 1950c on the right side is started, and after a predetermined time has passed, the variable display of the decorative patterns 1950a to 1950c is started. It is stopped so that the player can recognize the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, and at this time, the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower The result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery can also be confirmed in the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed on the special symbol display 1186.例文帳に追加When the decorative patterns 1950a to 1950c are variably displayed, the decorative patterns 1950a to 1950c are translucent to the extent that the background image can be visually recognized. is variably displayed from the upper center to the lower center of the display area, and the decorative pattern 1950c is variably displayed from the upper right side to the lower right side of the display area as if reels were rotating. there is

As shown in FIG. 62(a), when the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c are stopped and displayed with the same decorative symbols after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c, the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. It will be a "big hit". On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 62(a), the variable display of the decorative patterns 1950a to 1950c is started, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the stopped patterns of the decorative patterns 1950a to 1950c are displayed as shown in FIG. If the same decorative pattern is not stopped and displayed, it will be "lost".

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 transmits a jackpot opening command shown in FIG. The peripheral control board 4140 analyzes various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 in the received command analysis processing of step S1022 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. When the received command includes a jackpot opening command from the main control board 4100, the jackpot opening is started in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and the jackpot game performance is developed, as shown in FIG. An attendant call drawing command for displaying a screen for calling an attendant such as a hall clerk is issued to the portable terminal 470 placed in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300. , extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and shown in FIG. Set in a storage area (not shown). Then, in the command transmission/reception processing of the mobile terminal monitoring processing in step S1013 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. A drawing command is transmitted to the mobile terminal 470 .

The portable terminal 470 that has received this call-staff drawing command activates an application for calling a staff member such as a hall clerk. That is, an application for calling an attendant such as a hall clerk is pre-installed in the mobile terminal 470 . When this application is started, as shown in FIG. 66(a), in the display area of the portable terminal 470, there is a call screen for calling a staff member such as a hall staff member. is displayed as a message MS20, and a rectangular call button BT20 for calling an attendant is displayed below this message MS20 and substantially in the center of the display area of the mobile terminal 470. FIG. A comment “call: long press” is drawn in the call button BT20, and the call button BT20 is drawn in the same color as the background color of the display area of the mobile terminal 470 (white in this embodiment). . When the player touches the call button BT20 with his/her finger, the background color of the call button BT20 changes (in this embodiment, it changes from white to red), and the content of the comment changes as shown in FIG. 66(b). changes from "call: long press" to "call: long press". When this state continues until a predetermined time (15 seconds in this embodiment) elapses, message MS20 disappears from the display area of mobile terminal 470 and mobile terminal 470 disappears, as shown in FIG. The background color of the display area changes from white to red, and the message MS21 "Calling" is displayed in a flickering manner in the center of the display area of the mobile terminal 470 . If the call button BT20 is not kept in contact with the finger until a predetermined time (15 seconds in this embodiment) elapses, the screen of FIG. to return to the initial screen for calling the staff shown in FIG.

When the mobile terminal 470 displays the message MS21 "Calling" in a blinking manner, the portable terminal 470 transmits an attendant call request command for transmitting a request to call an attendant such as a hall clerk. The peripheral control board 4140 also analyzes various commands transmitted from the portable terminal 470 in the received command analysis processing of step S1022 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. When the command includes an attendant call request command from the portable terminal 470, the output data for outputting the attendant call request signal to the game information display device DCNT shown in FIG. It is set in the game information display device output data storage area (not shown) in the Bank (1fr) of the backup management target work area 4150ca. Then, in the game information display device processing of the mobile terminal monitoring processing of step S1013 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. The received staff call request signal is output to the game information display device DCNT.

The game information display device DCNT to which this staff call request signal is input controls the state in which a call button DCNTb, which is provided in advance for calling a hall clerk or the like, is operated so that the data of the game information display device DCNT is displayed. A plurality of lamps (decorative lamps) provided on both sides of the display unit DCNTa emit light in a calling light emission mode, and the characters "calling" are scrolled on the data display unit DCNTa of the game information display device DCNTa to call the staff. state. When a hall clerk or the like rushes over and operates the call button DCNTb of the game information display device DCNT, the plurality of lamps of the game information display device DCNT stop emitting light in the call emission mode, and the data display portion DCNTa of the game information display device DCNT stops. By stopping the scrolling display of the characters "calling" by , the state of calling an attendant is cancelled.

When the hall clerk or the like operates the call button DCNTb of the game information display device DCNT to release the attendant call state, the game information display device DCNT outputs an attendant call release signal to the peripheral control board 4140 . The peripheral control board 4140 determines whether or not various signals are input from the game information display device DCNT in the game information display device information acquisition processing of step S1109 in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. Based on this determination, staff call release information is created as history information and set in the game information display device information acquisition storage area (not shown) in the Bank (1 ms) of the backup management target work area 4150ca of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. do. Then, the clerk set in the game information display device information acquisition storage area (not shown) in the command transmission/reception processing of the mobile terminal monitoring processing in step S1013 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. Based on the call release information, for example, it is determined whether or not the staff call release signal is input continuously (every 1 ms) a predetermined number of times (4 times in this embodiment), When the attendant call cancel signal is input, the attendant call cancel command is transmitted to the portable terminal 470 in order to inform the portable terminal 470 to that effect.

The portable terminal 470, which has received this wait staff call release command, returns to the normal background color (white in this embodiment) from the display mode of FIG. displayed large.

In this way, the player sits on the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and plays a game, and the game balls fired toward the game area 1100 are ejected from the upper starting port 2101 shown in FIG. 8 and the lower starting port shown in FIG. 38 by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. When the first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball to the upper start port 2101 or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball to the lower start port 2102 becomes a "big hit" by processing etc. Since a plurality of game balls are paid out one after another as prize balls from the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 3, when the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. The game balls are paid out one after another to the lower tray 302 of . Since a so-called "dollar box" is arranged below the lower tray 302, game balls stored in the lower tray 302 can be dropped into the dollar box. Since the number of game balls that can be stored in the dollar box is limited, the game information display device is arranged above the pachinko game machine 1 in order to replace the empty dollar box with another empty dollar box before the dollar box becomes full. It is necessary to reach out to the DCNT call button DCNTb and operate it to call a hall clerk or the like. However, during the big win, the player cannot get the prize ball unless he rotates the front rotary handle main body 506 shown in FIG. to the call button DCNTb of the game information display device DCNT arranged above the pachinko game machine 1. Elderly players cannot reach with their left hand and have to stand up slightly from their seats to operate the machine in a crouched state, which is a burden on their lower backs.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when a "jackpot" is reached, the opening of the jackpot is started in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 to develop the jackpot game effect, and the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 is opened. A call-staff call drawing command for displaying a screen for calling an attendant such as a hall clerk is sent to the mobile terminal 470 placed in the recess 314d formed on the right side. An application for calling an attendant such as a hall clerk is activated. As a result, the player can reach the call button DCNTb of the game information display device DCNT arranged above the pachinko game machine 1 and directly operate the call button DCNTb displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal 470. By keeping the state of touching the BT 20 with the finger until a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 15 seconds) has elapsed, the hall clerk, etc. It is designed to be able to call the person in charge.

Further, in this embodiment, if the finger does not keep touching the call button BT20 until a predetermined time (15 seconds in this embodiment) elapses, the screen of long pressing shown in FIG. It returns to the initial screen for calling the staff shown in 65(a). This assumes that the player's finger happens to touch the call button BT20, and waits until the player's will can be confirmed for a predetermined period.

[17-4. Power failure notification image displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal]
Next, an image indicating the occurrence of a power failure displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal 470 will be briefly described with reference to FIG. The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 17 is supplied with +12V and +24V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. +24V is monitored for signs of blackout or momentary power failure. When the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e detects signs of power failure or momentary power failure of +12V and +24V, it outputs a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) to the peripheral control board 4140 via the main control board 4100. It is designed to be entered.

When a power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) is input to the peripheral control board 4140, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 executes the steps in the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process shown in FIG. In order to convey signs of power failure or momentary power failure of +12V and +24V by the power failure notice command transmission process of S1305, The communication control circuit 4162a shown in FIG. 14 controls the communication control circuit 4162a shown in FIG.

The mobile terminal 470 that has received this power failure notice command (power failure notice information) activates an application for notifying the player that there is a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . That is, the mobile terminal 470 is pre-installed with an application for notifying the player that there is a sign of power failure or momentary power failure in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . When this application is started, the display area of the mobile terminal 470 has a white background, as shown in FIG. 67, and the player is informed that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a power failure or a momentary power failure. "<<Power failure>" is displayed in red as a message MS40 to inform that the power failure notification screen for The hall clerk, etc. said, "Please call the staff. is displayed in red.

Peripheral control MPU4150a of the peripheral control board 4140, when the power is restored from the power failure or momentary power failure of the pachinko game machine 1 (at the time of power recovery), one of the initial setting process of step S1000 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. In the communication initial setting performed as a process, the communication initial setting for wirelessly exchanging each information (various data, various commands) with the portable terminal 470 in both directions is completed. As a result, the portable terminal 470 terminates the application for notifying the player that there is a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and outputs "game preparation completed" to indicate that the communication initialization has been completed. Characters are displayed large in the center of the display area.

Except for the case where power is not supplied from the pachinko island equipment to all the pachinko machines installed in the hall due to a power outage, only one pachinko machine 1 has a power outage or momentary power failure. has occurred (that is, the same state as when the power from the pachinko island facility is cut off), there is a high probability that some kind of electrical trouble has occurred, so the pachinko machine 1 is left as it is. If left unattended in this state, the main breaker of the hall may be tripped, which may cut off power from the pachinko island facilities to all other pachinko game machines, which is extremely dangerous. Therefore, in this embodiment, when there is a sign of power failure or momentary power failure in the pachinko gaming machine 1, by adopting a mechanism of displaying that fact in the display area of the mobile terminal 470, for example, the player can play the game. When a power outage suddenly occurs in the pachinko machine 1 (that is, the same state as when the power from the pachinko island facility is cut off), the action of the player Since the display area of the portable terminal 470 displays an image instructing to call a staff such as a hall clerk who patrols the hall, the pachinko game has a high probability that an electrical trouble has occurred. The machine 1 can be prevented from being left unattended. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state in which some electrical trouble has occurred from being left unattended.

In this way, when there is a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure in the pachinko gaming machine 1, an image instructing to call a hall clerk or other attendant who patrols the hall is displayed in the display area of the portable terminal 470. Therefore, an attendant such as a hall clerk who patrols the hall called by the player first inserts the key into the cylinder lock 1010 shown in FIG. By opening the frame 2 and operating (OFF operation) the power switch 852 shown in FIG. and various wiring (various harnesses) are discolored, burnt black, or have a burning smell. It is possible to check at an early stage from the state that has become the same state as the state).

In recent pachinko machines, when a player is playing a game, the liquid crystal display device on the game board side, various LEDs provided on the game board and the door frame are all turned off, and music and sound effects are emitted from the speaker. After maintaining for a certain period of time that no sound flows at all, suddenly an image is displayed on the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device, and various LEDs provided on the game board and door frame are glaringly emitted, and music and music are emitted from the speaker. There is a game that gives an impact to a player by playing a sound effect. In such an effect, the player may misunderstand that the pachinko machine 1 is in a state of power failure or momentary power failure and the game cannot be played. When there is a sign, an image instructing to call a staff such as a hall clerk who patrols the hall is displayed in the display area of the portable terminal 470, so that the above-described impact is given to the player. Even if such an effect is performed, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the pachinko game machine 1 is in a state in which the game cannot be played due to power failure or momentary power failure.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, it is possible to control the prize ball device 740 of FIG. can. A plate unit 300 (specifically, an upper plate 301 ) is arranged on the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 . 7 can be placed on the surface of the plate unit 300 (specifically, on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. 7). so that it can be placed in the formed recess 314d). Further, the plate unit 300 incorporates the mobile terminal charging device 460 of FIG. 7 capable of charging the mobile terminal 470 .

When the mobile terminal 470 is placed on the plate unit 300, the mobile terminal 470 is set to be able to communicate with the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. Specifically, the information that the portable terminal 470 is placed in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 4150ag. The peripheral control MPU 4150a to which this control signal is input controls the communication control circuit 4162a by outputting the control signal from the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 4150ag to the communication control circuit 4162a. Communication initial setting is performed for exchanging each information (various data, various commands) by radio in both directions.

The pachinko game machine 1 further includes a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100 in FIG. 17, and a power failure notice command transmission process in step S1305 in the peripheral controller power failure notice signal interrupt process in FIG. The power outage monitoring circuit 4100e can monitor signs of a power outage to the pachinko game machine 1, and the power outage notice command transmission processing is a power outage notice command (power outage notice information) that is a control command to the mobile terminal 470. ) can be transmitted by wireless communication. Specifically, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 17 is supplied with +12V and +24V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. +24V is monitored for signs of blackout or momentary power failure. The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 transmits a power failure notice command (power failure notice information), which is a control command, to FIG. The communication control circuit 4162a shown in FIG.

When the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100 of FIG. A power outage notice command (power outage notice information), which is a control command for displaying in the display area, is transmitted to the mobile terminal 470 by wireless communication in the power outage notice command transmission processing of step S1305 in the peripheral control unit power outage notice signal interrupt processing of FIG. You can do it. Specifically, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. signal) is input to the peripheral control board 4140 via the main control board 4100 . When a power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) is input to the peripheral control board 4140, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 outputs the power outage warning command in step S1305 in the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process shown in FIG. In order to transmit signs of +12 V and +24 V power outages or momentary power outages by transmission processing, the portable terminal 470 placed in the concave portion 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. A power outage notice command (power outage notice information), which is a control command, is transmitted by controlling the communication control circuit 4162a shown in FIG. The mobile terminal 470 that has received this power failure notice command (power failure notice information) activates an application for notifying the player that there is a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . That is, the mobile terminal 470 is pre-installed with an application for notifying the player that there is a sign of power failure or momentary power failure in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . When this application is started, the display area of the portable terminal 470 has a white background color, as shown in FIG. 67, and the player is informed that there is a sign of power failure or momentary power failure in the pachinko gaming machine 1 above it. "<<Power failure>" is displayed in red as a message MS40 to inform that the power failure notification screen is for a power failure, and the hall is circulated below this message MS40 and approximately in the center of the display area of the mobile terminal 470. Hall clerk, etc. ``Please call the staff. is displayed in red.

67 is displayed in the display area of the portable terminal 470 to inform the call of a hall clerk or other attendant who patrols the hall when a sign of power failure to the pachinko game machine 1 is detected. A power outage notice command (power outage notice information), which is a control command for displaying, is transmitted to the mobile terminal 470 by wireless communication. Therefore, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in the same state as when the power from the pachinko island facility is cut off due to some kind of electrical trouble, the player's action is to patrol the halls. Since an image instructing to call an attendant, such as a hall clerk, is displayed in the display area of the portable terminal 470, the pachinko machine 1 with a high probability of electrical trouble is left unattended. It is designed to be able to prevent Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state in which some electrical trouble has occurred from being left unattended.

[18. example]
It goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and can be embodied in various forms as long as they fall within the technical scope of the present invention.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, when a sign of power failure to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is detected, the image shown in FIG. A power failure notice command (power failure notice information), which is a control command for displaying a power failure notification image displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal 470 in the display area of the mobile terminal 470, is transmitted to the mobile terminal 470 by wireless communication. However, the portable terminal 470 that received this power failure notice command (power failure notice information) starts an application for notifying the player that there is a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition to displaying the image shown in FIG. 67 (the image of the power failure notification displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal 470), the mobile terminal management device for managing the mobile terminal 470 installed in the management room of the hall or at the reception. On the other hand, the portable terminal 470 may automatically transmit a sign of power failure or momentary power failure to the pachinko gaming machine 1 by wireless communication. In this way, the manager of the management room of the hall or the person in charge of the counter at the reception of the hall communicates with the staff such as the staff of the hall who patrols the hall by radio, so that they can head to the pachinko game machine 1 as soon as possible. can be directed to

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when a sign of power failure to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is detected, the image shown in FIG. 67 (portable terminal 470 A power failure notice command (power failure notice information), which is a control command for displaying a power failure notification image displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal 470 in the display area of the mobile terminal 470, is transmitted to the mobile terminal 470 by wireless communication. However, when the portable terminal 470 cannot be charged by the portable terminal charging device 460 built in the plate unit 300, the staff such as the hall clerk who patrols the hall is called. The image shown in FIG. 67 (the image of the power failure notification displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal 470) can be displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal 470, or the mobile terminal 470 installed in the management room or reception area of the hall can be displayed. The mobile terminal 470 may automatically transmit to the managing mobile terminal management device that power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been cut off by wireless communication. An acceleration sensor (not shown) is mounted on the mobile terminal 470 . The mobile terminal 470 can determine the posture of the mobile terminal 470, the state in which the mobile terminal 470 is moved, etc. based on the detection signal from the acceleration sensor. Using the detection signal from this acceleration sensor, the player places the portable terminal 470 received at the hall reception on the concave portion 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. The mobile terminal 470 can determine that the mobile terminal 470 has not been taken out (lifted) from the recess 314d from the state in which the mobile terminal 470 is held. As a result, the mobile terminal 470 determines that it is placed in the recess 314d, and when it determines that it cannot be charged by the mobile terminal charging device 460 built into the plate unit 300, As a trigger, the image shown in FIG. 67 (the image of the notification of the occurrence of a power failure displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal 470) is displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal 470 to inform the call of the staff such as the staff of the hall who patrols the hall. The mobile terminal 470 transmits by wireless communication to the mobile terminal management device that manages the mobile terminal 470 installed in the management room or reception of the hall that the power to the pachinko game machine 1 has been cut off. be able to.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, when the predetermined condition of generating a "jackpot" and generating a jackpot gaming state is established, a screen for calling an attendant such as a hall clerk is displayed in the display area of the portable terminal 470. However, when the lower plate 302 is filled with game balls and a predetermined condition is established, a display area of the portable terminal 470 is displayed to call a hall clerk or other attendant. A screen may be displayed. By doing this, a state in which the game balls are not yet stored in the box (so-called "dollar box") arranged below the lower tray 302 (for example, when the player starts the pachinko game machine 1, Even in the state of the first big hit, there is no need to call a hall clerk or other attendant, so useless calls can be avoided. Therefore, when the box is filled with game balls successively paid out from the pachinko game machine 1, the game balls stored in the lower tray 302 are discharged through the lower tray ball removal hole 324b by operating the lower tray ball removal button 354. The game balls are stored in the lower tray 302 by stopping the downward extraction. Before long, the lower tray 302 is also filled with game balls that are paid out one after another from the pachinko game machine 1. When the lower tray 302 is filled with game balls, it is assumed that a predetermined condition is established, and the mobile phone is operated. A screen for calling an attendant such as a hall clerk is displayed in the display area of the terminal 470 . Specifically, when the lower tray 302 is filled with game balls (more specifically, when the above-described housing space is filled with game balls stored), the full tank switch 550 in FIG. 12 detects this. A detection signal is input to the payout control board 4110 in FIG. 12 via the handle relay terminal 192 in FIG. 12 and the power board 851 in FIG. The payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 of FIG. 12 transmits the frame state 1 command of FIG. 36 to the main control board 4100 of FIG. . The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 of FIG. 11 shapes the received frame state 1 command and transmits the frame state 1 command classified into the state display of FIG. 35 to the peripheral control board 4140. The peripheral control board 4140 receives the frame state 1 command from the main control board 4100, and when the received frame state 1 command includes information that the tank is full, the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 A staff call drawing command for displaying a screen for calling a staff member such as a hall staff member is transmitted to the portable terminal 470 placed in the concave portion 314d.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, a screen for calling a staff member such as a hall clerk is displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal 470 when a predetermined condition of generating a "jackpot" and generating a jackpot gaming state is satisfied. Although it was supposed to be displayed, a predetermined condition of starting a predetermined round out of 15 rounds after the jackpot game is started (for example, 6 rounds are completed and the 7th round is started) is established. Then, a screen for calling an attendant such as a hall clerk may be displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal 470 . In this way, when the jackpot game state occurs and the first round is started, the number of game balls stored in the box arranged below the lower tray 302 may still be small, so 15 rounds are played. Of these, when a predetermined condition of starting a predetermined round is satisfied, the display area of the portable terminal 470 is switched from the screen of the jackpot game performance to a screen for calling a staff such as a hall clerk to be displayed. As a result, the player can be notified that the box will be replaced before the box becomes full.

In the above-described embodiment, a screen for calling an attendant such as a hall clerk is displayed in the display area of the portable terminal 470, and the player operates a call button BT20 provided on this screen to call the hall clerk. When a request to call an attendant such as is output from the mobile terminal 470 to the game information display device DCNT as an attendant call request signal via the pachinko game machine 1, the game information display device DCNT is called to call the hall clerk or the like. The button DCNTb is controlled to be operated, and when the hall clerk or the like operates the call button DCNTb of the game information display device DCNT to release the attendant call state, the game information display device DCNT calls the peripheral control board 4140 to the attendant. By outputting the call release signal, the portable terminal 470 that has received the attendant call release command from the peripheral control board 4140 returns to the normal background color (white in this embodiment) from the display mode of FIG. In the center of the display area, a large character "during the jackpot" is displayed, but a screen for calling a hall clerk or other attendant is displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal 470 for a predetermined period (for example, , 3 minutes), when the mobile terminal 470 cannot receive the staff call release command from the peripheral control board 4140, the mobile terminal management device that manages the mobile terminal 470 installed in the management room or reception of the hall , the information that the hall clerk or the like has not yet arrived at the pachinko gaming machine 1 (that is, has not responded to the player's call request) may be transmitted by radio. In this way, the manager of the management room of the hall or the person in charge of the counter at the reception of the hall communicates with the staff such as the staff of the hall who patrols the hall by radio, so that they can head to the pachinko game machine 1 as soon as possible. can be directed to

In the above-described embodiment, the player places the portable terminal 470 received at the hall reception on the concave portion 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. The mobile terminal 470 managed in the hall may be used instead of the mobile terminal owned by the player himself/herself. In this case, the same application as the portable terminal 470 managed by the pachinko hall may be installed on the portable terminal owned by the player by the pachinko hall clerk or the like, or the pachinko machine 1 manufacturer's homepage may be accessed and the pachinko hall may be installed. You may download and install the same application as the portable terminal 470 to manage.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the image data for portable terminal 470 among the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM of VDP 4160a with built-in tone generator is communication-controlled from channel CH2 of VDP 4160a with built-in tone generator, except when the rest time is set. By outputting the image data from the channel CH2 to the mobile terminal 470 via the communication control circuit 4162a of the unit 4162, the image data from the channel CH2 is drawn in the display area of the mobile terminal 470. Instead of generating the image data to be drawn in the display area of the mobile terminal 470, the image data to be drawn in the display area of the mobile terminal 470 may be installed in the mobile terminal as an application in advance. In this case, peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs an instruction command to the mobile terminal via communication control circuit 4162a, and the mobile terminal draws image data in the display area of the mobile terminal in accordance with the received instruction command to produce an effect. It will proceed.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, even if the mobile terminal 470 is taken out of the hall, the current position can be tracked. Even if the pachinko machine is placed in the pachinko hall, the communication is rejected by the pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine may not be used at all in other halls.

In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described as an example, but the gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine. It can also be applied to fusion game machines (those that play slot games using game balls) in which a pachinko game machine and a slot machine are combined.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Pachinko game machine (game machine), 2... Outer frame, 3... Main frame, 4... Game board, 5... Door frame, 192... Handle relay terminal plate, 300... Dish unit (dish unit), 314d... Recess, 460 Mobile terminal charging device 460, 470 Mobile terminal (mobile terminal) 500 Handle device 506 Front rotary handle 512 Potentiometer 516 Touch switch 519 Gear mechanism 650 Ball shooting device 654 ... small firing solenoid, 740 ... prize ball device (ball prize device), 784 ... external terminal board, 851 ... power supply board, 851a ... fuse, 852 ... power switch, 855 ... power supply control unit, 855a ... synchronous rectification circuit, 855b Power factor correction circuit 855c Smoothing circuit 855d Power supply generation circuit 855e Power supply destruction circuit 857 Emission control unit 857a Emission control circuit 857b Electrolytic capacitor 857c Useless firing prevention circuit 860a Operation switch 860b... Error LED indicator 1100... Game area 1900... Game board side liquid crystal display device 3100... Upper unit 3400... Character unit 3500... Gear decoration unit 4100... Main control board 4100a... Main Control MPU 4100e... Power failure monitoring circuit (power failure monitoring means) 4110... Payout control board 4120... Payout control unit 4120a... Payout control MPU 4140... Peripheral control board 4150... Peripheral control unit 4160... Liquid crystal and sound control 4165 RTC control unit 4170 lamp drive substrate 4180 motor drive substrate BT20 call button DCNT game information display device DCNTa data display unit DCNTb call button DCNTc operation button.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display,
an operation means operable by a player to shoot a game ball;
a display means capable of displaying a performance;
a production executing means for executing the production;
with
The production executing means is
In a situation where the variable display is not performed, when a state in which the game is not performed continues for a predetermined time and a predetermined condition is satisfied, the display means can be caused to execute a standby effect,
When the player touches the operation means with the palm or finger in the state where the standby effect is being executed, the result of the variable display from the standby effect displayed on the display means is displayed. It is possible to switch to the variable display waiting effect that is being performed, and in the situation where the state in which the waiting effect is being executed is switched to the variable display waiting effect, the player touches the operation means with the palm or finger. During the time, the variable display waiting effect is continued in a situation where the variable display is not performed without executing the standby effect,
After the state where the player touches the operation means with the palm or finger in the state where the waiting effect is being executed and the state is switched to the variable display waiting effect, the variable display is performed and again after the variable display is performed. While the player touches the operating means with the palm or fingers in a situation where the variable display is not performed and the variable display waiting effect is being executed, the waiting effect is not executed. Continue the variable display waiting effect,
Furthermore, in a situation where the standby effect is being executed and switched to the variable display waiting effect, even if the player releases the palm or fingers from the operation means, there is a state in which the game is not being performed. A gaming machine characterized in that the variable display waiting effect is continued until it continues for a predetermined time and a predetermined condition is satisfied .

Images